Cover 2 of 2 - Army and Air Force Exchange Service Drum MM Express/Solici… · PROJECT MANUAL VOLUME 2 of 2 NEW EXPRESS/GAS, BARBER SHOP & NBFF FT. DRUM, NEW YORK AAFES PN: 1367-15-000003

PROJECT MANUAL

VOLUME 2 of 2

NEW EXPRESS/GAS, BARBER SHOP & NBFF FT. DRUM, NEW YORK AAFES PN: 1367-15-000003 CONTRACTS: COMBINED WORK – ALL TRADES

BY:

DATE: 07 AUGUST 2017 SOLICITATION SPECIFICATIONS

Illinois Design Firm License Number 184-002661 Post Office Box 820 600 West Main Street ▪ Suite 2 Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5709 Fax 618 ▪ 457 ▪ 5638

A R C H I T E C T S

NEW EXPRESS/GAS, BARBER SHOP & NBFF FT. DRUM, NEW YORK

AAFES PN: 1367-15-000003

ARCHITECT

h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS 600 West Main Street Suite 2

Carbondale, Illinois 62901 618 457 5709 Fax 457 5638

E-mail [email protected]

PROFESSIONAL CONSULTANTS

CIVIL ENGINEERING

Mach IV Engineering & Surveying LLC 2260 Salscheider Court

Green Bay, Wisconsin 54313 920 569 5765 Fax 569 5767 E-mail [email protected]

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT

Mach IV Engineering & Surveying LLC 2260 Salscheider Court

Green Bay, Wisconsin 54313 920 569 5765 Fax 569 5767 E-mail [email protected]

STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

Hodge Structural Engineering 22 Chestnut Street

Evansville, Indiana 47713 812 422 2558 Fax 422 3337

E-mail [email protected]

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc. 413 Main Street

Post Office Box 581 Mt. Vernon, Illinois 62864

618 242 0473 Fax 242 2330 E-mail [email protected]

hmb PROJECT NO. 1503.0

07 AUGUST 2017

© 2017 h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS


AAFES PN: 1367-15-000003

ARCHITECT: h. michael bohnsack ARCHITECTS

Project Manual: Section 00 86 00

All Sections of Division 1 (Except Section 01 35 56)

Section 03 35 36

Section 04 20 00

Section 05 40 00

Section 05 50 00

All Sections of Division 6





SIGNATURE All Sections of Division 11


CURRENT DATE 07 August 2017 Section 31 31 16

Section 32 31 00

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Nov 2018

Drawing Sheets: All T-Sheets, All CA-Sheets, All A-Sheets, All EQ-Sheets, All FS-Sheets

PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEY/CIVIL ENGINEER: Mach IV Engineering & Surveying, LLC


Section 31 10 00

Section 31 20 00

Section 31 21 00

Section 31 23 33

Section 32 12 16

Section 32 13 13

Section 32 13 73

Section 32 17 23


SIGNATURE

CURRENT DATE 07 August 2017

LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 31 July 2018

Drawing Sheets: All C-Sheets

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Yellow Springs Design, LLC


Section 32 93 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 31 Dec 2018

Drawing Sheets: L-1.00

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Hodge Structural Engineers


Section 05 12 00

Section 05 21 00

Section 05 31 00

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 31 Aug 2019

Drawing Sheets: All S-Sheets

MECHANICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.

Project Manual: All Sections of Division 22


Section 33 52 08

Section 33 52 10

SIGNATURE



Drawing Sheets: CU-2.00, All M-Sheets, All P-Sheets, GC-1.00, GA-1.00, All GM-Sheets,

All GE-Sheets

FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.


Section 27 51 17

Section 28 31 11

SIGNATURE


LICENSE EXPIRATION DATE 30 Sep 2019

Drawing Sheets: FS-1.00, FA-1.00 FP-1.00, All LS-Sheets

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: McCoy & Howard Consulting Engineers, Inc.


Section 27 15 00

Section 28 16 00

SIGNATURE



Drawing Sheets: Sheet CU-1.00, All E-Sheets

PROJECT MANUAL TOC – Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1


AAFES PN: 1367-15-000003 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGES

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING CONTRACTING

List of Drawings 00 86 00-3

SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Requirements of Ft. Drum 01 00 00-10 Summary of Work 01 10 00-10 AAFES Furnished & Installed Equipment 01 10 17-5 AAFES Furnished/Contractor Installed Equipment 01 10 18-4 AAFES Safety Policies & Procedures 01 10 60-4 AAFES Safety Regulations & Codes 01 13 00-8 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00-3 Schedule of Values 01 29 73-2 Progress Payments 01 29 76-3 Project Management & Coordination 01 31 13-3 AAFES Progress Meetings 01 31 19-2 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 00-3 Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 01 33 00-19 AAFES Environmental Protection 01 35 43-10 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures 01 35 56-121 AAFES Weather Table 01 42 10-2 Quality Control 01 45 16-3

Testing Laboratory Services 01 45 29-4 Temporary Utilities 01 51 00-5 Field Offices & Sheds 01 52 00-3 Temporary Facilities, Barriers & Controls 01 55 00-9

Project Identification & Signs 01 58 00-2 Material & Equipment 01 65 00-2 Storage & Protection 01 66 00-3 Grades, Lines & Levels 01 73 13-1 Cutting & Patching 01 73 29-2 Cleaning 01 74 00-2 Construction Waste Management & Disposal (with Attachments) 01 74 19-15 Systems Start-up 01 75 00-3 Project Closeout (with DoD Form 1354 Attachments) 01 77 00-31 Project Record Documents 01 78 00-2

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONDITIONS

Subsurface Investigation & Geotechnical Report 02 31 00-27

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00-12 Polished Concrete Floor Finish 03 35 36-9


DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Unit Masonry 04 20 00-21

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Structural Steel 05 12 00-6 Steel Joists 05 21 00-5 Steel Deck 05 31 00-4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-8 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-18

DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS

Rough Carpentry 06 10 00-6 Finish Carpentry 06 20 00-7 Fire Retardant Wood Treatment 06 30 00-4 Architectural Woodwork 06 40 00-9

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION

Building Insulation 07 21 00-8 Metal Wall Panel Systems 07 42 13-7 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (TPO) 07 54 00-12 Preformed Metal Soffit Panels 07 61 03-5 Flashing & Sheet Metal 07 62 00-9 Firestopping 07 84 00-6 Building Joint Sealers 07 90 00-6

DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS

Metal Doors & Frames 08 11 00-7 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16-5 Access Doors 08 31 00-5 Traffic Doors 08 38 00-3 Aluminum Curtain Walls & Entrance Doors 08 41 10-11 Automatic Entrance Doors 08 42 29-9 Finish Hardware 08 71 00-14 Glass & Glazing 08 81 00-8

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Gypsum Drywall Systems 09 21 16-10 Tile 09 30 00-8 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 00-5 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 00-6 Carpet 09 68 00-5 Wall Coverings 09 72 16-4 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels (FRP) 09 77 00- 4 Painting 09 90 00-8

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Specialty Signs 10 14 00-7 Wall Surface Protection Systems 10 26 00-4 Toilet Accessories 10 28 13-5 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories 10 44 00-4 Metal Lockers 10 51 13-3 Fixed Sunshades & Canopies 10 71 10-6


DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Food Service Equipment 11 40 00-7 Used Cooking Oil Equipment 11 80 00-6

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Floor Mats & Frames 12 48 13-4 Site Furnishings 12 93 00-3

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 00-3 Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping 21 11 00-6 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13-12 Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 16-12 Dry Chemical Fire Suppression System 21 16 16-3

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

General Provisions - Plumbing 22 05 10-5 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 12-9 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 13-1 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-3 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23-4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 29-7 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53-4 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 19-9 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 16-7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19-4 Domestic Water Pumps 22 11 23-4 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 16-5 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 13 19-4 Storm Drainage Piping 22 14 13-4 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 22 14 23-3 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 16 13-9 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00-4 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures 22 42 13-5

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Mechanical-General Provisions 23 01 00-3 Basic Materials and Methods-Mechanical 23 05 00-4 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13-2 Hangers and Supports for Mechanical 23 05 29-4 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-4 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC Systems 23 05 60-2 Mechanical Insulation 23 07 00-6 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 00-9 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 09 93-7 Hydronic Piping 23 21 13-10 Hydronic Pumps 23 21 23-3 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties 23 23 00-4 HVAC Water Treatment 23 25 00-3 Metal Ductwork 23 31 13-3


Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00-3 Fans 23 34 23-3 Air Curtains 23 34 33-2 Air Terminal Units 23 36 00-3 Air Outlet and Inlet 23 37 13-2 Food Service Ventilation Systems 23 38 15-2 Condensing Boilers 23 52 16-5 Packaged Water Chillers 23 64 00-4 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units 23 73 13-6 Split-System Air-Conditioners 23 81 26-3 Fin Tube Convectors 23 82 33-2 Unit Heaters 23 82 39-3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

Medium Voltage Cable 26 05 13-7 Building Wire and Cable 26 05 19-3 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 26-3 Supporting Devices 26 05 29-2 Conduit 26 05 33-5 Boxes 26 05 34-4 Cabinets and Enclosures 26 05 35-2 Duct Bank 26 05 43-4 Electrical Identification 26 05 53-3 Electric Controls 26 09 23-2 Enclosed Contactors 26 09 24-3 Occupancy Sensors 26 09 25-3 Pad Mounted Distribution Transformer 26 12 00-5 Switchboards & Panelboards 26 24 16-4 Electrical Sensing and Measurement 26 27 13-2 Wiring Devices 26 27 26-4 Enclosed Switches 26 28 17-2 Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13-7 Manual Transfer Switches 26 36 00-5 Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) 26 43 13-4 Interior Luminaires 26 51 00-3 Exterior Lighting 26 56 00-6 Testing 26 60 00-2

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

Mass Notification System 27 51 17-9

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY

Intrusion Detection 28 16 00-10 Fire Alarm 28 31 11-15

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Site Clearing 31 10 00-4 Earth Moving 31 20 00-7 Landscape Grading 31 21 00-2 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities 31 23 33-12 Termite Control 31 31 16-3


DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK

Asphalt Paving 32 12 16-8 Concrete Paving 32 13 13-12 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73-4 Pavement Markings 32 17 23-2 Fences & Gates 32 31 00-4 Turf & Grasses 32 92 00-4 Plants 32 93 00-7

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Pressure and Leakage Tests 33 01 10-4 Disinfecting Pipelines 33 01 15-9 Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers 33 01 30-15 Tracer Wire 33 05 27-2 Piping-General Provisions 33 11 00-8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 33 11 11-6 Polyethylene Wrap 33 11 17-4 Gate Valves 33 12 16-2 Fire Hydrants 33 12 19-2 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 33 31 11-5 Precast Concrete Manholes 33 31 12-7 Sanitary Sewer Laterals 33 31 15-5 Storm Sewerage System 33 41 00-6 Canopy 33 52 08-4 Fuel Dispensing and Aboveground Storage Tank Systems 33 52 10-20

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

1. GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General administrative and procedural requirements for the plumbing installations.

B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 2. Painting and finishing. 3. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, tunnels, and walk-in cooler/freezer.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."


2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section 08 31 13, "Access Doors and Frames."

2. PRODUCTS

A. Not applicable.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on submittals.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.


G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.3 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Section 05 50 00, "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION 21 05 00

FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING 21 21 11 00 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 11 00 - FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components from 5 foot outside the building in to the building. 1. Provide Fire Department Connection to site contractor for installation. 2. Install supervisory switches on post indicator valve provided by site contractor.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for wet-pipe fire-suppression sprinkler systems

inside the building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with the "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-service-main products.

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.


2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew point

temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner and Architect/Engineer’s no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner and Architect/Engineer’s written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Service Piping: Match section 22 11 13.

2.2 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc. 2. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. 3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. 4. Kidde Fire Fighting. 5. Potter Roemer. 6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.


B. Description: Freestanding, with cast-bronze body, Storz connection matching local fire-department standards.

C. Standard: UL 405.

D. Connections: 5” Storz with 30 angle down.

E. Cap: Provide cap and retainer chain.

F. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome plated.

G. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR."

2.3 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: UL 753 and "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment.

B. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully open position.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall-Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard-weight, zinc-coated, plain ends.

2.5 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

C. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

D. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

E. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.


2.6 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 24 and section 22 11 13 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

B. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping at building floor slab until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building's fire-suppression water-service piping systems when those systems are installed.

3.2 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground valves with valve box do not require supervision.

B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with

toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.

3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in exterior walls.

1. Exception: Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

C. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeves and piping using sleeve seals.

D. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete walls with grout.

E. Install the following sleeve materials:

1. Galvanized steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. 2. Cast-iron wall-pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.


3.5 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete floor slabs and walls at fire-suppression water-service piping entries into the building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described below.

B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times the working pressure, or 200 psig, whichever is greater, for two hours.

1. Comply with NFPA-13.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground fire-suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic fire-suppression water-service piping or fire-suppression water-service piping with electrically insulated fittings, on main electrical meter panel. Comply with requirements for identifying devices in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of

chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution

containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in

water coming from system.


d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging activities.

3.9 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Indicator-post underground fire-suppression water-service valves NPS 3 and larger shall be 175-psig, UL-listed or FM-approved, iron, nonrising-stem gate valves with indicator-post flange.


WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 13 13 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Alarm devices. 5. Pressure gages. 6. Backflow preventer.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 9123, “Interior Painting.” 2. Division 26 Electrical.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s) using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Contractor shall perform his own flow test for water supply data used in his hydraulic calculations.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 5 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler – 130 sq. ft. 3. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement:

a. 250 gpm, 60 minutes.


D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified NICET level III designer responsible for their preparation, and a fire protection engineer complying with UFC 3-600-01 requirements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. HVAC ductwork. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, NICET designer, and fire protection engineer.

F. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

L. Water Quality Test Report: For suitability of water for using schedule 10 piping.

M. All submittals shall be submitted to Ft. Drum fire department concurrently with the submittal to A/E.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

E. Military Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation and testing shall comply with the following:

1. UFC 3-600-01 “Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities” dated 8 October 2016, with 28 November 2016 revision.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS.

A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Grinnell. b. Anvil. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa).

B. Ball Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. c. NIBCO.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. 3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or

ductile-iron body with grooved ends. 5. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:


a. Global Safety Products, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company.


c. NIBCO.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 4. Body Material: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded.

D. Iron Butterfly Valves:


a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. Style: Lug or wafer. 6. End Connections: Grooved.

E. Check Valves:


a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. h. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. k. NIBCO INC. l. Potter Roemer. m. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. n. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. o. Victaulic Company. p. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 312. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Type: Swing check. 5. Body Material: Cast iron. 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.


f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. Hammond Valve. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. j. NIBCO INC.

2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

G. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Global Safety Products, Inc. c. Kennedy Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO. f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. g. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. b. Body Material: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: a. Valve Type: Butterfly. b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch indicating device.

2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory” or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:


a. Fire Protection Products, Inc. b. United Brass Works, Inc. c. NIBCO.

C. Ball Valves:



a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Fire Protection Products, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. g. Victaulic Company. h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 3. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 4. Victaulic Company. 5. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum. 3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Quick-response for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless

otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. 3. Painted.


E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Guards:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw.

C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, set-screw.

D. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

E. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assembly:

1. Manufacturer: Watts, Ames, Conbraco. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: 12 psig. 5. Body: Cast iron or stainless steel. 6. End Connections: Grooved joint. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: FM approved indicating valves.

2.10 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:

1. Standard: UL 464. 2. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. 3. Size: 6 inch minimum diameter. 4. Finish: Red enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use. 5. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:

1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.


3. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

4. Type: Paddle operated. 5. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 6. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Valve Supervisory Switches:

1. Standard: UL 346. 2. Type: Electrically supervised. 3. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. 4. Design: signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 5. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.11 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Standard: UL 393.

B. Dial Size: 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter.

C. Pressure Gage Range: 0-250-psig minimum.

D. Label: Include “WATER” label on dial face.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to A/E and fire department.


A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.


G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install forward flow backflow preventer test header.

I. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

J. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

K. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.


3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. At contractor’s option, install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.6 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, stamped

steel with set-screw or spring clips. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split plate,

stamped steel with set-screw. 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with spring clips.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.


B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints if water analysis shows water is non-corrosive.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent sprinklers attached to anti-freeze system;

and sidewall, dry sprinklers as indicated.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Recessed Sprinklers: Factory painted white, with bright factory painted white escutcheon.

2. Upright: Brass. 3. Sidewall: Factory painted white, with bright factory painted white escutcheon. 4. Dry Pendent: Chrome. 5. Dry Sidewall: Chrome.


DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 16 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 13 16 - DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Sprinklers. 4. Alarm devices. 5. Pressure gages. 6. Air compressor and accessories.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections:

1. Section 09 9123, “Interior Painting.” 2. Division 26 Electrical.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.


A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s) using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Contractor shall perform his own flow test for water supply data used in his hydraulic calculations.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 5 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler – 130 sq. ft. 3. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement:

a. 250 gpm, 60 minutes.


D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified NICET level III designer responsible for their preparation, and a fire protection engineer complying with UFC 3-600-01 requirements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping. 2. HVAC ductwork. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, NICET designer, and fire protection engineer.

F. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

L. Water Quality Test Report: For suitability of water for using schedule 10 piping.

M. All submittals shall be submitted to Ft. Drum fire department concurrently with the submittal to A/E.



1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

E. Military Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation and testing shall comply with the following:

1. UFC 3-600-01 “Fire Protection Engineering for Facilities” dated 8 October 2016, with 28 November 2016 revision.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

2. PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS.

A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Grinnell. b. Anvil. c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 3. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.


C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES


1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. 2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa).

B. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. c. NIBCO.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. 3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or

ductile-iron body with grooved ends. 5. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Global Safety Products, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company.


c. NIBCO.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 4. Body Material: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded.

D. Iron Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. Style: Lug or wafer. 6. End Connections: Grooved.

E. Check Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AFAC Inc. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. c. Anvil International, Inc. d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. h. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. k. NIBCO INC. l. Potter Roemer. m. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. n. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. o. Victaulic Company. p. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 312. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig. 4. Type: Swing check. 5. Body Material: Cast iron. 6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.


f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. g. Hammond Valve. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. j. NIBCO INC.

2. Standard: UL 262. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. 5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

G. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Global Safety Products, Inc. c. Kennedy Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO. f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. g. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. b. Body Material: Bronze. c. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: a. Valve Type: Butterfly. b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.

6. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory switch indicating device.

H. Dry-Type Valves:

1. Standard: UL 260. 2. Design: Differential-pressure type. 3. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level,

alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

4. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: a. Standard: UL 260. b. Type: automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping. c. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,

bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 175 psig outlet pressure.

5. Air Compressor: a. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” or FM Global’s “Approval

Guide.” b. Motor Horsepower: Fractional. c. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.


2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory” or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

B. Angle Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fire Protection Products, Inc. b. United Brass Works, Inc. c. NIBCO.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Fire Protection Products, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. g. Victaulic Company. h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. National Fittings, Inc. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLERS


1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 3. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.


4. Victaulic Company. 5. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:

1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum. 3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Quick-response with Dscharge Coefficient K of 8.0, and for "Ordinary"

temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. 3. Painted.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

F. Sprinkler Guards:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with set-screw.

C. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, set-screw.

D. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

E. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing to A/E and fire department.



A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install forward flow backflow preventer test header.

I. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

J. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

K. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.


A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.


2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. At contractor’s option, install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.6 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, stamped

steel with set-screw or spring clips. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece or split plate,

stamped steel with set-screw. 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with spring clips.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems."





1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps. 6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.


A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints if water analysis shows water is non-corrosive.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3.11 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers. 3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers. 4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent sprinklers attached to anti-freeze system;

and sidewall, dry sprinklers as indicated.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Recessed Sprinklers: Factory painted white, with bright factory painted white escutcheon.

2. Upright: Brass. 3. Sidewall: Factory painted white, with bright factory painted white escutcheon.


4. Dry Pendent: Chrome. 5. Dry Sidewall: Chrome.


DRY CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 21 16 16 - 1

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 16 16 - DRY CHEMICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to this section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Installation of dry chemical fire suppression system for new gasoline dispensing canopy, including the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Nozzles. 4. Actuation system. 5. Associated power and control wiring.


A. Components and installation shall comply with the following:

1. Cylinders: DOT 4BW450. 2. System: NFPA 17, NFPA 30, and UL 1254.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, fittings, couplings, nozzles, actuators, and sensors.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. a. Pyrochem. b. TYCO. c. Fike.


A. Pipe: All pipe shall be Schedule 40 galvanized, steel pipe in compliance with NFPA 17. All pipe ends shall be thoroughly reamed after cutting, and all oil chips, and debris shall be removed prior to nozzle installation.


B. Fittings: Standard weight malleable, galvanized, fittings shall be used.

C. Size: All system pipe and fittings will be sized in accordance with the system Technical Manual.

D. Joints: No joint sealant shall be used in the discharge piping. Exception: Teflon tape may be used in the discharge piping.

E. Straps: All system discharge pipe shall be securely fastened by means of pipe hangers. UL listed pipe hangers shall be used.

F. Union: A union shall be installed in the discharge piping conveniently close to the cylinder valve to permit disconnection for inspection and service.

2.3 CYLINDER AND AGENT

A. Agent: The extinguishing agent shall be sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical agent (BC type).

B. Cylinders: Steel cylinders manufactured, tested, and marked in accordance with DOT 4BW450 shall be used to store the extinguishing agent. All models shall be charged with dry nitrogen to 450 psig at 70 degree F.

C. Cylinder Valve: A pressure sealed poppet-type valve having a brass body, stainless steel stem with rubber seat washer, fusible safety relief assembly, and pressure gauge shall be used on all agent cylinders.

D. Cylinder Bracketing: Cylinders shall be mounted vertically. The cylinders shall be secured by use of a steel mounting bracket affixed to a rigid bracket capable of supporting the weight of the filled cylinder and the concussion of cylinder discharge.

2.4 ACTUATION CONTROLS

A. Control Head: The control head shall be mounted directly on the valve of a pneumatic actuating cylinder. A carbon dioxide pilot cartridge that complies with MIL-C0601G shall be used as an integral component of the control head. Control head status shall be visually indicated by a SET/FIRED indicator.

B. Detection: The ambient temperature of the hazard area shall be monitored by fixed temperature electrical thermal detectors. When the temperature of the hazard area exceeds the rating of any detector, the detector shall close a normally open switch element within the detector, sending a signal to the control head. This signal shall energize a solenoid in the control head which exercises the control head and actuates the system.

C. Pneumatic Actuation: The system shall have a pneumatic actuating cylinder valve that opens upon activation of the control head. The valve shall release nitrogen from the Nitrogen cylinder into the pneumatic piping and tubing network. This nitrogen shall depress a piston above the valve stem in each agent cylinder, opening each agent cylinder valve and releasing the pressurized agent.

D. Manual Actuation: The system shall have mechanical manual actuation capability requiring no electrical power. This shall be accomplished remotely by means of a remote mechanical pull station.

E. Auxiliary Output: The system shall shut off power to all fuel dispensing units in the event of system actuation. This shall be accomplished by means of dry contacts on a micro switch installed in the control head. The micro switch shall also activate fire alarm on system operation.

F. Supervision: A solenoid monitor shall be used to supervise the integrity of all electrical actuation circuits, whether automatic or manual.


2.5 DISTRIBUTION NOZZLES

A. Nozzles: The system shall utilize discharge nozzles to distribute agent throughout the hazard area. The quantity, location, and orientation of nozzles shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s technical guide.

B. Nozzle Covers: All nozzles shall be installed with nozzle covers to prevent foreign matter from clogging the discharge nozzles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Basic piping installation shall comply with system manufacturer’s technical guidelines.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install supports for vertical piping every 48 inches.

B. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test system in accordance with NFPA 17, NFPA 30, UL 1254 and local authority having jurisdiction.

1. Schedule testing with fire department and AAFES manager. 2. Provide all materials, labor, and clean-up required for testing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


GENERAL PROVISION - PLUMBING 22 05 10-1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 10 - GENERAL PROVISIONS - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES


B. Related Sections:

1. General Provisions of the contract, including the Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specification sections.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent they are applicable.

1. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: (a) International Building Code, 2015.

(b) National Electrical Code, 2014. (c) International Plumbing Code, 2015. (d) International Mechanical Code, 2015. (e) Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970. (f) For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National Fire

Protection Association.

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: (1) AGA American Gas Association. (2) ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (3) ANSI American National Standards Institute (4) ASE Association of Safety Engineers (5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineer (6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers (7) AWWA American Water Works Association (8) EPA Environmental Protection Agency (9) FS Federal Specifications (10) IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (11) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (12) MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American (13) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (14) NFPA National Fire Protection Association (15) NSC National Safety Council (16) NSF National Sanitation Foundation (17) SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry (18) UL Underwriters Laboratories (19) ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.


B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data. B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the

manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Architect/Engineer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified. B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required to avoid

delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from Architect/Engineer.

No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.8 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer's decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur, or

where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all

interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns. Architect/Engineer will reconcile conflicts and adjustments where such adjustments are warranted.

1.9 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no


cost to Owner.

1.10 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and the exact

location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide the Architect/Engineer with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back. Manual shall include roster of all Owner training session attendees. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals. Roster will identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Architect/Engineer designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 01 Closeout procedures for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the

requirements of Division 01. B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and

interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate addenda, approved substitutions, change orders, actual equipment

and materials used.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance

labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling.


B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect

stored equipment and materials from damage. C. Coordinate deliveries of plumbing materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.

Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.

B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Refer to the Division 08: Access Doors and Frames.

3.2 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 33 for rough-in requirements.

3.3 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: (1) Coordinate plumbing equipment and materials installation with other building components. (2) Verify all dimensions by field measurements. (3) Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for plumbing

installation. (4) Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in

place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. (5) Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

(6) Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of plumbing equipment and materials.

(7) Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing services and overhead equipment to provide maximum headroom possible.

(8) Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

(9) Coordinate the installation of plumbing materials and equipment above ceiling with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.

(10) Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surface. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”

(11) Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.


(12) Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

(13) Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.

(14) Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed expose in finished spaces.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.

B. Refer to Section 01 73 29 for general requirements for cutting and patching. C. Refer to Division 26 for requirements for cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and

materials. D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and

patching. E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of plumbing

installations. F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is necessitated by ill-

timed, defective, or non-conforming installations. G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of plumbing equipment and materials required to:

(1) Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. (2) Remove and replace defective work. (3) Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. (4) Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. (5) Upon written instruction from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for

Architect/Engineer’s representative observation of concealed work.

H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division 01 for general requirements for final cleaning.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Accomplish commissioning of plumbing system and equipment in accordance Section 01 91 00.

END 22 05 10

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 12-1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 12 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.


2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified, at no cost to exchange service. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate locations and size requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.


B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company.


c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .

1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic or Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.


2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.


E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Install piping to avoid running above electrical panels.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

M. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.

N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 . b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END 22 05 12

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 5. ECM.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole or ECM type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END 22 05 13

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

B. Dial-type pressure gages.

C. Gage attachments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weksler. b. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. c. Trerice, H. O. Co. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. e. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum, 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

2.2 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Marsh. d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. e. Trerice. f. Weksler g. Weiss Instruments, Inc. h. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.3 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

B. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

C. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Outlet of each mixing valve.

D. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.


3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

END 22 05 19

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Bronze or brass ball valves.

B. Bronze or brass swing check valves.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules. 3. Division 22 Section “Facility Water Distribution Piping” for general-duty and specialty valves for

site construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 2. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5 plug

valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective

sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze or Brass Ball Valves with Bronze or Brass Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc.


b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze or Brass. f. Ends: Threaded or sweat. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze or Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.


C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves. 2. Throttling Service: Ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: solder ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: threaded ends.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Full port two-piece ball valves.

END 22 05 23

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. General Provisions of the contract, including Division 00 and Division 01, shall apply to Division 22 specifications sections.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

B. Trapeze pipe hangers.

C. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

D. Fastener systems.

E. Pipe positioning systems.

F. Equipment supports.

G. Related Sections:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.


C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more stainless-steel, continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Roof Mounted Piping Supports: Pre-manufactured supports by “Miro” Industries or equivalent.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.


D. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with

clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate

for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.


C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of

welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing in contact with the hanger.


G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes.

2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

3. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction,

to attach to top flange of structural shape. 2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles. 3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange

edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads. 9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using

clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 13. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 14. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal

movement where headroom is limited.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

END 22 05 29

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Equipment labels.

B. Warning signs and labels.

C. Pipe labels.

D. Valve tags.

E. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White.


4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F .

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.


2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch, minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.


4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Blue.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Yellow.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

END 22 05 53

PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 07 19 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Insulation of plumbing piping, including the following:

1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied PVC fitting covers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. RBX Corporation. d. Halstead.

D. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.


2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc. b. Armacell LCC. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. d. RBX Corporation. e. Halstead.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Johns-Manville. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. d. Speedline Corporation.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works. d. Marathon Industries, Inc. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-mm) dry film thickness.


3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FITTING COVERS

A. PVC Fitting Covers: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Covers shall not exceed ASTM E-84 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed rating.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto PVC Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corp. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. 3M.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F

with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs

from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure

strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams

at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.


B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to

valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with

vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward

clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal

tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent

straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch,

and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Exterior Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.


3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. Piping in wall spaces and chases only:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: Pre-manufactured kit.

D. Horizontal Storm Water Piping Inside the Building:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

E. Roof and Overflow Drain Bodies:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

END 22 07 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Underground and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building and within the building.

B. Specialty valves.

C. Flexible connectors.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Piping. 2. Fittings.

B. Water Test Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.



B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting Officer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Contracting Officer’s written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Press type fittings may be used in lieu of solder joint fittings.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

C. Water Service Piping from 5 foot outside the building to inside the building: Match section 22 11 33.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.


C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.


D. Install domestic water piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain, and plumb.

E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

I. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

O. Install piping to avoid running above electric panels.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."


1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use dielectric flanges to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.




B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application

where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 to NPS 4 shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings joints; or press type fittings.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.


B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

END 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Hose bibs.

B. Wall hydrants.

C. Water hammer arresters.

D. Backflow preventers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze.


3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.2 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounting with cover. 9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

2.3 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:


1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. See notes on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers where indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

C. Install water hammer arrester at each flush valve/toilet group.

D. Install hydrants and hose bibbs where indicated on plans.


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

END 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 11 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 11 23 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.

B. Thermostats and time clocks for domestic hot water recirculation pumps.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Complete operating and maintenance manuals including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for ordering replaceable parts: 1. Include complete list indicating all components of the systems. 2. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each item of equipment. 3. Diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation and

maintenance.

D. Completed System Readiness Checklist provided by the Commissioning Agent and completed by the contractor, signed by a qualified technician and dated on the date of completion, in accordance with the requirements of Section 22 0800 Commission of Plumbing Systems.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.


1.6 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, SEPARATELY COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Bell & Gossett. 2. TACO. 3. Grundfos.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, separately coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Bronze radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Bronze statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. 3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Coupling: Flexible. 5. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket. 6. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type. 7. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and characteristics shall be as scheduled on drawings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Strap-on temperature sensor, for installation on piping. 2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.


3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required. 6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac. 7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.

B. Time Clocks: Seven day programmable with one occupied period per day.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Support pumps from piping, per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.

C. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

D. Install time clocks adjacent to pumps.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.

E. Connect thermostats and timeclocks to pumps that they control.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 0553.

3.5 STARTUP AND TESTING

A. Make tests as recommended by product manufacturer and listed standards and under actual or simulated operating conditions and provide full compliance with design and specified


requirements. Tests of the various items of equipment shall be performed simultaneously with the system of which each item is an integral part.

B. System Test: After installation is completed provided an operational test of the completed system including flow rates, pressure compliance, alarms and all control functions.

C. When any defeats are detected, correct defects and repeat test.

D. The commissioning agent will observe startup and contractor testing of selected equipment. Coordinate the startup and contractor testing schedules with the resident engineer and commissioning agent. Provide a minimum of 7 days prior to notice.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Set time clock for schedule selected by Contracting Officer.

END 22 11 23

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 13 16 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Soil, waste, and vent piping from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building including the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.





B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-DWV" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, soil, waste and vent piping shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.

B. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."


B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

D. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 2-1/2” and smaller: 2 percent downward in direction

of flow. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 3” to 6”: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping 8” and larger: 1/2 percent downward in direction of

flow. 4. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing”.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.


B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.



1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.




D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:


1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING


B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

END 22 13 16

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 13 19 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Cleanouts.

B. Floor drains.

C. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam. b. Sioux Chief. c. Smith, Jay R. d. Wade. e. Zurn.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. See schedule on drawings.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger

piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Install floor sinks square with walls.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

F. Assemble open hub drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, where indicated.

H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.



3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END 22 13 19

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 14 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 14 13 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Storm drainage piping from 5 foot beyond the building to inside the building including the following:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.




B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS





A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe PVC socket fittings and solvent cemented joints.

C. Underground storm drainage piping shall be the following: 1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.


A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Specialties."

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

E. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."


G. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

H. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

I. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping unless otherwise indicated.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow unless otherwise indicated.

J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

K. Install underground PVC storm drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Section 22 0511.

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.


F. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.



1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.




D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING


B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

END 22 14 13

STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 14 23 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 14 23 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Roof drains.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: As scheduled. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Extension Collars: As required by roofing supplier. 9. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 10. Expansion Joint: Not required. 11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 12. Dome Material: PE. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required. 15. Water Dam: Not required.

B. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, Emergency Overflow Roof Drains:



a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains. 3. Body Material: Cast iron. 4. Dimension of Body: As scheduled. 5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required. 6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Extension Collars: As required by roofing supplier. 9. Underdeck Clamp: Required. 10. Expansion Joint: Not required. 11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required. 12. Dome Material: PE. 13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required. 14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required. 15. Water Dam: Required, 2 inches high minimum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets. 3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door or cover in wall.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END 22 14 23

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 22 16 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLMBING SECTION 22 16 13 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Natural gas piping including the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Gas meter.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Meter/Service Regulator Assembly: Piping, valves, service regulator, meter and specialities by contractor, complying with Ft Drum standards.

E. Point of Delivery: Piping outlet of service-regulator/meter assembly.

F. Natural Gas Piping: Piping that conveys natural gas from point of delivery to natural gas utilization equipment in or on building including line and equipment regulators, gas valves, and specialities.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: 11”-7” W.C..

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected

models.



C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves, pressure regulators and service meter to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research base utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Coordinate gas service piping and regulator/meter assembly with Baltimore Gas and Electric Company.

1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:


a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and

spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

B. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: ASTM D2513 type II high density, SDR 11 pipe with ASTM D2683 socket type fittings. Pipe shall have PE 8300 designation.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 2. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 3. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 4. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm).

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1

inch and smaller. 5. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on

valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"

and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Gas Valves in PE Piping: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Nordstrom Poly-Gas. b. Kerotest Poly-Ball. c. Lyall-Polytech.

2. Provide valve box to grade with cast iron top labeled “GAS”.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator.


4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Equimeter 243 series with IVR valve.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure

inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150

percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to

vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or

welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or



C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt sleeves,

phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or


2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

B. Trace Wire: Provide continuous #12 THW copper trace wire for buried natural gas piping.

2.8 GAS METER

A. Meter shall be Roots B3, Romet Rotary, or Elster RVG. Meters shall be positive displacement type with pulse remote readout which shall provide not less than one pulse per 1000 cubic feet of gas and interface with the Ft. Drum remote metering system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install PE piping with minimum burial depth of 30”. Provide a yellow tracer wire located 8-12 inches above the line. Provide a yellow marking tape with printed label 12” below the surface.


C. Provide an anode-less riser located 30” below ground, prior to rising to the meter.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment connection locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Concealed Location Installations:

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

O. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

P. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

Q. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.



A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is

specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and

where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.


D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat. d. Color: yellow.

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.

3.10 METER INSTALLATION

A. Meter and associated piping shall be installed in accordance with ASME B31.8, Ft Drum standards, and National Grid requirements.




1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 INDOOR AND OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe NPS 2” and smaller: Malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe NPS 2-1/2” and larger: Wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

B. Underground piping shall be PE.

3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be bronze or brass ball valve.

B. Piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, regular-port, bronze or brass ball valves with bronze trim.

END 22 16 13

FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 34 00 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 34 00 - FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Commercial, high-efficiency, instantaneous and storage type gas water heaters.

B. Water heater accessories.

C. Water heater combustion air and gas vent piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

E. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

F. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of controls. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion: a. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:

1) Controls and Other Components: Three years. b. Compression Tanks: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



B. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Instantaneous Gas Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Rinnai. c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. d. State Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance.

3. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

4. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 5. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. 6. Capacity and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings.

C. Commercial, High-Efficiency, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

1. Manufacturers: a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Lochinvar Corporation. c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company. d. State Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions. Following features and attributes may be modified or omitted if water heater otherwise complies with requirements for performance.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure rating. a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank

before testing. 1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.


2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances: a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except

connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Include

one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.

6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 7. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. 8. Capacity and Characteristics: See schedule on drawings

2.2 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

B. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.

C. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.

D. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

E. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of safety control.


F. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater, relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.

H. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.

I. Install schedule 40 PVC exhaust and intake piping and fittings for inlet and outlet of condensing water heat and terminate through the roof in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendation.

J. Install condensate drain tubing from water heater to nearest floor drain.

K. Fill water heaters with water.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END 22 34 00

COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 13 - 1

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 42 13 - COMMERICAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Faucets for lavatories, showers and sinks.

B. Flushometers.

C. Toilet seats.

D. Protective shielding guards.

E. Fixture supports.

F. Water closets.

G. Urinals.

H. Lavatories.

I. Kitchen sinks.

J. Service basins.

K. Owner-furnished fixtures.

L. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories."

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.


G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer,

obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 4. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 5. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 6. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 7. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 8. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.


6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 8. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. See schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 AAFES FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT

A Provide rough-ins and final connections to all Exchange furnished equipment including shut off valves, piping, traps, etc. necessary to connect up equipment after it has be installed in place.

B. Install all faucets, sinks drains, tailpieces, overflows, traps, etc. furnished loose with all Exchange

furnished equipment.

C. All exposed piping readily visible for Exchange furnished equipment shall be chrome plated red brass pipe and fittings. Braces for support of exposed piping shall be chrome plated.

D. Pending installation of Exchange furnished equipment, all service lines shall be suitably capped,

plugged and protected. All water lines shall be valved.


E. Furnish vacuum breakers, pressure regulators solenoid valves, traps, piping, etc. as required for

installation of equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. 1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

G. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

H. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

I. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

J. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

K. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

L. Install toilet seats on water closets.

M. Install trap-seal liquid in dry urinals.

N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

P. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

R. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22.

S. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22.


T. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and

spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END 22 42 13

MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 01 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 01 00 - MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. General Provisions of the contract, including the following, shall apply to Division 23 Specification Sections: Solicitation Documents and Division 00 and Division 01 of the specifications.

B. The Work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment,

transportation, construction plant, and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Wherever the words "the Contractor" or "this Contractor" appears in this Division, they refer to the Contractor for the work specified in that Section. This Contractor shall examine all Drawings and all Sections of the Specifications and shall be responsible for ascertaining to what extent other Drawings and Sections affect the Work herein specified.

1.2 CODES, REGULATIONS, AND STANDARDS

A. All work must be performed in accordance with the requirements of local, county, state and national codes and regulations including the requirements of the following: 1. 2015 International Building Code. 2. 2014 National Electrical Code. 3. 2015 International Plumbing Code. 4. 2015 International Mechanical Code. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Act. of 1970 6. Life Safety Code, N.F.P.A. No. 101. 7. For work not specifically listed above, use standards and codes of the National Fire

Protection Association.

B. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and/or installed in accordance with the applicable industry standard mentioned. The following list will serve to clarify abbreviations that appear in other sections of this specification: 1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 2. ADC Air Diffusion Council 3. AGA American Gas Association. 4. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association 5. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ASE Association of Safety Engineers 8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineer 9. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 10. AWWA American Water Works Association 11. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 12. FS Federal Specifications 13. IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers 14. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 15. MCAA Mechanical Contractors' Association of American 16. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 17. NSC National Safety Council 18. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 19. SBI Steel Boiler Institute Industry 20. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 21. UL Underwriters Laboratories 22. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 23. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 24. NEC National Electric Code (NFPA 70).


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FURNISH: The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation and similar operations.

B. INSTALL: The term install describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading,

unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations.

C. PROVIDE: The term provides means to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for requirements for shop drawings and product data.

B. Asbestos-Free Material/Product: Prior to approval of the material/product to be used, the manufacturer/supplier shall furnish the Contracting Officer with written certification that the material/product contains no asbestos. This certificate is mandatory before approval will be issued. Submittals furnished without the asbestos-free certification will be returned to the Contractor with no action taken until such certification is provided.

C. See applicable sections to this Division for items requiring shop drawings.

1.5 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Materials, the style, make or quality of which is specifically designated, shall be as specified.

B. Contractor shall furnish necessary materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required to avoid delay in the progress of the Work, and shall so store them as to prevent interference with other work.

1.6 DEFECTIVE WORK AND MATERIAL

A. All materials or work found to be defective or not in strict conformity with the drawings or different from requirements of the drawings and specifications or defaced or injured through negligence of Contractor or his employees, or through action of fire or weather will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from premises by Contractor and satisfactory materials and work substituted without delay.

B. All defective work or imperfect work shall be corrected immediately on notice from

Architect/Engineer. No previous inspection or certificate on account shall be held to relieve Contractor from his obligation to furnish sound materials and to perform good and satisfactory work.

1.7 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall confer with other contractors at the site before installing his work to avoid interferences so that maximum head room and clearances may be maintained. In event that interferences develop between work of various contractors, Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for changes required.

B. Particular attention shall be paid to situations where recessed equipment, pipes and lights occur,

or where the work of several trades occurs together above suspended ceilings, in pipe shafts or in areas where space is limited.

C. All fixtures, equipment, devices, switches, outlets, pumps, etc., shall be positioned to avoid all

interferences with and to assure proper coordination with work of all other trades, cases, partitions, wall, floor and ceiling patterns, architectural features, etc. All recessed devices, fixtures, etc., shall be coordinated with all wall, floor and ceiling patterns.


1.8 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Contractor shall keep all his respective pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter during construction and cover all fixtures, equipment, and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the Work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

1.9 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The layout shown on the Contract Drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and as other work will allow. The dimensions of work as shown on the Contract Drawings are not as-built dimensions. No measurements shall be scaled from the drawings and used as definite dimensions for laying out or fitting work in place.

B. The layout of manufactured equipment as shown on the drawings shall be checked and the exact

location shall be determined from the dimensions of equipment shop drawings. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall provide with three copies of maintenance manual for all equipment furnished and installed under his Work. Manuals shall be in substantial 3-ring binders with project name and number inscribed on face and hinged back.

B. The manual shall include manufacturer's lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and

serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases, valve chart, sequence of operation, index following the order listed in the specifications, warranties in the name of the Installation, and a list of manufacturers, service firms and subcontractors names and telephone numbers.

C. Training attendance rosters for each training session shall be included in manuals. Roster will

identify training subject, date, attendees name, job title, office symbol, grade/rank, and telephone number.

D. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed

or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Owner designated representative to ensure that he understands their function and purpose.

E. Upon completion of the Work, Contractors shall put the systems into service. Contractors shall be

entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.

1.11 PROJECT RECORD AND CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. See Division 01 for red lining of all documents during construction to reflect "as-built" conditions.

END 23 01 00

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS – MECHANICAL 23 05 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - MECHANICAL


A. Provide all material as specified in this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place.

B. Code ratings, labels or other data which are die-stamped or otherwise affixed to the surface of the

equipment shall be in easily visible location. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection and handling of all equipment and materials.

B. Deliver and store equipment and materials to the site in original containers, suitably sheltered

from the elements and mechanical injury, but readily accessible for inspection until installed.

C. Items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces.

D. Ascertain, from examination of building, whether any special temporary access openings in the building(s) will be required for admission of apparatus furnished under this Division.

E. Machinery movers shall not rig, tie to, or rest weight upon any building member of any part of

building premises or make use of any stairway until specific permission is obtained from Architect/Engineer.

F. Permission to rig to or in any way make use of any part of building premises shall not relieve

Installer of responsibility for any damage resulting from, or because of said rigging or use. 1.4 PROTECTION

A. Keep pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter, and cover all fixtures, equipment and apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.

B. Fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of work shall be restored to

original condition or replaced by Installer. C. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards which meet

OSHA requirements.

D. Provide protective guards for devices such as or similar to thermostats, valves, switches and sprinkler heads which are so located as to be readily subject to tampering, accidental damage, or vandalism.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. All piping and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark and the specification code to which it conforms.


2.2 SLEEVES

A. Provide pipe sleeves for all penetrations of piping through floors and walls.

B. Wall sleeves for interior partitions and ceilings shall be 20 gauge galvanized steel with lock joints.

C. Sleeves for piping that is to be insulated shall be large enough to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve.

D. Pack the space between the interior surface of all sleeves and pipes or pipe insulation with fire

resistant, sound and waterproofing caulking materials. 2.3 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide set-screw chrome plated escutcheons (not friction-dependant) on all exposed pipe or pipe insulation passing through or into finished walls, partitions, ceiling and floors. Escutcheons at insulated pipes shall be large enough to encircle insulation without penetrating vapor barrier or jacket.

2.4 CONDUIT AND WIRING

A. Wiring systems provided under Division 23 shall be as specified in Division 26.

B. All electrical terminals shall be labeled.

C. Provide wiring diagrams inside each cabinet.

D. Conduit shall provide a continuous ground and shall be heavy wall galvanized in slabs and where subject to damage and EMT where protected or out of the way.

E. Final connections to equipment shall be flexible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTING OF PIPING

A. Threads shall be full and clean cut, and ends of pipe shall be reamed. When threaded joints are assembled, the male thread shall be thoroughly coated with Teflon paste or an aerobic curing thread sealant to serve as a joint sealer. Paint all the exposed threads. (Teflon tape may be used at contractor's option.) Care shall be taken to keep the paint and all other foreign matter from entering the interior of the piping. Each section of pipe and all fittings shall be carefully inspected for dirt, grease, or other foreign matter on the inside and where necessary they shall be properly cleaned before assembly. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly clean the piping systems after completion to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer in cases where proper cleaning was not done at time of installation.

B. Soldered or brazed joints made with fittings having pre-inserted rings of solder or brazing alloy

shall have the tube and fittings cleaned bright and fluxed. The joint shall be heated sufficiently to make a tight connection. Tubes and fittings without such rings, shall be cleaned bright, fluxed and heated until the solder is drawn into the joint by capillarity and the connection is tight. Flux shall be water soluble binder flux. All solder and flux shall be lead free.

3.2 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

A. Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in all piping. Piping shall be installed in a manner such that joints will not develop leaks. All expansion shall be taken up by swing-connections, and this Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of these connections whether or not they are shown on the Drawings with specific means for relieving expansion and


contraction. Slip-type expansion joints shall not be used. Particular care must be exercised at branches on underground piping to allow free movement at branch connection to main.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Piping shall be installed on long continuous lengths, with a minimum number of joints. Joints, where necessary shall be carefully made to insure against leakage.

B. All piping shall be firmly supported using hangers, brackets and braces to prevent sagging and/or

lateral movement. All hangers, brackets, and other supports shall be securely fastened to the construction as may be required and in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. All piping shall be install to maintain maximum head room. Nothing shall be suspended from the roof deck.

C. Arrangement of all piping shall be as shown on plans. It is especially necessary that all mains be

installed with view to accessibility in case of repair and location of pipe lines and spacing between same shall be so made that there will be no conflict between pipe lines by the several trades.

D. Contractor shall give careful consideration to clearances and locations of lines and type of fittings

used to obtain these clearances. Provide maximum headroom in all cases. Piping shall be installed parallel to building walls and at a height so as not to obstruct any portion of a window, light fixture, doorway, pipe tunnel or passageway. Ascertain from the drawings heights of all suspended ceilings, size of all pipe shafts in which piping is to be concealed, and location and size of structural members in and adjacent to all pipe shafts.

E. Where interferences develop in the field, Contractor shall offset or reroute piping as required to

clear such interferences. In all cases consult architectural drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling heights, or other architectural details before installing piping.

F. At the low point in piping, and elsewhere as shown on the drawings, install a dirt pocket at least 6

in. deep with a cap at bottom constructed of pipe fittings not less than 3 in. for connections 3 in. and larger and of the full diameter of the connection served where smaller than 3 in.

G. Under no circumstances shall the size of piping shown on the drawings be changed without

written approval of the Architect/Engineer.

H. Provide eccentric reducers where required for proper drainage or venting of horizontal pipe lines. Reducing fittings shall be used for all changes of pipe size and bushings shall not, under any circumstances, be used.

I. Unions or flanges are to be installed on the equipment side of all valves in pipe connections from

mains to equipment, to enable equipment to be drained and disconnected without necessitating the draining of mains.

J. Valves must be arranged for easy access and be within easy reach and the piping shall be

arranged to accomplish this. 3.4 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS

A. Provide all hangers, supports, bracing, inserts, beams, anchors, guides, sleeves and miscellaneous steel for the proper support, alignment, expansion and contraction of piping and equipment.

B. Hanger supports shall be securely fastened to structural members by approved beam clamps and

clips, concrete inserts, anchors, or other appropriate methods agreed upon with the Architect/Engineer.

C. Maximum spacing of hangers and supports for steel piping shall be as follows:

Pipe Size Spacing 1/2" and 3/4" Not over 6'-0" 1" and 1-1/4" Not over 8'-0"


1-1/2" thru 3" Not over 10'-0" 4" and 6" Not over 12'-0"

D. Hanger and support spacing for copper piping shall not exceed 8 ft. on centers.

E. Additional hangers and supports shall be provided to minimize undesirable stress on valve bodies,

other fittings and equipment.

F. Provide all supplemental angles, channels and plates of adequate sizes where bracing or supports are required for piping and curbs between structural members.

3.5 OPENINGS IN CONSTRUCTION

A. All cutting required that may be necessary for the installation of this Work shall be done by this Contractor, and all patching and repairing shall be done by workmen competent in the trade required at the expense of this Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess material involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from the building and disposed of by this Contractor. Cutting through the floor or roof system shall be done only with approval of the Architect/Engineer so as to avoid cutting beams or the structural system. Approval must be obtained from the Architect/Engineer before cutting operations begin to avoid damage to the structure. All cutting must be carefully and neatly accomplished so as to minimize noise and dusting or staining of surrounding finishes.

END 23 05 00

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 05 13 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Variable speed drive duty.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

23 05 13 - 2

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 5. ECM.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole or ECM type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.


END 23 05 13

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL 23 05 29-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Hangers and supports for mechanical piping and equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports, for piping and equipment.

B. Design and obtain approval from authority with jurisdiction over seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Division 01.

B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, it pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports, that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100.

1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to

operate their tools and fasteners. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58.

1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish.

2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 psi average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate,

encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristic include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000psi, 28 days compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated,

heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69.

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

E. Install building attachments to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span

length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install

according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick.


G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from

movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through

insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS (Inches) LENGTH (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches)

1/4 to 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060

4. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. 5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping.


A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make a smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be

shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END 23 05 29

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

23 05 53 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide equipment labels.

B. Provide pipe labels.

C. Provide duct labels.

D. Provide stencils.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by

3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment.


23 05 53 - 2

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.


2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.


2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.


23 05 53 - 3

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 2. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise

indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow

pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of

congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Comply with ASME Standard A13.1.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 3. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.


23 05 53 - 4

D. Omit duct labeling on exposed ductwork.

END 23 05 53

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 60-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 60 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The HVAC systems will be tested and balanced by an independent testing and balancing (TAB) agency under separate contract with AAFES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS

The HVAC systems will be tested and balanced by an independent testing and balancing agency that is certified by AABC or NEBB.

A. The independent air testing and balancing agency (TAB) shall perform the balancing and

testing of the HVAC in accordance with the procedures of AABC or NEBB to analyze, balance, adjust and test air and water moving equipment, air and water distribution systems including kitchen exhaust hood systems.

B. The HVAC Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and

equipment into operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balance and shall place the automatic temperature control system in satisfactory operation before the TAB agency shall begin work.

C. Prior to the final acceptance of the HVAC systems by the Contracting Officer, the

Contractor shall allow the TAB agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion date of the project.

D. The Contractor shall make available to the TAB agency a complete copy of shop drawing

submittal data on mechanical equipment including performance curves (fans and pumps, chillers, air distribution devices, etc.) necessary to test and balance the HVAC systems.

E. The Contractor shall schedule the following necessary personnel:

1. Automatic Temperature Control Manufacturer's Service Representative to set

adjustments of automatic operated damper and devices to operate as specified, and/or noted, including setting of all controls for proper calibrations.

2. Mechanics - To operate, adjust, replace or repair the HVAC equipment that is found requiring any change/replacement in the pulleys, belts, dampers, valves, etc., of Contractors furnished and installed equipment.

3. Electrician - To assist in any problems resulting from any of the power or control wiring installation, including replacement of starters, and heater elements.

F. The Contractor shall make any changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or the addition of dampers as required for correct balance of the system as recommended by TAB agency, at no cost to Owner/Government.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 60-2

G. The Contractor shall make all necessary corrections within 48 hours upon notification of TAB agency of the deficiencies requiring adjustment, (piece-meal correction is not acceptable) and within 10 working days for items that require replacement or installation.

H. The Contractor shall leave all strainers clean and all air filters replaced prior to the start of

testing and balancing activity.

I. If the Contractor had scheduled the TAB agency to perform the work and the HVAC systems are not ready to be tested and balanced, any additional cost required to extend the TAB work shall be at the Contractor's expense.

END 23 05 60

MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 07 00 - MECHANICAL INSULATION



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. External insulation of ductwork, where indicated and specified. B. Insulation of interior condensate drain piping. C. Insulation of chilled and hot water piping. D. Insulation of refrigerant suction piping. E. Refrigerant hot gas piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.

B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.

C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg. F.

D. Thermal Resistivity: r-values represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between two exposed faces required to cause one Btu to flow through one square foot of material, in one hour, at a given mean temperature.

E. Density: Is expressed in lb/sq.ft.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Division 1 requirements.

B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value, thickness, and accessories.

1. Provide cements that comply with LEED requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory.

1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or

less. 2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or

less. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Glass Fiber: a. Certain Teed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. c. Johns-Manville. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation.

2. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Halstead Industrial Products. c. Rubatex Corporation. d. Aeroflex.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Materials: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin.

B. Jacket: All-purpose, factory-applied, laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap.

C. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 average maximum, at 75 deg F. mean temperature.

D. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and follow up service.

1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

E. Vapor Barrier Coating: Waterproof coating recommended by insulation manufacturer for outside

service. 2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR

A. Material: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin on both sides.

1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534, Type I. 2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534, Type II.

B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 average maximum at 75 deg F.

C. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.4 ADHESIVES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.

2.5 JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated.


B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to ASTM E 96. 2. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 781.

2.6 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 ounces per sq.yd. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. 2. Cloth Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type I. 3. Tape Standard: MIL-C-20079H, Type II.

B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: Type 304, 0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick. 4. Brass: 0.01 inch thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.

C. Wire: 14 gage nickel copper alloy, 16 gage, soft-annealed stainless steel, or 16 gage, soft-annealed

galvanized steel.

D. Corner Angles: 28 gage, 1 inch by 1 inch aluminum, adhered to 2 inch by 2 inch Kraft paper.

E. Anchor Pins: Capable of supporting 20 pounds each. Provide anchor pins and speed washers of sizes and diameters as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation type and thickness.

F. Coating: Ultra-violet light protective finish for exterior elastomeric insulation.

2.8 SEALING COMPOUNDS

A. Vapor Barrier Compound: Water-based, fire-resistive composition:

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.08 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

B. Weatherproof Sealant: Flexible-elastomer-based, vapor-barrier sealant designed to seal metal joints.

1. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum. 2. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to 250 deg. F. 3. Color: Aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water. Mix insulating cements contacting stainless-steel surfaces with demineralized water. 1. Follow cement manufacturers printed instructions for mixing and portions.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL


A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each mechanical system.

B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do no

corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating temperatures below 60 deg. F.

D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturers printed

instructions.

E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces.

F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

G. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier.

H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with

lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.

I. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturers recommended coverage-per-gallon rate.

J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

K. Item Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment.

1. Metal ducts with duct liner. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 4. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes. 5. Vibration control devices. 6. Testing laboratory labels and stamps. 7. Nameplates and data plates. 8. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems. 9. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, plug valves, and flow regulators.

3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive.

B. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation.

C. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints.

E. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof flashing. Seal wit vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor barrier coating.

F. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, extend metal jacket for

exterior insulation through penetration to a point 2 inches from interior surface of wall inside the building. Seal ends of metal jacket with vapor barrier coating. Secure metal jacket ends with metal band. At point where insulation metal jacket contacts mechanical sleeve seal, insert cellular glass preformed pipe insulation to allow sleeve seal tightening against metal jacket. Tighten and seal sleeve to jacket to form a watertight seal.


G. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions,

except fire-rated walls and partitions. Apply an aluminum jacket with factory-applied moisture over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall or partition. Secure aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 Section Joint Sealants.

H. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated

walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for firestopping and fire-resistant joint sealers.

I. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor

barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive.

1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1-pipe diameter, which ever is greater. 3. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire

or tape. 4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches pipe size with premolded insulation. 5. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches and larger with premolded insulation or insulation material

segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow. 6. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal

circumferential joints with butt strips. 7. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with 2 layers of lagging adhesive to a

minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Install glass cloth between layers. Overlap adjacent insulation by 2 inches in both directions from joint with glass cloth and lagging adhesive.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in section 23 05 29.

1. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive.

B. Valves, Fittings, and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to valve,

fitting, and flange and seal joints with adhesive.

1. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees. 2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed valves,

fittings, and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation. 3.5 DUCT INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as follows: 1. Smaller Than 24 Inches: Bonding adhesive applied in 6 inch wide transverse strips on 12

inch centers. 2. 24 Inches and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches apart each way. Apply bonding

adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 3. Overlap joints 3 inches. 4. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound.


3.6 FINISHES

A. Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of protective coating to exposed insulation.

3.7 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES

A. General: Abbreviations used in the following schedules include:

1. Pipe Sizes: NPS - Nominal Pipe Size.

B. CHILLED WATER PIPING

PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES MATERIALS IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS) INCHES REQ’D JACKET 1-1/2” and lgr Flexible Elastomeric 1 Yes None

C. HEATING HOT WATER PIPING

PIPE THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD- SIZES MATERIALS IN BARRIER APPLIED (NPS) INCHES REQ’D JACKET Up to 1-1/4” Glass Fiber 1-1/2 No None 1-1/2” and lgr Glass Fiber 2 No None

D. Refrigerant Suction Piping: ½-inch thick flexible elastomeric with vapor tight joints and UV protectant

finish when located outdoors. E. Condensate Drain Piping: ½-inch thick flexible elastomeric.

F. Refrigerant Hot Gas Piping: ½-inch thick flexible elastomeric. 3.9 DUCT SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. INTERIOR CONCEALED RIGID HVAC SUPPLY, VENTILATION, AND OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS

THICKNESS VAPOR FIELD-

MATERIAL FORM IN BARRIER APPLIED INCHES REQ’D JACKET

Glass Fiber Blanket 2 Yes None Glass Fiber Board 2 Yes None (Mechanical Room)

END 23 07 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 09 00 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Control equipment for HVAC system, including control components for air terminals. Dampers and actuators provided with air handling units unless noted otherwise.

B. Install power and signal wiring to air terminals.

C. Conduit and wiring to utility meters pulse generators.

D. Interlock wiring for hood exhaust fans and ventilation air handling unit.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

2. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.

3. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

4. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

5. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

6. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. c. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. d. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. e. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.

1.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: See 23 09 93.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


D. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

E. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing

trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

9. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and

control elements graphically shown, with wiring. b. Drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases

and special construction. c. Points list.

F. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with Lonworks standards.

G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:


1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.



D. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

E. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of sensors, thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

G. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

H. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year parts and labor warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Trane.


2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

B. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current 4 to 20 mA), or

resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open

or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-points,

floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

C. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

D. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.


2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

D. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 1.

2.5 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (200 mm) long; use where not

affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches (1830 mm) long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. 5. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

2. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

3. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Electric Motors and Fans: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

B. Electronic Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

2.7 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.


1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to

2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to

3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.

2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 5. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 6. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

2.8 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring shall comply with Division 27.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and Exchange furnished operator workstation.

B. Verify that duct, pipe, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.


1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

D. Install guards on thermostats and sensors in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26.

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26.

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install cables in raceway in mechanical and electrical rooms. 3. Install cable drops to space sensors in raceway. 4. Install concealed cable tight to structure with tie wraps. Install drops to room sensors in

raceway. 5. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path. 6. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect

against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 7. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables. 8. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of piping and equipment.

D. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.


3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required.

5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.

6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. 8. Coordinate testing with AAFES Commissioning Agent.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations. 4. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

8. Coordinate checking with AAFES Commissioning Agent.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable

differential set at minimum.

6. Temperature:


a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

7. Stroke and adjust control dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

8. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 9. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." Provide minimum of one 8 hour workday. Coordinate with Owner and Architect/Engineer.

END 23 09 00

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 23 09 93 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 09 93 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. VAV: Variable air volume.

C. ADJ: Adjustable at operator workstation.

1.3 HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control:

1. Input Devices: Temperature sensors. 2. Output Devices: Control relays. 3. Action: Stage boilers to maintain heating water supply temperature. 4. Display:

a. Heating-water supply temperature. b. Heating-water supply temperature set point. c. Boilers activated.

B. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Reset:

1. Input Device: Outdoor-air sensor. 2. Output Device: DDC system software. 3. Action: Reset heating-water supply temperature in straight-line relationship with outdoor-

air temperature for the following conditions: a. 180 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is 0 deg F. b. 100 deg F heating water when outdoor-air temperature is 65 deg F.

4. Display: a. Outdoor-air temperature. b. Heating-water supply temperature. c. Heating-water supply temperature set point.

C. Control Heating Circulating Pumps:

1. Input Devices: DDC system and differential pressure switches. 2. Output Device: DDC system command to starter relays. 3. Actions: Secondary hot water pumps shall run continuously in heating mode. On failure

of lead pump, back-up pump shall start automatically. Primary hot water pumps shall be cycled with their associated boiler.

4. Display: a. Pump command signal.


b. Operating status of circulating pump(s). c. Pump failure alert.

1.4 CHILLER PLANT SEQUENCES

A. Chillers shall be controlled by factory mounted controls.

B. Chiller controls shall perform the following functions:

1. Start/stop chilled water pumps. 2. Verify chilled water flow. 3. Monitor chilled water supply temperature. 4. Monitor chilled water return temperature. 5. Control capacity.

C. Building DDC control system shall monitor the following points and provide the following alarms to the operator workstation: 1. Chiller start/stop. 2. Chiller alarm.

D. Building DDC control system shall stage chillers as follows:

1. Enable chiller(s) during occupied period as input at operator workstation. 2. Enable chiller on outside temperature above 65 degrees.

E. Display: a. Chiller command signal. b. Chiller status.

1.5 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Start and Stop Supply Fan(s):

1. Enable: Freeze Protection: a. Input Device: Duct-mounted averaging element thermostat, located before supply

fan. b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm. c. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is above 37 deg F (3 deg C); signal alarm if

fan fails to start as commanded.

2. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Energize fan(s).

3. Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system based on space sensor beyond heating or cooling

setpoint. b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Energize fan(s).

4. Unoccupied Ventilation: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output.


b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Cycle fan(s) during unoccupied periods.

5. Display: a. Supply-fan on-off indication. b. Supply fan on-off command.

B. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Volume Control: a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure

referenced to conditioned-space static pressure. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to motor speed controller. Set

variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped. c. Action: Maintain constant supply-duct static pressure.

3. High Pressure: a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure

referenced to static pressure outside the duct. b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter. c. Action: Stop fan and signal alarm when static pressure rises above excessive-

static-pressure set point.

4. Display: a. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. b. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. c. Supply-fan speed. d. High pressure alarm.

C. Preheat Coil:

1. Supply-Air Temperature: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule and electronic temperature sensor. b. Output Device: Modulating 3 way control valve. Valve to fail open to coil. c. Action: Maintain air temperature set point of 55 deg F (adj).

2. Display: a. Preheat-coil air-temperature indication. b. Preheat-coil air-temperature set point. c. Preheat-coil control-valve position.

D. Mixed-Air Control:

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Minimum Position: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule.


b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). c. Action: Open outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.

3. Heating Reset: a. Input Device: DDC system software. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). c. Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.

4. Supply-Air Temperature: a. Input Device: Duct-mounted electronic temperature sensor. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). c. Action: Modulate outdoor-, return-, and relief-air dampers to maintain air

temperature set point of 55 deg F (adj).

5. Cooling Reset: a. Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic temperature

sensors. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to damper actuator(s). c. Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position when outdoor-air

temperature exceeds return-air temperature (adj).

6. Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to modulating damper actuator(s). c. Action: Position outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers

open.

7. Display: a. Mixed-air-temperature indication. b. Mixed-air-temperature set point. c. Outside and return air damper positions.

E. Filters:

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: DDC system output. c. Action: Enable control.

2. Differential Pressure: a. Input Device: Differential-pressure switches. b. Output Device: DDC system alarm. c. Action: Signal alarm on high-pressure conditions.

3. Display: a. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. b. Filter high-air-pressure set point.

F. Hydronic Cooling Coil:

1. Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Enable control.


2. Supply Air Temperature: a. Input Device: Duct-mounted electronic temperature sensor. b. Output Device: Normally closed modulating control valve. c. Action: Maintain supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F (adj).

3. Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output. c. Action: Disable control.

4. Display: a. Supply coil air-temperature indication. b. Supply coil air-temperature set point. c. Cooling-coil control-valve position.

G. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mixed-air, heating-coil, and cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.

H. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:

1. DDC system graphic. 2. DDC system on-off indication. 3. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. Outdoor-air-temperature indication. 5. Supply-fan on-off indication. 6. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. 7. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. 8. Supply-fan speed. 9. Preheat-coil control-valve position. 10. Mixed-air-temperature indication. 11. Mixed-air-temperature set point. 12. Mixed-air damper positions. 13. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. 14. Filter high-air-pressure set point. 15. Supply air-temperature indication. 16. Supply air-temperature set point. 17. Cooling-coil control-valve position.

1.6 TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Unit Heater, Hydronic:

1. Room Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor. b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to fan motor and two way valve. c. Action: Open valve and cycle fan to maintain temperature.

2. Low-Temperature Safety: a. Input Device: Line-voltage, on-off thermostat, pipe mounted. b. Output Device: Hard wired. c. Action: Stop fan when return heating-water temperature falls below 35 deg F (2

deg C).

3. Display:


a. Room temperature indication. b. Room temperature set point. c. Fan command. d. Fan status.

B. VAV, Terminal Air Units with Hydronic Coils:

1. Occupancy: a. Input Device: Occupancy sensor integral to temperature sensors. b. Output Device: DDC system binary output. c. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied temperature set point.

1) Occupied Temperature: 74 deg F (cooling); 71 deg F (heating). 2) Unoccupied Temperature: 80 deg F (cooling); 60 deg F (heating).

2. Room Temperature: a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor with integral occupancy sensor. b. Output Device: Electronic damper actuators and control-valve operators. c. Action: Modulate damper and valve to maintain temperature.

1) Sequence damper from full open to minimum position, then valve from closed to fully open.

2) Minimum airflow shall be 0 cfm in unoccupied mode; value scheduled in occupied mode.

3) Reheat shall be disabled in unoccupied cooling mode.

3. Display: a. Room/area served. b. Room occupied/unoccupied. c. Room temperature indication. d. Room temperature set point, occupied (heating and cooling). e. Room temperature set point, unoccupied (heating and cooling). f. Air-damper position as percent open. g. Control-valve position as percent open.

C. VENTILATION AIR TERMINAL UNITS:

1. Occupancy: a. Input Device: Time schedule at workstation, Co2 sensors, hood fan current sensors. b. Output Device: DDC system binary outputs. c. Action: Report occupancy and enable occupied air volume setpoint.

(1) Occupied Setpoint: 100% open unless noted otherwise. (2) Unoccupied Setpoint: 0% open. (3) Co2 Sensor: Boxes controlled by Co2 sensors shall modulate damper to

maintain Co2 setpoint below 900 ppm, unless driven full open by exhaust hood interlock.

2. Air Volume:

a. Input Device: Sensing grid in air terminal. b. Output Device: Electronic damper actuators. c. Action: Modulate damper to maintain air volume or Co2 setpoint. Fully open

scheduled terminals with operation of exhaust fans.

3. Display: a. Room/area served. b. Room occupied/unoccupied status. c. Room air volume.


d. Room air volume setpoint. e. Air volume alarm if air flow falls more that 15% below setpoint for more than 10

minutes. f. Air-damper position as percent open.

1.7 VENTILATION SEQUENCES

A. Toilet Exhaust Fans:

1. Provide current sensing status relays for control and status of fans scheduled for BAS time scheduling.

B. Arby’s Exhaust Fan:

1. Fan shall be controlled by manual switch and controls provided with hood. 2. Provide current sensing relay for interlock with ventilation air terminal controls.

1.8 TEMPERATURE ALARMS

A. Provide temperature sensor in communication room to sound alarm at workstation and send an alarm when temperature exceeds 80 degrees F.

1.9 UTILITY METERS

A. Provide digital input points for pulse outputs from electric, gas, and water meters. If Siemens controls are provided, provide model 4200 electric meter with 2 digital input points for water and gas meters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)


END 23 09 93

HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 21 13 – HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Chilled water piping.

B. Heating hot water piping.

C. Makeup-water piping.

D. Condensate-drain piping.

E. Hydronic specialties.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 0 deg F. 4. Heating Hot Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Hydronic specialties.


C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

E. Copper Press Fittings: Copper press fittings by Viega, Nibco, or Elkhart.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. c. National Fittings, Inc. d. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. e. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.


I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. a. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2. 5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company.


c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Large plastic butterfly valves may have reduced pressure ratings.

B. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Taco. d. Hayes. e. Nexus.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

C. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Taco.

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Air Control Devices (D - G):

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Taco.

E. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

F. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Bladder Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

H. Tangential-Type Air Separators:


1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

I. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: [40] [60]-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Chilled and heating hot water piping, aboveground, NPS 3/4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed, or press fit joints.

B. Chilled and heating hot water piping, aboveground, NPS 1 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges

and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved

mechanical joints. 3. Type L, drawn temper copper tubing, wrought copper fittings, and soldered, brazed, or

press-fit joints.

C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed, or press fit joints.

D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.


F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.


T. Identify piping as specified in Section 23 05 53, "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Sections 23 05 29 and 23 05 48. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Section 23 05 48.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 9. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.


F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Grooved Joints: Join pipe and fittings according to fitting manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

D. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.


2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

D. Anti-freeze protection: 1. Fill chilled water system with 40% propylene glycol by volume.

END 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 21 23 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 21 23 – HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. In-line centrifugal pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.5 COORDINATION



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

1. Armstrong. 2. Bell & Gossett. 3. Taco

2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, in-line pump designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted vertically. Rate pump for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. Trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel

spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type.

C. Motor: Single speed, with oil-lubricated sleeve bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and resiliently mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast or ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Section 23 05 48.

D. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of sufficient size to support pump weight.

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve.

I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

J. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

K. Connect wiring according to Division 26.

END 23 21 23

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 23 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Piping system and refrigerant for ductless split system AC. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 09 9100 - Painting. 1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

B. ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.

C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.

D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. E. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.

F. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.

G. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

H. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with MSS SP69 unless indicated otherwise.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS


B. Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings.


1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists. 1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purpose indicated.

C. All refrigeration work shall be done by certified Technicians in accordance with Federal Register 40CFR, Part 82, subpart F.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.

B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

C. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.

D. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment, until connected into

system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480

degrees F.

B. Pipe Supports and Anchors:

1. Conform to MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 8. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

2.2 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 34:

1. R-410A.


B. Ozone-Depleting Substances:

1. Class I Substance, as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class 1 by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to chlorofluorocarbons, halons, carbon tetrachloride, and methyl chloroform.

2. Class II Substance, as used in this clause, means any substance designated as class II by EPA (40 CFR Part 82), including but not limited to, hydrochlorofluorocarbons.

3. As required by 42 USC 767j (b), (c), and (d) and 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart E, the Contractor shall label products which contain class I or class II ozone depleting substances or are manufactured with a process that uses class I or class II ozone depleting substances, or containers of class I or class II ozone depleting substances, as follows:

WARNING: Contains (or manufactured with, if applicable) _______________, (a) substance(s) which harm(s) public health and the environment by destroying ozone in the upper atmosphere. The Contractors shall insert the name of the substance(s).

C. Refrigeration Equipment and Air Conditioners: for Contracts for services for maintenance, repair, or disposal

of any equipment using class I or class II ozone depleting substances as a refrigerant, such as refrigerators, chillers, freezers, or air conditioners, including motor vehicle air conditioners: The contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Sections 608 and 609 of the Clean Air Act (42 USC 7671g, National Recycling and Emission Reduction Program and 7671h, Servicing of Motor Vehicle Air Conditioners) as each or both apply to the contract.

D. Use of Recycled Materials: To the greatest extent practicable, contractor shall use recycled materials and

materials and equipment that are recyclable.


A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt inside and outside pipe before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration piping and specialties in accordance with VRF manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASTM B31.5, ASTM F708 and MSS SP89. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal

piping.


6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

G. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

I. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access doors with other

trades.

J. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Division 09.

L. Follow ASHRAE 15 and system manufacturer’s instructions and procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

N. Install piping in compliance with equipment manufacturer’s instructions.

O. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01.

B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

C. Pressure test system according to heat pump system manufacturer’s instructions. 3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: HANGER ROD

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches Feet Inches 1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 10 1/2

END 23 23 00

HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 25 00 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Bypass chemical-feed equipment for chilled water piping and heating hot water piping.

B. HVAC water-treatment chemicals.

C. Propylene glycol anti-freeze solution for chilled water system.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. TDS: Total dissolved solids.


A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled water, shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 6. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 7. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. Chemical test equipment. 3. Chemical material safety data sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, maintenance space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


D. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ampion Corp. 2. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc. 3. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div. 4. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc. 5. Boland Trane Services 6. GE Betz. 7. GE Osmonics. 8. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc. 9. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div. 10. ONDEO Nalco Company. 11. Watcon, Inc.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 2 gal. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig.

2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests for high-pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems.

2.4 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

B. Provide inhibited propylene glycol solution in chilled water system. Fill with 40% propylene glycol by volume. Glycol shall be dyed green.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

D. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install a full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

END 23 25 00

METAL DUCTWORK 23 31 13-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTWORK



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Sheet metal ductwork for air distribution systems including accessories.

B. Welded Carbon Steel ductwork for Arby’s hood exhaust. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". Comply with NFPA-96 and International Mechanical Code for installation of exhaust hood ductwork.

B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for metal ductwork materials and products in accord with Division 1.


A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store

outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

B. Carbon Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008A/A 1008M. C. Exposed round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction. D. Stainless Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A408A or 480M, type 304 or 316.


2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change

of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for

fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.

D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for

fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel

fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft. lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards".

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers.

D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible. Refer

to Division 23 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements. E. Fabricated concealed hood exhaust ductwork of 16 gage carbon steel with welded joints. Fabricate

exposed hot exhaust ductwork of 18 gage stainless. Material and fabrication shall comply with NFPA-96. Joints shall be externally welded liquid tight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and


noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.

B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated

work and accommodate installation requirements.

C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

D. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between

construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate. 1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping between

duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of SMACNA.

E. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

F. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. E. Arby’s hood ductwork: Install hood exhaust ductwork in compliance with NFPA-96 and International

Mechanical Code. 3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices

at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.

END 23 31 13

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 33 00-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 33 00 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. Ductwork accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accord with Division 01.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of

duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Nailor. 3. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 4. Arrow Louver and Damper. 5. Greenheck. 6. National Controlled Air. 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 8. Leader.

C. Motorized dampers specified in 23 09 00. 2.2 TURNING VANES


A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in

accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum

extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following: 1. Aero Dyne Co.

2. Airsan Corp. 3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 4. Duro Dyne Corp. 5. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc. 6. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 7. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 8. Souther, Inc.

2.3 DUCT HARDWARE

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct test

holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and

end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of the

following: 1. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2. Young Regulator Co. 3. Duro Dyne Corp.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of one of the

following:

1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Flexaust (The) Co. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2 inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.


1. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.

2. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. C. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, ½-inch wg negative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and

elsewhere as indicated.

C. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.

D. Install manual damper at each branch duct take-off.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action. 1. Label access doors in accordance with Division-23 section "Mechanical Identification".

2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-23, Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing".

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with

manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END 23 33 00

FANS 23 34 23-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 34 23 - FANS



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. All materials, equipment, tools, labor, etc required to complete the installation of the fans as shown on the drawings and as specified.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories; and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Maintenance data for fans, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Division

01. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National

Electrical Code." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with

protective crating and covering. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07.

B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

FANS 23 34 23-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. 1. Cook (Loren) Co. 2. Greenheck Fan Corp.

2.2 FANS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.

B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the

maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1. Fan Shafts: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70

percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.

C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor: 1.4.

D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic. E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for

use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. 1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median like "Rating Life" (AFBMA L) of 200,000

calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venture inlet cone. C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast iron, adjustable pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, ½ inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;

factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated galvanized steel curbs with internal insulation. 5. Accessories to meet NFPA-96 as scheduled.

a. Include curb extensions as required to locate fan discharge minimum of 40” above roof deck.

2.4 MOTORS

FANS 23 34 23-3

A. See Section 23 05 13.

B. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 23.

1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with stainless steel hardware.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air handling units for service and

maintenance. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.

B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 26. 2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Section 23 0900. 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical

Code. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

END 23 34 23

AIR CURTAINS 23 34 33 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 34 33 - AIR CURTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Air curtains.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each unit.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air curtains and are based on the specific product indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


C. Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power consumption.

D. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service Establishments."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berner International Corp. 2. Mars Air Products; Mars Air Door Division.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over powdered mirror.

B. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing.

C. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, containing adjustable air-directional vanes.

AIR CURTAINS 23 34 33 - 2

2.3 FANS

A. Fans: Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet statically and dynamically balanced.

B. Fan Drives: Direct.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Motor Type: Resiliently mounted, continuous duty, with integral thermal-overload protection.

B. Bearings: Permanently sealed, lifetime, prelubricated, ball bearings.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

END 23 34 33

AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Shutoff, dual-duct air terminal units with hydronic reheat coils.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

1. Air terminal units. 2. Liners and adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.



B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHUTOFF, DUAL-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Krueger. 2. Price. 3. Titus.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlets: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.


3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance;

with airtight gasket. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Dampers: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Stainless steel rods and nuts.

B. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.

D. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." Each unit’s supports shall be designed to withstand 150% of unit weight in the vertical plane and 50% of unit weight in the horizontal plane.

B. Building Attachments: Structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 31 13.

B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Section 23 3300.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.

END 23 36 00

AIR OUTLET AND INLET 23 37 13-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 37 13 - AIR OUTLET AND INLET



1.2 WORK INCLUDES

A. All grilles, registers, and diffusers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard

for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70

"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for

Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 6. AMCA Seat: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for

the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number

furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,

temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.

Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

AIR OUTLET AND INLET 23 37 13-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS

A. General: Units are scheduled on the drawings.

B. Finish Compatibility: Provide with border styles that are compatible with adjacent finish systems. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of finish systems which will contain each type of air device.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air devices of one of the following:

1. Krueger. 2. Price. 3. Titus.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface

installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.

END 23 37 13

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS 23 38 15-1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 38 15 – FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide:

1. Complete Food Service Ventilating systems including canopy, filters, lights, ductwork, surrounding stainless steel panels and extinguishing system.

2. Extinguishing system shall be factory installed. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. National Fire protection Association, NFPA: a. 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. b. 96: Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden

Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment. c. 17A: Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems.

2. National Sanitary Foundation, NSF:

a. Seal of approval.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL: a. UL listed and labeled components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit layout of entire extinguishing system including nozzles, piping, and fused links. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Exhaust Hoods: Captiveaire.

B. Extinguishing System:

1. Ansul.

2.2 CANOPY HOODS:

A. Construction:

FOOD SERVICE VENTILATION SYSTEMS 23 38 15-2

1. 18 gauge stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Canopy internal supports consisting of angles and channels to reinforce and prevent

vibration and fatigue. 3. Canopy fabricated as one piece and shipped as one piece.

B. Filter:

1. Canopy filter housing of same material as canopy liner, complete with UL classified

extractor type aluminum grease filters full length. 2. Filter shall provide constant pressure drop. 3. Filter housing shall terminate at bottom with pitched drip tray full length of canopy and

shall be equipped with grease cup for easy removal and daily cleaning.

C. Extinguishing System:

1. System shall protect range hoods, exhaust ducts, filters and appliances. 2. Automatic operation initiated by fusible metallic links with temperature ratings in

accordance with below referenced installation manual. 3. Piping:

a. Pipe: Standard weight, Schedule 40; black steel; chrome-sleeved where exposed.

b. Fittings: Malleable-iron, ductile-iron, steel or cast-iron; of standard weight. c. Pipe reamed and cleaned before assembly and after assembly.

4. Provide manual release station, located as indicated on drawings, for each extinguishing

system. Provide permanent plastic laminate tag at each pull station, clearly indicating hood served.

5. Provide set of dry contacts for contacts for fire alarm system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which exhaust hoods are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HOODS

A. Install hoods and extinguishing systems as indicated on Drawings and in accord with NFPA 96 and 17A.

B. Provide all miscellaneous framing, anchors, and brackets necessary to properly support hoods.

C. Install piping and extinguishing systems in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements and

recommendations. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Start-Up:

1. Provide start-up supervision. 2. Provide instruction to AAFES Personnel on system operation. 3. Provide field certification by system manufacturer. 4. Provide acceptance test observed by Base Fire Department personnel. Test

extinguishing system in conjunction with fire alarm tests. Contractor shall provide all material and labor to conduct the test(s).

END 23 38 15

CONDENSING BOILERS 23 52 16 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 52 16 – CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Packaged, factory-fabricated and assembled, gas-fired, condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for generating heating hot water.

B. Emergency Fuel Burner Switches at each door to boiler room.

C. Boiler gas vent and combustion air ductwork.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Source quality-control test reports.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 COORDINATION


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Condensing Boilers: a. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Five years from

date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. HTP.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls.

B. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel primary and secondary combustion chamber.

C. Burner: Natural gas.

D. Blower: Centrifugal fan:

1. Motors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

E. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

F. Ignition: Spark or hot surface ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision.

G. Casing:

1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures. 2. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1A. 3. Finish: Baked-enamel or Powder-coated protective finish. 4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat

exchanger. 5. Combustion-Air Connection: Inlet duct collar and sheet metal closure over burner

compartment. 6. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.

a. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler pressure vessel, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when mounting base is anchored to building structure.

H. Condensate Trap: Cast-iron body with stainless-steel internal parts.

2.3 TRIM

A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

B. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.


C. Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- (89-mm-) diameter, combination water-pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.

D. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.

E. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) hose-end gate valve.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Section 23 09 00, "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.


A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.

D. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

E. Assemble and install boiler trim.


F. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

G. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

H. Install Emergency Fuel Burner Switches at door to the boiler room.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

D. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC,"

E. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

F. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

G. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

H. Install wiring from emergency fuel burner switches to boiler controls.

I. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

J. Connect wiring according to Division 26.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment. a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set

points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature. b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Using Agency's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers.

END 23 52 16

PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS 23 64 00 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 64 00 - PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Chiller package. 2. Charge of refrigerant and oil. 3. Controls and control connections. 4. Chilled water connections. 5. Starters. 6. Pumps and associated drives. 7. Expansion tank.


1. Division 01 Section Mechanical, Refrigeration, Food Service Equipment and Electrical Coordination.

2. Division 01 Section Administrative Requirements: Procedures for submittals. 3. Division 01 Section Quality Control. 4. Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures. 5. Division 23 Section -Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Piping Equipment. 6. Division 23 Section -Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 7. Division 23 Section Hydronic Piping. 8. Division 23 Section HVAC Pumps. 9. Division 23 Section Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent they are applicable:

1. Division 01 Section Quality Control. 2. ARI 590 - Positive Displacement Compressor Water -Chilling Packages. 3. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 4. ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 5. ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 6. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Division 01 Section Administrative Requirements: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system.

D. Operations and Maintenance data.


1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Division 01 Section Administrative Requirements: Procedures for submittals.

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that components of package not furnished by manufacturer have been selected in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. Include trouble-shooting guide.

B. The Contractor shall submit all certifications and testing data as a supplement to previously submitted O & M manuals at Contract closeout.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Protect units from physical damage before, during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTDOOR AIRCOOLED PACKAGED LIQUID CHILLER

A. Manufactured Units:

1. Provide factory assembled and tested outdoor air cooled liquid chillers consisting of compressors, condenser, evaporator, pumps, drives, expansion tanks, thermal expansion valve, refrigeration accessories, and control panel. Construction, testing, and ratings shall be in accordance with ARI 590.

2. Conform to UL code for construction of scroll water chillers and provide UL label. 3. Conform to ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for Construction and testing of

reciprocating water chillers. 4. Conform to ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water chillers.

B. Evaporator:

1. Provide brazed plate type evaporator, provide multiple refrigerant circuits as indicated. 2. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for 225 psig working pressure and water side for 150

psig working pressure, in accordance with ASME SEC 8. 3. Insulate with 0.75 inch minimum thick flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with

ASTM C 534, Type II, with maximum K value of 0.28.


4. Provide water drain connection and thermometer wells for temperature controller and low temperature cutout.

C. Condensers:

1. Construct condenser coils of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits with liquid accumulators. Air test under water to 425.

2. Provide vertical discharge direct or belt driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge.

3. Provide fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings and built-in current and overload protection. Refer to Division 23 Section Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.

D. Enclosures:

1. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish.

2. Mount starters and disconnects in weather proof panel provided with full opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.

E. Refrigerant Circuit:

1. Provide refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped. 2. Provide for each refrigerant circuit:

a. Liquid line solenoid valve. b. Filter dryer (replaceable core type). c. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. d. Thermal expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure. e. Charging valve. f. Insulated suction line. g. Discharge line check valve. h. Compressor discharge service valve. i. Condenser pressure relief valve. j. Suction line accumulator.

F. Controls:

1. On chiller mount weather proof steel control panel, containing starters power and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection.

2. For each compressor, provide part winding starter, non-recycling compressor overload, starter relay, and control power transformer or terminal for controls power. Provide manual reset current overload protection.

3. Provide safety controls with indicating lights with terminations for connection to controls system by 23 09 00, arranged so any one will shut down machine and require manual reset:

a. Low chilled water temperature switch. b. High discharge pressure switch for each compressor. c. Low suction pressure switch for each compressor. d. Oil pressure switch. e. Flow switch in chilled water line.

4. Provide operating controls:

a. Multi-step chilled water temperature controller which cycles compressors and activates unloaders.

b. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature. c. Low ambient control consisting of external damper assembly, controls head pressure

for operation down to 0 deg F. d. Hot gas bypass sized for minimum compressor loading on one compressor only,

bypasses hot refrigerant gas to evaporator.


5. Building Management System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable BACNET controls by Section 23 09 00 to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.

G. Pumps and Hydronic Accessories:

1. Provide factory mounted in-line hydronic pumps and piping, including expansion tank. 2. Provide separate variable frequency drive for each pump.

H. Manufacturer:

1. Trane, or approved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Connect to chilled water piping. Refer to Division 23 Section Hydronic Piping.

1. On outlet, provide:

a. Thermometer well for temperature controller. b. Thermometer well for temperature limit controller. c. Flexible pipe connecter. d. Shut-off valve. e. Temperature and Pressure Station.

2. On inlet, provide:

a. Flexible pipe connecter. b. Balancing valve. c. Temperature and Pressure Station.

C. Securely fasten unit to housekeeping pad to withstand wind and seismic loading specified in Division 01 Section Summary of Work.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Division 01 Section -General Commissioning Requirements and Division 23 Section Commissioning of HVAC: Prepare and start systems.

B. Supply service of factory trained representative for a period of 2 days to supervise testing, dehydration and charging of machine, start-up, and instruction on operation and maintenance to Government.

C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Division 01 Section -Demonstration and Training

END 23 64 00

MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDILING UNITS 23 73 13 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 73 13 – MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Variable-air volume air-handling units.


A. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight. 2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Fan construction and accessories. d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Filters with performance characteristics.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual equipment provided.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Daikin. 2. Trane. 3. Carrier.

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws. 3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. 4. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply manufacturer's standard primer

immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 6. Casing to be 18 gage outer, 20 gage inner.

B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or Type II. 2. Location and Application: 1” thick encased between outside and inside casing.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels: a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

3. Access Doors: a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

4. Locations and Applications: a. Fan Section: Access doors and inspection and access panels. b. Access Section: Access panel. c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel. d. Filter Section: Access doors large enough to allow periodic removal and

installation of filters. e. Mixing Section: Access panels.

D. Condensate Drain Pans:


1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) to direct water toward drain connection. a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with

ASHRAE 62.1. b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep.

2. Formed sections. 3. Insulated stainless-steel sheet. 4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 5. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from

top coil.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment. a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective

coating of lubricating oil. b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of

fan's speed range.

B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

1. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

2. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction. 3. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-edged flexible

duct connector. 4. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2

strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized-steel sheet or 0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing. a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics,

coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1. 1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the

filling. 3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and blades mechanically fastened to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

D. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Grease-Lubricated, Tapered-Roller Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing with grease lines extended to outside unit and a rated life of 120,000 hours according to ABMA 11.


E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 4. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick, 3/4-inch (20-mm) diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.

F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficiency motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. Motors shall be rated

for variable frequency drive duty. 3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

G. Variable Speed Drive: Provide factory mounted variable speed drives complying with 26 24 19 2.6.

2.4 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with ARI 410. 2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit. 4. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal mounting frame and

attachment to coils, and other coil section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in structural drawings.

2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A. 2. Provide minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on

both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

B. Extended-Surface, Nonsupported-Media Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting type. 2. Final Resistance: 1 inches wg. 3. MERV Rating: 8.


4. Media: Fibrous material constructed so individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by internal supports under rated-airflow conditions.

5. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel. 6. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel, with gaskets and fasteners, suitable for

bolting together into built-up filter banks.

C. Filter Gage:

1. 3-1/2-inch- (90-mm-) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case. 2. Vent valves. 3. Black figures on white background. 4. Front recalibration adjustment. 5. 3 percent of full-scale accuracy. 6. Range: 0- to 1.0-inch wg (0 to 250 Pa).

2.6 DAMPERS

A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.

B. Damper Operators: See Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

C. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel-blade, galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

2.7 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. See schedules:


A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete floor. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using PVC piping. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Water Piping: Comply with Section 23 21 13.

F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

END 23 73 13

SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 81 26 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATINGAND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 81 26 - SPLIT- SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components, designed for exposed or concealed mounting.

B. Thermostats.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. E.M.I. 2. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company. 3. Stulz

2.2 CEILING-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.

C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection.

D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan, with outside air, and integral condensate pump.

E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

F. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

1. Refrigerant: R-410A.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.


F. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.

G. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Thermostat: Low voltage to control compressor and evaporator fan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

D. Install ground-mounting, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.

E. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26.

END 23 81 26

FIN TUBE CONVECTORS 23 82 33 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 82 33 – FIN TUBE CONVECTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Electric baseboard convectors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated.

B. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Color Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For convection heating units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD CONVECTORS


1. Berko. 2. Markel. 3. Raywall. 4. Trane.

B. Front and Top Panel: Minimum 0.0677-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel with exposed corners rounded; removable front panels with tamper-resistant fasteners braced and reinforced for stiffness.

C. Wall-Mounting Back and End Panels: Minimum 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick steel.

D. Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch (914-mm) spacing to support front panel and element.

E. Insulation: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, fibrous glass on inside of the back of the enclosure.

F. Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.

G. Controls: Unit mounted thermostat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive convection heating units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

FIN TUBE CONVECTORS 23 82 33 - 2


3.2 FIN-TUBE CONVECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.

C. Install air-seal gasketing between wall and recessing flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.

END 23 82 33

UNIT HEATERS 23 82 39 - 1

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 82 39 – UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Propeller unit heaters with hot-water coils.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CWP: Cold working pressure.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS


1. Airtherm. 2. Sterling. 3. Trane. 4. Sigma.

B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.

C. Comply with UL 2021.


D. Comply with UL 823.

E. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.

F. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.

G. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units.

H. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate hot-water propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.

I. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, minimum 0.025-inch (0.635-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig (2413 kPa) underwater.

J. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.

K. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated.

L. Controls: See 23 09 93.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers and seismic restraints. Vibration isolators and seismic restraints are specified in Section 23 05 48.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose.


D. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."

F. Ground equipment according to Division 26.

G. Connect wiring according to Division 26.

END 23 82 39

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE 26 05 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 13 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE


A. Medium voltage cable. B. Cable terminations.

1.2 REFERENCES A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. B. IEEE 48 - Test Procedures and Requirements for High- Voltage Alternating-Current Cable

Terminations. C. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of

Electrical Energy. D. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of

Electrical Energy. E. NEMA WC 7 - Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene- Insulated Wire and Cable for the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. F. NEMA WC 8 - Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for cable, terminations, and accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes and locations of cables. C. Certification of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by Military Installation authority having

jurisdiction. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

E. Test Reports: Indicate results of cable test in tabular form and in plots of current versus voltage

for incremental voltage steps, and current versus time at 30 second intervals at maximum voltage.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing Products specified in this Section with minimum three

years documented experience.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified

and indicated.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept cable and accessories on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. B. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect from weather. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify routing and termination locations of cable bank prior to rough-in. B. Cable routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as

required to complete wiring system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE

A. Description: NEMA WC 7; EPR type. 133% insulation level. B. Voltage: 15 kV. C. Conductor: Copper, concentric, stranded, with semi-conductive conductor shield. D. Construction: Single conductor with metal tape insulation shielding. E. Insulation Jacket: PVC.

2.2 MODULAR CABLE TERMINATION

A. Description: IEEE 48; Class 1, molded rubber cable termination in kit form with stress cone,

ground clamp, non-tracking rubber skirts, load break connector, rubber cap, and aerial lug.

2.3 TAPE TERMINATION A. IEEE 48; Class 1, tape termination kit with semi-conductive tape, stress control tape, splicing

tape, vinyl plastic tape, stress cone, mechanical ground straps, and cable preparation kit.

2.4 FIREPROOFING TAPE A. Provide tape U.L. listed and labeled for the purpose.

2.5 POTHEADS


A. Description: IEEE 48; Class 1 termination. Pothead with porcelain insulators, cable connector and aerial lug, sealed cable entrance and support, and insulating compound.

B. Conductors: One.

2.6 CABLE TERMINATIONS

A. Description: IEEE 48; Class 2 porcelain insulator cable terminator in kit form. 2.7 CAST EPOXY CABLE TERMINATION

A. Description: IEEE 48; Class 1, cast epoxy cable termination in kit form with stress cone, shield ground connections, wet porcelain rain shield for outdoor units, epoxy resin molding material, and accessories and molds required for proper application.

B. Construction: Single conductor with metal tape insulating shielding. C. Insulation Jacket: PVC.


A. Verify that raceway is ready to receive cable.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Use swab to clean raceways before pulling cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Avoid abrasion and other damage to cables during installation. B. Use suitable lubricants and pulling equipment. C. Sustain cable pulling tensions and bending radii below recommended limits. D. Ground cable shield at each termination and splice. E. Install cables in manholes along wall providing longest route. F. Arrange cable in manholes to avoid interference with duct entrances. G. Fireproof cables in manholes using fireproofing tape in half-lapped wrapping. Extend fireproofing

one inch into duct.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage. B. Inspect cable for proper connections as shown on Drawings. C. Inspect shield grounding, cable supports, and terminations for proper installation. D. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.

3.5 PROTECTION


A. Protect installed cables from entrance of moisture.

3.6 TEST AND RECORDS

A. Prior to energizing the cable, testing of the cable shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer.

B. Exposed ends of cable shall be prepared and cleaned prior to testing in order to minimize any

leakage current. C. Cable circuit ends must be cleaned and guarded for personnel safety during cable testing. Circuits

not under test in the immediate vicinity shall be grounded. D. Exposed circuit ends under test require a minimum separation from all elements not subjected to

a test of 1 inch (25.4 mm) per 10 kV of test potential. After testing, cables shall be grounded for a minimum of 4 times (4X) as long as the test voltage was applied during the hi-potential tests to assure complete discharge.

E. When all cable, splices and terminations have been tested in accordance with Appendix A, and

test results have been accepted by the Contracting Officer, the cable system may be placed in service as per the outage procedure.

F. After the installation of the primary cables the contractor shall employ an independent third part

electrical testing firm to test cables per this specification. The testing firm shall be a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). The testing firm shall submit proof of membership.

G. The electrical testing firm Contractor shall use calibrated test equipment for "Hi-potting" cables.

The "Hi-pot" tests shall be performed at the times directed in this specification. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests, and electrical power will be furnished to the contractor on an "as is available" basis; otherwise Contractor supplies generator. A Cable High Potential Test Certificate (blank form) will be furnished to the contractor. The contractor shall fill out the appropriate information on this form at the time of making the test for approval.

3.7 TEST PROCEDURE

A. All medium voltage cables installed shall be tested as follows, using D.C. hi-potential. (Note: This is not a grounding or switching procedures; see outage procedure for grounding and switching sequence).

1. Field Testing of New Cables After Installation: The cable shall be tested after installation and installation of stress relief devices. Both ends of the cable shall be isolated from air break switches, transformers, etc. Remove all grounds from cable to be "hi-potted". (Note: If conductors are left connected to the equipment, the hi-pot test shall not exceed the rating of the equipment). For cables terminated with a 200 Amp elbow connector, elbows shall be placed on an insulated parking bushing prior to test. For cables terminated with a 600 Amp T-splice connector, the T-splice shall be capped prior to test.

2. Field Testing of New Cables Jointed to Existing Cable a. After acceptance tests for new cables, rated at 15KV, have been made and new

cables are spliced to existing cables, a second test of the entire cable run, from termination to termination, shall be made. This is only applicable where an existing cable is introduced into the circuit.

b. The procedure for testing shall be the same as indicated above, except that the test voltage will be reduced to the values indicated on the appropriate form.

c. This test is also applicable for testing of exiting 15 kv rated cable where it is important to test the integrity of the cable.


3. Dissipation of the charge build-up on the conductors shall be allowed to drain off through the

test set and voltmeter circuit. After the potential drops below 95% of the test value, the conductor shall be solidly grounded. The grounds shall be left on all conductors for a minimum of 4 times (4X) as long as the test voltage was applied during hi-potential tests and/or as long as someone is handling the conductors.

3.8 FAULTY CABLE

A. Contractor Furnished: In the event that any new contractor-furnished cable fails to meet any of the above tests, the entire faulty cable shall be removed and new cable shall be installed and tested at no increase in the contract price.


PREPARED BY:

PROJECT LOCATION:

PROJECT NO:

CHECKED BY:

CABLE HI POTENTIAL TEST

SPEC. NO.: 16121

DATE:

REV. B 10/01

CERTIFICATE, 15KV CLASS NEW INSTALLATION

ELECTRICAL

CONTRACT NO. __________________________________ DATE _____________________ CABLE OR DESIGNATION ________________________________________________________________ LOCATION _____________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ CABLE SIZE ____________________________________________________________________________ INSULATION AND JACKET TYPE ________________________ LENGTH _____________________ FT MAX. CURRENT AFTER 100% TEST VOLTAGE APPLIED _______________________________________ CABLE ACCEPTABLE ____________________________ NOT ACCEPTABLE ________________________ TEST CONDUCTED BY: _____________________________________________________________________ TEST WITNESSED BY: ______________________________________________________________________ REMARKS: ________________________________________________________________________________ TEMPERATURE: ________________ F WEATHER CONDITIONS: _______________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________

15KV RATED, EPR, 133% INSULATION LEVEL, HI-POTENTIAL TEST FOR INITIAL INSTALLATION TEST (NEW CABLE) STEP

VOLTAGE LEVEL**

DURATION

TIME ELAPSE

MICRO AMPS *

POLARIZATION INDEX =

= STEP 4 STEP 9

1 15 KV 1 Min. 1 Min.

2 30 KV 1 Min. 2 Min.

3 45 KV 1 Min. 3 Min.

4 50 KV 1 Min. 4 Min. _________________

5 50 KV 1 Min. 5 Min.

6 50 KV 1 Min. 6 Min.

7 50 KV 1 Min. 7 Min.

8 50 KV 1 Min. 8 Min.

9 50 KV 1 Min. 9 Min. _________________ = ____________

* READING AT END OF 1 MIN. DURATION PRIOR TO RAISING VOLTAGE TO NEXT STEP. ** BETWEEN EACH STEP RAISE VOLTAGE UNIFORMLY. NOTE: STOP TEST IF CURRENT STEADILY INCREASES AT CONSTANT VOLTAGE. POLARIZATION RESULTS: IF 1.25 - 2.0 GOOD IF BELOW 1.0 FAILURE IF 1.0 - 1.25 MARGINAL


PREPARED BY:

PROJECT LOCATION:

PROJECT NO.:

CHECKED BY:

CABLE HI POTENTIAL TEST

SPEC. NO.: 16121

DATE:

REV. B 10/01

CERTIFICATE, 15KV CLASS EXISTING INSTALLATION

ELECTRICAL

CONTRACT NO. __________________________________ DATE _____________________ CABLE OR DESIGNATION ________________________________________________________________ LOCATION _____________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________________ CABLE SIZE ____________________________________________________________________________ INSULATION AND JACKET TYPE ________________________ LENGTH _____________________ FT MAX. CURRENT AFTER 100% TEST VOLTAGE APPLIED _______________________________________ CABLE ACCEPTABLE ____________________________ NOT ACCEPTABLE ________________________ TEST CONDUCTED BY: _____________________________________________________________________ TEST WITNESSED BY: ______________________________________________________________________ REMARKS: ________________________________________________________________________________ TEMPERATURE: ________________ F WEATHER CONDITIONS: _______________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 15KV RATED, EPR, 133% INSULATION LEVEL, HI-POTENTIAL TEST FOR EXISTING CABLE AND FOR NEW CABLE SPLICED TO EXISTING CABLE. STEP

VOLTAGE LEVEL**

DURATION

TIME ELAPSE

MICRO AMPS *

POLARIZATION INDEX =

= STEP 2 STEP 7

1 15 KV 1 Min. 1 Min.

2 22V 1 Min. 2 Min. _________________

3 22V 1 Min. 3 Min.

4 22V 1 Min. 4 Min.

5 22V 1 Min. 5 Min.

6 22V 1 Min. 6 Min.

7 22V 1 Min. 7 Min. ________________ = _____________

* READING AT END OF 1 MIN. DURATION PRIOR TO RAISING VOLTAGE TO NEXT STEP. ** BETWEEN EACH STEP RAISE VOLTAGE UNIFORMLY. NOTE: STOP TEST IF CURRENT STEADILY INCREASES AT CONSTANT VOLTAGE. POLARIZATION RESULTS: IF 1.25 - 2.0 GOOD IF BELOW 1.0 FAILURE IF 1.0 - 1.25 MARGINAL

END 26 05 13

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 26 05 19-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 19 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE


A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable type.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish building wire and wiring connectors listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,

as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.


C. Wire and cable routing indicated is schematic unless dimensioned.

1.9 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN-2/THWN-2. E. Use standard color coding for phase A, phase B, phase C, neutral and ground: Insulation: 1. 208/120 volt circuits: black, red, blue, white, green.


A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.3 WIRING METHODS A. Use wiring methods indicated. B. All branch circuit and feeder wiring shall be installed in raceways.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. C. Use solid conductors for #12 and smaller, stranded #10 and larger. D. Use stranded conductors for power circuits. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for fused control circuits.


H. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt

branch circuits with homeruns longer than 75 feet. I. Unless a larger size is indicated on plans, use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt

branch circuits with homeruns longer than 200 feet. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. M. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. N. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise. O. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

P. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps,

8 AWG and smaller. Q. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10

AWG and smaller. R. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor

with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.

3.6 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS A. Perform tests after cables have been installed in raceways, but before connection to lugs. Notify

Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to cable tests. B. Measure resistance line-to-ground using a commercial meggar tester. Apply 1000 volts DC to

cables 2 AWG and larger and record DC insulation resistance for each circuit conductor. Minimum acceptable level is 50 megohms.

C. Record test results and include in O and M manual.

END 26 05 19

GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING


A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Effectively grounded metal frame of the building. C. Rod electrode. D. Concrete encased electrode.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.


A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by


1.7 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Procedures for submittals. B. Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with




A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet.

2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Burndy or approved equal. B. Material: Bronze.

2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Cadweld or approved equal.

2.4 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. Unless noted otherwise, provide with green insulation. B. Size: As required by NEC.

2.5 GROUND BUSHING/LUG

A. Insulated metallic grounding bushings, tin-plated open-type lug dual rated for CU-AL conductors, thermoplastic liners rated 105 degree C, die cast zinc, to provide a smooth, well-rounded bearing surface for wires or cable at the end of threaded conduit or a conduit connector as required by the NEC.

2.6 ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor at both ends of conductors and at any boxes or splice locations with alternating bands of green and yellow tape. Provide at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow tape.

2.7 TELEPHONE SYSTEM GROUND CONDUCTORS

A. Provide a #3/0 ground conductor from telephone service terminal board ground bus bar to

electrical system ground electrode. See ground bus detail. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.2 INSTALLATION


A. Install rod electrodes at exterior of building near service equipment. Install additional rod

electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. B. Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in

foundation footing. Bond steel together using tie wires so there is a minimum of 40 feet of continuous bar to which to bond grounding electrode conductor.

C. Provide 3/0 AWG bare copper grounding electrode conductor and connect to metal cold water

pipe. Metal cold water pipe must be in continuous direct contact with the earth a minimum of 10 feet. Make connection a maximum of 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.

D. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. E. In addition to bonded equipment grounding conductors, provide isolated grounding conductors for

circuits shown on plans. Conductors shall be 12 AWG unless noted otherwise and one per circuit. F. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and

branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. G. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid bare #8AWG

between all ground terminal strips.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Maximum acceptable resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms.

END 26 05 26

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 29 - SUPPORTING DEVICES


A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system or expansion anchors and

preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall

fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturer: Unistrut (P1000 unless otherwise noted) or approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized or painted steel. (1-5/8”square.)

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29-2

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation",

NFPA 70 and maximum distance between conduit support tables. C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling support wires, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch

off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in

hollow partitions.

END 26 05 29

CONDUIT 26 05 33-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 33 - CONDUIT


A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetallic conduit. F. Flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. Fittings and conduit bodies.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 07 – Roofing Penetrations. B. Division 07 – Fire stopping.

C. Division 26 – Duct Bank. D. Division 26 – Boxes.

E. Division 26 – Grounding and Bonding.

F. Division 26 – Supporting Devices.

G. Division 26 – Electrical Identification.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Conduit and tubing shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of following standards: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable

Assemblies. 4. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NECA "Standard of Installation." 6. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. Limit conductor cross sectional area to no more than 40% of

conduit cross sectional area.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-2

B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, fittings, conduit bodies.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Project Record Documents. B. Accurately record actual routing of interior conduits larger than 2 inches on project record

documents and of all underground conduits regardless of size. For locations of underground conduits provide dimensions indicating locations and depth.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and shown.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide

appropriate covering. C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown schematically on Drawings unless dimensioned. Route as required to

complete wiring system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: ¾” inch unless otherwise specified. B. Non-Hazardous Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

2. Within Five Feet Inside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

3. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic (Schedule 40 PVC) conduit.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit. D. Wet and Damp Interior Locations Above Floor Slab: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal

conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Use wet and/or damp location fittings. E. Dry Interior Locations Above Floor Slab (Including Hollow Stud Partitions):

CONDUIT 26 05 33-3

1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. F. Above Ground and Underground Raceways Serving Gasoline Dispenser Islands and

Aboveground Storage Tanks:

1. Use rigid steel elbows and conduit for all above grade portions, also first and last 10 feet of underground portions of raceways. See gasoline drawings GE-1.01 through GE-1.03.

2. 3. Use explosion-proof seal fittings at both ends of conduit. Fill seal fitting with U.L.

listed sealing materials. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit, threaded connections.

2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match

conduit. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type or set screw type.

2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.


A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-4

C. Provide supports as required by NEC maximum distance between conduit support tables. Arrange

supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers. Where possible, support conduits in ceiling cavity space at the level of structural roof joists.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide

space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Division 26. DO

NOT SUPPORT CONDUITS DIRECTLY FROM ROOF DECK. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary

supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Fasten individual conduits to roof joists. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit under slab directly from point-to-point where possible. Avoid conduit crossovers

where possible. M. Do not install conduit in floor slab on grade or floor slab above grade. Run conduits 1-1/2” and

below on grade at bottom of gravel sub-base. Conduits larger than 1-1/2” shall be trenched in below grade so top of conduit is at top of grade.

N. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104

degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends before joining. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic

conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 10 minutes, minimum. Use only an approved hotbox bender to make bends in nonmetallic conduit.

S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet

locations and to cast boxes. T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes (no more than two 90-

degree bends for conduits containing telephone cables, fire alarm cables, intrusions system cables, local area network (LAN) cables, etc.). Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. V. Provide expansion/deflection couplings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit

crosses seismic joints or expansion joints. Such couplings shall have braided copper bonding jumpers.

CONDUIT 26 05 33-5

W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves less than 20 feet long and

nipples. X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Division 26. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Division 26. AA. Where conduits for telephone cables, cash register cables, etc. are stubbed from wall boxes or

cabinets to above accessible ceilings, turn conduits out of wall approximately 12 inches above accessible ceiling. Coordinate location with other trades. Provide bushing on end of conduit to prevent signal cable contact with sharp metal. Provide tag on end of conduit indicating type and location of utilization outlet (example: TELEPHONE - BREAK ROOM).

BB. In interior locations, turn nonmetallic conduits through floor slab using rigid steel elbows.

Continue raceway above floor slab using metallic conduit. CC. Paint exposed conduits to match adjacent surface. DD. Where conduits enter boxes and cabinets, provide bushings with plastic insulated throat for

conduits 1 inch and larger. EE. Seismic Bracing: provide seismic bracing for suspended conduits 2” or larger and trapeze

hangers at interval of 20 feet or less. Bracing shall consists of 1-5/8" square channel both parallel and perpendicular to conduit, and fastened to roof joist at 45 degree angle relative to vertical.

FF. AC and MC cable shall not be acceptable for use on this project. Except as specified in Division

26.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials

and methods under the provisions of Division 07. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with

pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.

END 26 05 33

BOXES 26 05 34-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 34 - BOXES


A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. C. Explosionproof junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, materials, and accessories.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record

documents.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;

include male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.

Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.

BOXES 26 05 34-2

D. Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with the wall. The cast aluminum receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-1/2” from wall surface. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is weathertight in use per NEC 410-57b. Hubbell WP-700, or equal.

E. Boxes for use with gasoline system shall be explosion-proof and rated for use in Class 1, Division

1 hazardous locations. 2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in 26 05 35. C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. D. In-Ground Cast Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Polymer concrete. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC" or “TELEPHONE” as appropriate.

2.4 EXPLOSIONPROOF JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide explosionproof junction boxes and covers in gasoline dispense sumps, within 20 feet

horizontally of gasoline dispensers, and within 10 feet horizontally from above ground gasoline storage tanks. Boxes shall be U.L. listed and labelled for use in Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous locations.


A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,

equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. F. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust

box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. G. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices as specified in 26 27 26. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. J. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling

access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. K. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. L. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and

backsplashes.

BOXES 26 05 34-3

M. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. N. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,

manual starters, interval timers, thermostats, and similar devices. Align wall mounted boxes for receptacles, telephone jacks, local area network outlets, and the like. Where such devices are shown in close proximity on plans, locate adjacent outlets with no more than 4 inch space between adjacent boxes.

O. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in all areas except mechanical rooms, mezzanines, and electrical

closets. P. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, locate flush mounting boxes in masonry wall to require

cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. Q. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. R. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness. After finished wall material is applied, provide box extensions for all boxes with setback more than 1/8 inch.

S. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. T. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. U. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. V. DO NOT FASTEN BOXES TO CEILING SUPPORT WIRES OR DIRECTLY TO ROOF DECK. W. Support boxes independently of conduit. X. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

Provide metal barrier plates between gangs to separate line voltage from low voltage systems and where voltage between adjacent light switches exceeds 300 volts.

Y. Use 4” square box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Z. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather, interiors of walk-in refrigeration

equipment, and wet locations. Provide vapor seals at conduit entrances to these boxes. Use U.L. listed sealing compound.

AA. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade. BB. Set floor boxes level. Recheck level and elevation immediately after concrete pour and rough

finish. Where floor boxes for power, telephone, and intrusion detection system occur together, insure these boxes are spaced so as to be completely covered by store fixtures.

CC. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box

in other locations. BB. Where fossil fuel driven vehicles, appliances, or equipment including lawn equipment in Lawn

Storage Room are present, locate all boxes at least 36 inches above floor level. Feed such boxes with cable and conduit from above. Allow no electrical work to penetrate the space from floor level to 18 inches above floor.

CC. Provide pull boxes in feeder circuits as required but at least every 150 feet in straight runs. DD. Identify all junction boxes by panel and circuit number on outside cover with legible permanent ink

marker on outside face of cover.

BOXES 26 05 34-4

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected to allow accessibility of box and

proper operation of equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.5 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. D. Check boxes for the presence of drywall screws, concrete residue, and other sharp objects.

Remove all sharp objects. E. Clean floor boxes and underfloor conduit systems of water and dirt prior to installing wiring. Close

boxes to prevent entry of dirt and water after installing wires. Failure to meet this requirement will result in contractor being required to remove wiring, clean boxes and conduit systems and reinstallation of new wiring, all at no cost to Owner.

END 26 05 34

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 05 35-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 35 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES


A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents. B. Furnish two of each key. Cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed to same key as panel boards.


A. Hoffman B. Square D

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 26 05 35-2

C. General Electric

2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 inside, or 3R where exposed to weather or moisture, steel

enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. Covers in damp and wet

locations shall have continuous gasket. C. Provide removable interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components;

finish with white enamel. Provide standoff devices for separation of equipment mounting panel from enclosure.

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.3 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide white enamel finished metal backboard for mounting terminal blocks or other

devices. C. Fronts: Steel, Flush type with door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch

circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. E. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation” and NFPA 70. B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each

corner under the provisions Division 26. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.2 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END 26 05 35

DUCT BANK 26 05 43-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 43 - DUCT BANK


A. Metal conduit.

B. Duct.


A. Division 02 - Excavation.

B. Division 02 - Backfilling.

C. Division 03 - Concrete Formwork.

D. Division 03 - Concrete Reinforcement.

E. Division 03 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.

B. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings.

C. ASTM C857 - Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

D ASTM C858 - Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.

E. ASTM C891 - Installation of Underground Precast Utility Structures. F. ASTM C1037 - Inspection of Underground Precast Utility Structures.

G. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code.

H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

I. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).

J. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

K. NEMA TC 6 - PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

L. NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation.

M. NEMA TC 10 - PVC and ABS Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings for Underground Installation.

N. NEMA TC 14 - Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings.

O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

P. UL 651A - Type EB and A PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. Q. I3A – Technical Criteria for the Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture



A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, nonmetallic conduit, and warning tape.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of opening and accessory locations for precast manholes and handholes.


A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 - Project Closeout.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing and elevations of underground conduit and duct. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for rough-in.

C. Duct bank routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Route as required to complete duct system.

D. Verify locations of manholes and handholes prior to excavating for installation.

E. Manhole and handhole locations are shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated.

Locate as required to complete ductbank system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1, steel. 2.2 PLASTIC CONDUIT


A. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA TC 3. 2.3 PLASTIC DUCT

A. Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6; PVC.

B. Plastic Utility Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9.

C. Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 6; PVC. 2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Warning Tape: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored as noted below and suitable warning legend describing buried utility lines per A.P.W.A.

1. Red – Caution Buried Electric Line Below. 2. Purple – Caution Buried Reclaimed Water Line Below. 3. Orange – Caution Buried Fiber Optic Line Below. 4. Orange – Caution Buried Telephone Line Below.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION

A. Install all duct to locate top of ductbank minimum 36 inches below finished grade.

B. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (0.33 percent). Slope duct away from building entrances. See civil drawings for profile views and crossing details.

C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

E. Join nonmetallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Wipe nonmetallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

G. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points.

H. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.

I. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum.

J. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers.

K. Band ducts together before backfilling or placing concrete.

L. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.

M. Place concrete under provisions of Division 03. Use mineral pigment to color concrete red for power. Orange for communications.

N. Provide minimum 3-inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of secondary ductbank.

O. Provide suitable nylon pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.

P. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture.

Q. Backfill trenches under provisions of Division 02.

R. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling specified in Division 02. Install tape 6 inches below finished surface.

S. Terminate duct at manhole entries using bell end.

T. Connect to manhole wall using dowels.

U. Connect to existing concrete encasements using dowels.

V. Accomplished changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertically or horizontally,


by long sweeping bends having a minimum radius of 7.62 m (25ft.). Long sweeps may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Bends made manually will not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit. There will be no more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bend (180) degrees total between pull points, including offset and kicks with a curvature radius of less than 30 m (100 ft.). Back-to back 90 degree bends will be avoided.

W. Where the radius is less than 12m (40ft.), 4.6m (15ft.) radius-manufactured bends must be used. If possible, the entire change in direction should be made with a single arc of 4.6m (15ft.) radius. Manufactured bends may be used on subsidiary/lateral conduits at the riser pole or building entrance. Manufactured bend will have a minimum radius of 10 times the internal diameter of the conduit in accordance with NEC Chapter 9 and ANSI/TIA/SIA-758.

X. Bends and sweeps will be concrete-encased to protect the duct from the pressures developed while pulling cables. Where a duct enters a building and sweeps up through a floor slab, galvanized RSC will be used. For ducts transitioning from the lower duct window of a maintenance hole to the nominal trench depth, the transition will be accomplished in no less than 9.1m (30 linear ft) from the maintenance hole in order to reduce the radius of the bends. The duct should be concrete-encased in the transition area.

Y. Raceways shall cleaned by running a mandrell through raceway to remove all debris before installing cables. Invite base NEC personnel to witness mandrell process a minimum two weeks in advance.

Z. Provide tracer wire and access boxes for communications duct and primary electric duct according to Ft. Drum standards and details on civil drawings.

END 26 05 43

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 05 53-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 53 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION


A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. C. Conduit markers.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for

purpose specified and shown. C. Comply with Ft. Drum standards for tracer wire and access boxes for primary electric duct

and communications duct. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

Screw on type with two self tapping screws. Mastic type nameplates not allowed. B. Locations: 1. Main disconnect switch (indicate maximum allowable fuse size where fuse is

smaller than switch ampere rating). 2. Each switch in main switchboard (MDP). 3. Each lighting and appliance panelboard. 4. Each breaker in distribution panel. 5. Each safety switch not in sight of utilization equipment. 6. Each automatic

motor starter and variable speed drives 7. Relays and contactors. Indicate loads controlled. 8. Time switches. Indicate load controlled. 9. Fire alarm and mass notification equipment cabinets. Label to match plans. 10. Manual transfer switch and generator connection box.


11. Where more than two switches are located adjacent to each other or where switches control loads not in same space. See details on plans.

12. Where noted on plans. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8th inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads such as safety

switches, motor starters, and relays. 2. Use 1/4th inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads such as

panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers.

2.2 WIRE MARKERS A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. Locations: Each conductor at distribution equipment panelboard gutters, pull boxes,

outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder circuit number. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number corresponding to applicable control

schematics.

2.3 CONDUIT MARKERS A. Location: Conduit couplings and junction box covers shall be painted to indicate system

that conduit serves. B. Color: 1. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 2. Fire Alarm System: Red. 3. Security System: Black. 4. Emergency: Red 5. Comm/Data: Blue

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE (FOR CIRCUITS OTHER THAN PRIMARY ELECTRIC

DUCT AND COMMUNICATIONS DUCT)

A. Description: 6 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, A.P.W.A. colored tape with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. Detection shall be by means of continuous integral metal conductor factory installed in warning tape. 1. Red – “Caution Buried Electric Line Below.” 2. Orange – “Caution Buried Telephone Line Below.”


A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.

3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws.


C. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09910. D. Field paint colored couplings on each conduit longer than 6 feet and conduit stubs. E. Color: 1. 208 Volt System: Natural conduit. 2. Fire Alarm System: Red. 3. Security System: Black. 4. Emergency: Red 5. Comm/Data: Blue F. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per

trench at 12 inches above conduits or duct bank.

END 26 05 53

ELECTRIC CONTROLS 26 09 23-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 23 - ELECTRIC CONTROLS


A. Time switches. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 05 35 - Enclosures: Cabinets and terminal blocks.

B. Section 26 09 24 - Enclosed Contactors. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems.

B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 – Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide for each component showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TIME SWITCHES

A. Time switches shall be programmable astronomic, seven day plus 365 day solid state electronic type, capable of independent programming of two (2) independent channels, with programmable automatic daylight savings time adjustment, and shall be housed in a lockable, non-metallic, surface mount case.

B. Switches shall be capable of fully independent 7 day scheduling, with up to 3 ON and 3 Off times per

channel per day, plus a special 365 holiday schedule, assigned by month and day.

ELECTRIC CONTROLS 26 09 23-2

C. They shall be capable of independent duty cycling during the scheduled ON time, with up to 3 patterns per channel per day and built-in 5 minute short cycle protection.

D. They shall have independent timed override for each channel for manual control and be programmable

independently per channel per day, from 1 minute to 23 hours and 59 minutes.

E. Switches shall have brown-out protection and automatic 4 second load staggering when channels are programmed to be ON at the same time or after power outages and shall be equipped with a rechargeable carry-over system for up to 14 hours of carry-over. Switches shall perform a self-test every 60 seconds to assure a fail-safe operation.

F. Time switches shall be powered by a 120VAC, 60HZ source. Contact configuration to be N.O. (N.C.) For

each channel, with a rating of 15 amperes ballast, 120/240/277VAC. Contact closure on time switch shall be momentary for pilot control of mechanically held contactors and relays.

G. Manufacturers for time switches:

1. Time Switch: Tork #DZM200BP-0 with USB-MMP option and software. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Train and lace wiring in cabinets.

C. Program time switches according to instructions from Contracting Officer.

D. Label each time switch with engraved nameplate.

E. Label each time switch load contact indicating contactors controlled by each load contact.

F. Provide two hours training of AAFES personnel in programming operations. G. Provide programming module and PC based software for programming of time switch. Turn module program

and software instructions over to AAFES at completion of project. Obtain hand receipt and include with O & M manuals.

END 26 09 23

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 26 09 24-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 24 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS


A. General purpose relays. B. Lighting contactors.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.


A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Submittals. B. Record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled on project record

documents. C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.




purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS

A. Manufacturers:


1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. ASCO. 5. Allen-Bradley. 6. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic relay. C. Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz electrically held. D. Poles: As scheduled or indicated. E. Size: 20 ampere or as scheduled or indicated. F. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation.

G. Surface mount in janitor, mechanical and electrical spaces. Surface mount above panels where panel is surface mounted.

H. Label per Section 26 05 53.

2. 2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Asco. 5. Allen-Bradley. 6. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. C. Configuration: Mechanically held, 3 wire control. D. Coils: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. Separate latching and unlatching coils with clearing contacts in series

with each coil to ensure only momentary energization of coils. E. Poles: As scheduled or indicated. F. Contact Rating: As scheduled or indicated. Match branch circuit overcurrent protection,

considering derating for continuous loads. G. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. H. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary Contacts: Two field convertible. I. Label per Section 26 05 53.


A. Mount relays and contactors true and plumb according to manufacturer’s written instructions.


B. Ensure proper operation by several open/close operations of the load contacts. 3.2 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of contactors.

3.3 LABELLING

A. Provide engraved nameplate per 26 05 53. Nameplate shall indicate contactor designation and branch circuits controlled. Example: “CONTACTOR C-1” on first line; “CKTS LAL – 13, 58” on second line.

END 26 09 24

OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 09 25-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 09 25 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS


A. Occupancy sensors for lighting control. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit.

B. Section 26 05 39 - Building Wire and Cable.

C. Section 26 05 34 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Division 01 – Submittals, provide:

1. Product Data: Provide electrical ratings, adjustment ranges, enclosure type, outline dimensions, mounting dimensions, and terminal connection information.

2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

3. CAD generated lighting plans for each building marked by occupancy sensor manufacturer showing proper product, location, and orientation of each sensor.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Ceiling mounted dual technology sensors shall employ both passive infrared and ultrasonic detection methods. Sensors shall have a multiple segmented lens and provide coverage for up to a 40' x 40' room.

B. Wall Mounted combination dual technology sensors with integral light switch shall employ both passive

infrared and ultrasonic detection methods. Sensors shall have a multiple segmented lens and provide coverage for the room being served. Unit shall have integral on / off switch.

C. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic ballasts and compact fluorescent

lamp systems.


D. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

E. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay (0 - 15 minutes) and

sensitivity.

F. In the event of failure, a bypass manual “override on” shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced.

G. All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being detected during testing and

that the unit is working.

H. All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode, for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.

2.2 OCCUPANCY SENSOR RELAY / POWER PACKS

A. Control unit(s) shall mount through a 2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a maximum of four (4) sensors and shall power to a larger number of sensors where indicated on plans.

B. Relay contacts shall have ratings of:

1. 20A - 120 VAC U.L. listed for use with LED (non-linear) loads 2. Provide relays with two (2) load contacts.

C. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL Classified,

jacketed cable. Cable shall be plenum rated. 2.4 SWITCHBOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Description: PIR type with integral power-switching contacts rated for 1000 W at 120-V ac, suitable for

LED light fixtures.

1. Include ground wire.

2. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keeps lighting off when selected lighting

level is present. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Leviton.

B. Wattstopper. C. Hubble. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete coverage. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room.

C. Locate sensors to ensure the best possible coverage in the available space and to overcome local

difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. Provide training necessary


to familiarize Owner’s key personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

END 26 09 25

PAD MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 26 12 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 12 00 - PAD MOUNTED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Liquid filled pad mounted distribution transformers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 03 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for transformer pads.

B. Division 03 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Pads for transformer support. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C37.47 - Specifications for Distribution Fuse Disconnecting Switches, Fuse Supports, and Current-Limiting Fuses.

B. ANSI C57.12.00 - General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating

Transformers.

C. ANSI C57.12.26 - Pad-Mounted Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable Insulated High-Voltage Connectors, High Voltage 34 500 Grd Y/19 920 Volts and Below; 2500 kVA and Smaller.

D. ANSI C57.12.28 - Switchgear and Transformers--Pad-Mounted Equipment--Enclosure Integrity.

E. ANSI C57.12.55 - Conformance Standard for Transformers--Dry-Type Transformers Used in Unit

Installations, Including Unit Substations.

F. ANSI C57.12.90 - Test Code for Liquid-Immersed Distribution Power, and Regulating Transformers and Guide for Short-Circuit Testing of Distribution and Power Transformers.

G. ANSI C57.13 - Requirements for Instrument Transformers.

H. IEEE C57.106 - Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Insulating Oil in Equipment.

I. IEEE C57.111 - Guide for Acceptance of Silicone Insulating Fluid and Its Maintenance in Transformers.

J. IEEE C57.121 - Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Less Flammable Hydrocarbon Fluid in

Transformers.

K. IEEE 386 - Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600 V.

L. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

M. NEMA 260 - Safety Labels for Padmounted Switchgear and Transformers Sited in Public Areas.

N. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (International Electrical Testing Association).

O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals.


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, outline dimensions, connection and support points, weight, specified ratings and materials.

C. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements, standard model design tests,

and options. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information.

B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and inspection.

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, final adjustments and overcurrent protective device coordination curves, adverse findings, and recommendations.

1.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout.

B. Include copy of manufacturer's certified drawings in project record documents.

C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions for cleaning methods; cleaning materials recommended; procedures for sampling and maintaining fluid.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Testing Agency: Company member of International Electrical Testing Association and specializing in testing

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept transformers on site. Inspect for damage. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents

B. Furnish two each of any special tools required to operate and maintain transformer. 1.12 EXTRA PRODUCTS

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.

B. Furnish three of each size and type fuse. Provide cabinet or rack inside transformer to store spare fuses.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS

A. Liquid-filled Transformers: ANSI C57.12.26, three phase, pad mounted, self-cooled transformer unit.

B. Cooling and Temperature Rise; ANSI C57.12.00; Class OA. 55 degrees C, self-cooled.

C. Insulating Liquid: Oil conforming to IEEE C57.106. Insulating liquid shall be free of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s).

2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Meet requirements for usual service conditions described in ANSI C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.01 and for specified unusual service conditions, if any.

B. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 104 degrees F.

C. Altitude: below 1000 feet.

D. Load Current Harmonic Factor: 0.05 per unit, maximum.

2.3 RATINGS

A. Capacity: As indicated on plans.

B. Primary Voltage: 13.2 kV, delta connected.

C. Taps: 2 - 2-1/2% FCAN, 2 - 2-1/2% FCBN.

D. Secondary Voltage: 120/208 volts, wye connected.

E. Impedance: ANSI standard.

F. Basic Impulse Level: 125 kV. G. Provide copper windings.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories: ANSI C57.12.00, standard accessories and magnetic liquid level gage, dial type thermometer. B. Tap Changer: Externally-operated type.

C. Primary Terminations: Bushing wells to IEEE 386; provide six for loop. Include bushings for insulated

loadbreak connectors.

D. Primary Switching: Gang operated, two position switch.

E. Primary Overcurrent Protection: Bayonet-type, liquid-immersed, expulsion fuses.

F. Secondary Terminations: Spade lugs.

G. Other Accessories: Primary distribution class lightning arrestors; secondary current transformers conforming to ANSI C57.13. Mount in primary bushing wells.

H. Provide electronic watt hour meter with demand register and capability of wireless remote reading. Comply

with Ft. Drum written standards.


2.5 FABRICATION

A. Conform to the requirements of ANSI C57.12.28. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Clean surfaces before applying paint.

B. Apply corrosion-resisting primer to all surfaces.

C. Apply finish coat of baked enamel paint to 4 mils thick.

D. Finish Color: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide factory tests to ANSI C57.12.90. Include routine tests as defined in ANSI C57.12.00 and the following other tests:

1. Impedance voltage and load loss. 2. Dielectric tests. 3. Audible sound level. 4. Short circuit capability. 5. Zero-phase-sequence impedance voltage. 6. Temperature rise. 7. Telephone influence factor (TIF).

B. Test insulating liquid samples in accordance with IEEE C57.121.


A. Verify that support pads provided under Division 01 are ready to receive Products. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumb and level.

B. Install safety labels to NEMA 260. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NEMA ATS, Section 7.2. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Division 01 - Project Record and Closeout Documents: Adjusting installed work.

B. Adjust primary taps so that secondary voltage is above and within 2 percent of rated voltage. 3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean dust and debris from interior of primary and secondary compartments and from exterior of transformer.


END 26 12 00

SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 24 16 – SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS


A. Switchboard MDP. B. Panelboards.


A. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding. B. Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

C. Section 26 43 13 – Surge Protective Devices ((SPD).

D. Section 26 27 13 – Electrical Sensing and Measurement.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. C. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. D. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less. G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment

(published by the International Electrical Testing Association). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. C. Arrange circuit breakers in panels same as shown on plans.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.



A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project

record documents. C. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts

and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.



1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type.

C. Service Conditions: 1. Temperature: 100 degrees F. 2. Altitude: less than 1000 feet. D. Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus.

E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 42,000 amperes rms symmetrical. F. Provide solid state main circuit breaker rated for 100% loading. G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous

magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment branch circuits. Provide circuit breakers UL listed SWD for NO-OFF control of lighting or other loads.

H. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

I. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch, hinged door with flush lock, metal

directory frame, finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. J. Multiple switchboard sections shall be of same depth and height.


K. Provide factory built current transformer compartment and solid state watt-hour meter. See Section 26 27 13 – Electrical Sensing and Measurement.

L. Provide buss connected surge protective device. See Section 26 43 13 – Surge

Protective Devices (SPD).

2.2 PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers (except for gasoline panels. See GE-1.01 thru GE-1.03): 1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;

provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: varies. See panel schedules. Series rating not

allowed. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,

with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, or refrigeration equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

F. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for dry locations, type 3R for exterior locations. G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified,

all cabinets shall be of same dimensions. H. Cabinet Front: With concealed trim clamps, door in door type hinge, metal directory frame, and

flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. I. Where multiple section panel cabinets are specified, all cabinets shall be of same dimensions.


A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install panelboards plumb. C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than

4 inches above floor and with handle of top circuit breaker no more than 6'-6" above floor. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect

circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide screw-on type engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 05 53.


G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Stub spare conduits out of wall minimum 6" below roof joist in areas with exposed roof structure. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26.

I. Do not splice conductors in panelboard cabinets. J. Land only one conductor to each circuit breaker. Where multiple conductors are used, splice in

junction box before entering panelboard.

K. Where multiple ground terminal strips are provided with new panels, run solid, bare, #8AWG between all ground terminal strips.

L. Provide and install arc flash warning signs per NEC 110.16. M. Rigidly mount surface mounted panels to unistrut supports spanning a minimum of two studs.

Panel shall be supported at a minimum of two locations vertically. Provide similar installation at masonry construction. Toggle bolts shall not be used.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit

breakers.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of panelboards.

END 26 24 16

ELECTRICAL SENSING AND MEASUREMENT 26 27 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 27 13 - ELECTRICAL SENSING AND MEASUREMENT


A. Watthour meters. B. Instrument transformers.


A. Section 26 12 00 - Pad Mounted Distribution Transformers

B. Section 26 24 16 – Switchboards and Panelboards 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C12 - Code for Electricity Metering.

B. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.

C. ANSI C57.13 - Requirements for Instrument Transformers.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide electrical ratings, adjustment ranges, enclosure type, outline dimensions, mounting dimensions, and terminal connection information.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATTHOUR METERS A. At pad mount transformer, provide segmented current transformers around secondary spade lugs. Provide

solid state watthour meter and demand register with wireless remote reading capability compatible with Ft Drum requirements.

ELECTRICAL SENSING AND MEASUREMENT 26 27 13-2

A. In switchboard, factory install current transformer and a solid state solid state meter with the following minimum features:

1. Provide microprocessor-based multifunction meter with liquid crystal display. Provide the functions

listed below. 2. Metering values shall be phase selectable and include Amps for each phase and neutral, Volts (L-L &

L-N), Watts, Vars, Voltamperes, Power Factor, Watthours, Varhours (Lag & Lead), Voltamperehours, Current Demand, Peak Current, Watt Demand, Peak Watts, Peak Vars (Lag & Lead), Var Demand (Lag & Lead), Peak Voltamperes, Voltampere Demand, Q-Hours, Power Factor Average, Power Factor during last Demand Interval, and Frequency.

3. The device configuration, values, and settings entered via keypad on the front of the faceplate. 4. Meter shall allow definition of a password to provide security protection. 5. Meter shall accept 5A current inputs and direct voltage inputs up to 600Vac. Meter shall be self-

powered from the voltage inputs. Accuracy shall be 0.5% for watt hours and 0.25% for amperes and voltage. Meter shall have pulse-initiation out-put programmable for Watthours, Voltampere hours, Varhours, or Qhours. [Pulse initiator and contacts shall be compatible with Installation Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS)].

6. Manufacturers: a. General Electrical b. Siemens. c. Square D.

B. Factory mount meter in switchboard.

2.2 METERING TRANSFORMERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D. 4. EMON.

B. Current Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 5 ampere secondary, bar or window type, with primary/secondary ratio

as required or shown on Drawings, burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 Hertz. Primary ampere rating shall be 60 to 80 percent of service equipment ampere rating.

C. Factory mount metering transformers and watt-hour meter in switchboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 I NSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Field calibrate current transformers and watthour meter to + 1% accuracy or better. Under Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents, submit calibration results as part of O & M manual.

END 26 27 13

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES


A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and decorative box covers. D. Floor box service fittings.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 - Submittals: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.




purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E.


B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-Duty, AC only general-use snap switch. Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four way, pilot light, or momentary contact type as indicated.

C. Body and Handle: Plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red lens. E. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes. F. For control of mechanically held contactors or relays; provide three position, momentary contact

switches with spring return to center off position. Momentary contact switches shall be rated 120/277 volt, 20 amperes.

G. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may chose

multiple colors throughout project.

2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. G.E. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy duty, specification grade receptacle. In barber shop and beauty

shop waiting area, provide safety type receptacles which shall discourage insertion of foreign object into receptacle by small children.

C. Device Body: Nylon. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet

regulatory requirements. Devices shall utilize “Lock Out” technology to ensure outlet can not be used if ground fault protection fails. Device shall have status LED.

G. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Type 5-20. Provide with orange body and plate. H. Color: Architect shall select from manufacturers standard colors. Note: Architect may chose

multiple colors throughout project. 2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon in all areas except food prep. Devices in food prep shall be

stainless steel. Manufacturer same as device manufacturer. Color to match device.

B. Exterior Wall Weatherproof exterior boxes to house receptacles: Receptacle shall be installed flush with the wall. The cast aluminum receptacle cover shall have ports to allow two 3/8” diameter cords to pass through and must not protrude over 4-1/2” from wall surface. Enclosure must have gasket between enclosure and mounting surface to assure that the enclosure is “Weatherproof in use”. The enclosure shall be UL Listed. Provide Hubbell WP-700, or equal.

2.4 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS


A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour

3. Leviton 4. G.E.

B. Flush Cover Convenience Receptacle: 1. NEMA 5-20R, gray receptacles.

2. Material: Brass. 3. Configuration: Two 1-1/2” dia screw openings.

4. Threaded screw cover. 5. Split nozzle cable protector. C. Flush Cover Communication Outlet: 1. Material: Brass.

2. Configuration: Two 1-1/2 inch dia threaded openings. 3. Threaded screw cover. 4. Split nozzle cable protector.

D. Flush Cover Combination Fitting: 1. Material: Brass.

2. Configuration: Duplex opening with two 1-1/2 inch threaded openings. 3. Two threaded screw covers. 4. Two split nozzle cable protector.

E. Protective Ring: Brass finish. F. Split Nozzle: Brass finish. G. Carpet Ring: Brass.


A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly to ensure covers will be flush with floor covering. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring

devices.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level.


C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. After connecting wires to GFCI receptacles, wrap terminals with four layers of electrician’s tape. F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal when using solid

conductors. Provide crimp on lugs for terminations when using stranded conductors. I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas and above

accessible ceilings. J. Install split nozzle on active flush cover service fittings. Turn spares over to Contracting Officer.

Obtain hand receipt showing number transferred and include with O and M manual. K. Install floor box coverplates flush and level with floor covering. L. Provide ½” black on clear adhesive label tape on each device coverplate centered between the

top of the cover and the device indicating panel and branch circuit. This label will be controlled when multiple light switches are located next to each other (i.e. A-21).

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 34 to obtain mounting heights

indicated on drawings.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Clean installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END 26 27 26

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 17-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 28 17 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES


A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches.

1.2 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA FU1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association). E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.



1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. General Electric. B. Siemens. C. Square D.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 17-2

D. Cutler Hammer.

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in

OFF position. B. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. Provide rejection clips to

prevent the use of other than Class R fuses.

2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in

OFF position.

2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.


A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches with fuse labels visible from fronts of enclosures. C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size

installed. D. Provide engraved nameplates for switches not in sight of controlled loads. Indicate load type and

location and correct fuse size for fusible switches.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Clean installed work. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. C. Clean dust and debris from interior and exterior of cabinet.

END 26 28 17

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 29 13 – ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide detached motor controllers.

B. Variable speed drives for air handling units furnished under division 23 and installed under division 26.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of

OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.


C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 feet (300 m).

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: starters are used as control devices or equipment

disconnecting means. Provide starters without overload elements 4. Surface mounting with backbox for equipment mounted starters. 5. Rating: 120V, 3/4HP.

C. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical

Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type 120V.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual

protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

7. Auxiliary contacts: 2 N.O., 2 N.C. 8. Hand-off-auto selector switch.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.


1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, type. a. Push Buttons: Shielded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test] c. Selector Switches: Rotary hand-off-auto type.

B. 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.

C. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29, "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on 115% of actual eplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.


3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring in conduit between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 23, "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, motor overload protectors, and fire alarm interlocks.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of

motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Architect before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.


6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: Prior to Substantial Completion, perform an

infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Using Agency's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.


TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 36 00 - 1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 36 00 – MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCHES

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide manual transfer switch.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: portable generator connection box is specified on electrical drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switches, power sources, and load.

2. Retain paragraph and subparagraphs below if required by seismic criteria applicable to Project. Coordinate with Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23, "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration

instructions, including software, where applicable.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Transfer Switches: a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. c. GE Zenith Controls. d. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. e. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. f. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH MTS1

A. Electrically actuated by key operated switches designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate Source." In addition, removable manual handle provides quick-make, quick-break manual-switching action. Switch is capable of electrically or manually transferring load in either direction with either or both sources energized. Control


circuit disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate Source

B. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during switching sequence.

C. Accessories:

1. Pilot lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 2. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available”. 3. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate Source Available”.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Section 26 05 48, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Pad-Mounting Switch : Anchor to pad by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 6 inches (150 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Section 26 05 29, "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Identify components according to Section 26 05 53, "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches

and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal

source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of

control settings. e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

B. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.


4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches

and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal

source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of

control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic

transfer-switch operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.


SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) 26 43 13-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDs)


A. Provide:

1. SPD units mounted integral to switchboard as indicated on riser diagram. 2. SPD units integral to Petro Power Center. See gasoline drawings GE-1.01 thru GE-1.03.


A. Section 26 24 16 – Switchboards and Panelboards.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) G. Federal Information Processing Standards, Pub 94 (FIPS) H. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits, Category C I. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits. J. UL 1449, Current Edition – Surge Protective Devices K. UL 1283 L. NEMA LS-1, Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices M. NEC Article 285

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section Division 01, provide:

1. Shop drawings and product data sheets indication physical and electrical characteristics in accordance with Division 1.

2. UL1449 file card copies. 3. Third party test results verifying label ratings.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant all equipment for ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.



A. Liebert.

B. Current Technology.

C. EFI Electronics.

D. United Power.

E. Leviton.

F. Square D.

G. Seimens ITE.

H. G.E. 2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. SPD Types 1. Switchboard SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 or Type 4 intended for Type 1 or Type

2 applications, verifiable at UL.com, without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls.

2. For gasoline system SPD’s, see gasoline drawings GE-1.01 through GE-1.03.

B. Switchboard SPD Nominal System Operating Voltages

1. 208Y/120 VAC, 3-phase, 4 wire, plus ground.

C. Switchboard SPD Maximum Continuous Operating Voltages (MCOV)

1. 125% of nominal system operating voltage.

D. Operating Frequency

1. 60 Hertz.

E. Seven (7) Protection Modes on Grounded Wye System

1. L-G, L-N and N-G (L = Line, N = Neutral, and G = Ground).

F. SPD’s shall be UL Tested and labeled as a complete assembly to a symmetrical fault current rating greater than or equal to the rating of the connected panel, in accordance with NEC Article 285, without the requirement of a dedicated breaker feeder to obtain the fault current withstand rating.

G. The Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) shall be tested with the integral disconnect in accordance with

UL-1449, Third Edition. The UL VPR values shall not exceed the following (including disconnect). If the device is remote mounted it shall be fed by a circuit breaker and the UL VPR rating shall include the breaker in series with the SPD.

H. Switchboard SPD Maximum UL 1449 Voltage Surge (Category C1)

System Voltage L-N, L-G, N-G Modes


208Y/120 VAC 800V

I. Protection and Filtering Elements:

1. Switchboard SPD shall have a maximum surge current rating of: 300 kA per mode. Devices that derive a maximum surge current rating by adding test results of individual components are not acceptable. Test documentation of kA rating shall be required. Devices must be rated per mode, not per PHASE per NEMA.

2. Switchboard SPD device repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing a

1.2x50ms, 20kV open circuit voltage, 8x20ms, 10kA short circuit Category C3 test waveform (as defined by ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992) at one minute intervals. A failure is defined as either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at the specified surge current. The service entrance device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 20,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%. Downstream devices shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 C3 impulses without failure or performance degradation of more than 10%.

3. The SPD device shall be capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 surges using a 10x1000ms impulse (1kV, 4kA for 277/480V devices, .5kV, 2kA for 120/208V devices), confirmed by an independent nationally recognized test lab (R&B Labs).

4. Systems using selenium, gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes in surge current path are not acceptable.

5. The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for all voltage configurations shall be 125% of nominal or greater.

6. The fusing system shall be capable of allowing the rated maximum surge current to pass through without fuse operation. Systems utilizing a fusing system that opens below the maximum surge current level are unacceptable. The fusing system shall be included in the surge current testing.

J. Switchboard SPD shall incorporate a UL 1283 listed EMI/RFI filter with minimum attenuation of –

50dB at 100kHz. K. Switchboard SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n).

L. Switchboard SPD Overcurrent Protection:

1. Circuit breaker rated for 42 KAIC (integral SPD disconnect and overcurrent protection).

M. Switchboard SPD Diagnostic Monitoring:

1. Power monitoring. 2. MOV monitoring. 3. Green/red indicator lights for each phase. Red light indicating damaged phase. 4. Form C contacts for remote annunciation of unit status. 5. Press-to-test diagnostics to verify operational integrity of monitoring system. 6. Surge event counter and audible alarm. 7. Remote status monitor.

N. Serviceability:

1. SPD system module(s) must be field replaceable by qualified individuals or licensed

Electricians. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install SPD units per manufacturer's written recommendations.


B. Verify SPD unit ratings with service rating and voltage characteristics, and with Electrical

Requirements section of this specification. Ensure proper system configuration and coordination prior to ordering any equipment.

C. Do not drill or tap equipment bus bars. Use suitable bolted bus connectors.

D. Connect separately mounted SPD units to equipment with input conductors that are as short and

straight as practically possible. Twist input conductors to reduce inductance.

E. Provide source breaker or fused disconnect switch for SPD units sized in accordance with SPD manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Ground equipment and SPD units per manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and Section 26 05 26.

G. Provide mounting brackets, bus bar, breaker stabs, and filler pieces for unused spaces.


A. Perform SPD unit tests according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide verification of test results to Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide services of manufacturer's factory trained Engineer for length of time required to:

1. Coordinate installation. 2. Conduct functional tests on all equipment and field test listed herein. 3. Provide training during normal working hours to AAFES's personnel in operation, testing,

adjusting, and maintenance. 4. Submit written report to Architect/Engineer and AAFES stating results of tests conducted and

listing personnel trained. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque value recommendations and UL 486A and B.

C. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

D. Clean interior and exterior of enclosure.

END 26 43 13

INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 26 51 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES


A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Drivers. C. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI ANSLG – LED Driver Performance. B. IES LM-79 – LED lamp and luminaire performance C. IES LM-85 - LED Package Characteristics. D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. G. UFC 3-350-01 Change 3, 01 June 2016

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Division 01 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard

product of the manufacturer. Provide ballast information for each fixture. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Division 01 – Submittal: Submittals for information. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.


A. Division 01 – Project Record and Closeout Documents: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. C. Warranty for LEDs, drivers and emergency standby drivers shall be Ten (10) years from date of

substantial completion.




1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish products as scheduled. Contractors wishing to submit voluntary substitutions shall submit

complete cut sheet information showing fixture dimensions, options and photometrics. Alternate fixtures must be received at engineers’ office minimum two weeks prior to bidding. Engineer will send approved submittal to base for any additional review comments. Engineers’ and base maintenance shop’s evaluation shall be final. Fixtures submitted without prior approval or outside this time window will be returned to contractor without comment.

B. Luminaires shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Only brand name fixtures (Columbia/Hubbell, Eaton/Cooper, GE, Lithonia/Acuity, etc.) or equal (approved by AAFES Contracting officer) shall be used.

2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): a. Interior luminaires shall be nominal 3500K (per LM-79 Test).

3. Color Rendering Index (CRI):

a. Interior luminaires: >80, R9>0 (per LM-79 Test).

4. Luminaire efficacy: >100 Lumens per Watt (LPW). 5. Reported L90* > 60,000 hours. 6. Dual rated 120-277V 60 Hz. 7. Transient Protection: 100kHz ring wave, 2kV level. 8. Total current harmonic distortion: < 20%. 9. Power Factor (PF): > 0.9. 10. Class 2, replaceable, high efficiency LED driver rated for 60,000 hours. 11. Design Lights Consortium (DLC) qualified. 12. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) listed. 13. Electrical components shall be assessable from below the ceiling. 14. Modularly replaceable drivers.

*Lumen Maintenance at 25 deg C ambient temperature shall be based on calculations per The Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) standard, TM-21 and performed by an accredited National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) laboratory.

2.2 LED Drivers A. Manufacturers: 1. Manufacturers Standard complying with ANSI ANSLG requirements. B. Warranty: 1. Drivers shall be rated for a minimum operation of 60,000 hours

2.3 LED Standby Drivers A. Manufacturers: Bodine, ITOA or approved equal. B. Description: Emergency battery power supply suitable for installation in wiring compartment of

luminaire or for remote mounting.


C. Ratings: As shown on fixture schedule. D. Battery: Sealed pure lead or nickel cadmium, rated for 10 year life. Provide 3 year full warranty. E. Include TEST switch and AC ON indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the

outside of an assembled luminaire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support recessed luminaires independent of ceiling framing. For recessed luminaires,

provide two hanger wires fastened at opposite corners of luminaires and at structural joists. Supports wires shall be same type and gauge as ceiling support wires or 1/8” aircraft cables.

B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. C. Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. D. Install surface and pendant mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and

with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. G. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for

temperature conditions within luminaire. H. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and

operation.

3.3 CLEANING A. Division 01 – Cleaning: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prior to final acceptance, replace luminaires that have failed LEDs.


EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 - 1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 56 00 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Provide:

1. Electrical Contractor provide: a. Exterior luminaires. b. Poles and accessories. c. LED Assemblies. d. Drivers. e. Concrete support bases.

B. Alternate Bid: None.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified elsewhere:

1. Section 26 51 00, "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with L.E.D. arrays and L.E.D. drivers. 2. Poles and accessories. 3. Concrete bases.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

C. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

D. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.


C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. (143.6 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles is 100 mph (160 km/h) steady wind with a gust factor of 1.3.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, drivers, and accessories. a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified

independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Drivers, including energy-efficiency data. 7. L.E.D. arrays, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 8. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 9. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is

suitable for components involved. 10. Anchor bolts for poles. 11. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating

strength of screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design.

D. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.


D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until immediately before pole installation.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide products listed in light fixture schedule on plans.

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.


F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

K. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

L. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2.3 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated.


3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2.4 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6 with access handhole in pole wall.

B. Poles shall be nominal 5 inch square non-tapered cross section and 25 feet in length.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

2. Finish: Same as pole and luminaire.

F. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2.5 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

B. Vibration dampener consisting of heavy coated cable engineered for the purpose and capable of being inserted through pole handhole.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install L.E.D. arrays in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.


C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm). 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 60 inches (1520 mm). 3. Utility Company Aerial Transmission Lines: 30 feet (9 meters).

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole

through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to

grounding system.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

END 26 56 00

TESTING 26 60 00-1

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 60 00 - TESTING


A. Provide:

1. Testing of electrical components and systems: a. Insulation resistance test. b. Grounding electrode test. c. Continuity test. d. Voltage test. e. Phase relationship verification. f. Fire alarm acceptance test. g. Power transmission equipment test.

2. Test reports. 3. Correction of defective components or systems. 4. Retest of corrected components, systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit seven (7) copies of all test reports to Contracting Officer.

1. Type each test report on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch paper. Include: a. Project Number. b. Project title and location. c. Test performed. d. Date performed. e. Test equipment used. f. Contractor's name, address and telephone number. g. Testing firm's name, address and telephone number if other than Contractor. h. Name (s) and title (s) of person (s):

1. Performing test. 2. Observing test.

i. Statement verifying each test. j. Nameplate data from each motor and equipment item tested. k. Test results. l. Retest results after correction of defective components, systems.

2. For each copy, assemble all test reports and bind them in a folder. Label each folder,

"Electrical Test Reports". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Furnish all equipment, manpower and casual labor to perform specified testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. When temporary electrical service is used for testing, do not energize any equipment or portion of permanent system that exceeds capacity of temporary service.

B. Ensure that all electrical work is complete and ready for testing.

TESTING 26 60 00-2

C. Disconnect all devices or equipment that might be damaged by application of test voltages, voltage of

reversed phase sequence or other test procedures. 3.2 TESTING: Conduct tests and adjust equipment to verify compliance with specified performance. 3.3 INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTS

A. Resistance measured; line-to-ground.

B. Perform testing on the following items: Min. Acceptance

Item Tested Voltage of Test Resistance in Megohms 1. No. 2 and larger

cables (600V) 1000V 50 2. Motors 500V 5 3. Switchboard and Panelboard Buses 1000V 25

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE TEST: Measure and record ground resistance from system neutral connection at

service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Maximum acceptable resistance: 10 ohms. When resistance exceeds 10 ohms drive and bond another ground rod, one ground rod length away and repeat test.

3.5 CONTINUITY TESTS: Test branch circuits and control circuits to determine continuity of wiring and

connections. 3.6 VOLTAGE TESTS

A. Make and record voltage tests and recorded at the following listed points. Conduct tests under normal load conditions.

1. Service entrance at main panel. 2. Terminals of all motors.

3.7 PHASE RELATIONSHIP

A. Examine connections to equipment for proper phase relationships. Verify proper motor rotation. 3.8 FIRE ALARM ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Test fire alarm system in the presence of the Ft Drum Fire Chief's Representative. See 28 31 11.

3.9 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS

A. When tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship or equipment furnished under this Contract, correct defects and retest. Repeat tests until satisfactory results are obtained.

B. When any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, repair or replace such wiring or equipment. Test

repaired items to ensure satisfactory operation.

END 26 60 00

MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 27 51 17-1

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 51 17 - MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

PART 1. GENERAL



B. See section 28 31 11 Fire Alarm System for interface with fire alarm system.

C. The design of this Mass Notification system incorporates specific components beyond that required for a fire alarm system, but is directly interfaced through hardware with the fire alarm system.

D. Shall be in accordance with Military document UFC 4-021-01.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The United States Military has developed provisions for Mass Notification of personnel in the event of threats other than fire. Threats could vary from land attacks, sea attacks, chemical attacks, radiological attacks, and others.

B. The system components, supervision, and basic installation practices shall comply with criteria outlined in NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FMCP: Combination fire alarm / mass notification control panel.

B. LOC: Local Operator Console

C. UFC: Unified Facilities Criteria.

D. LED: Light-emitting diode.

E. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

F. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

G. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, architect, or owner’s insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be Base fire chief.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Military Documents:

1. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering For Facilities 2. UFC 3-600-02 Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems 3. UFC 4-021-01 Mass Notification Systems For Facilities

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code


C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864, Ninth Edition, Control Panels. 2. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 3. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

D. State and Local Building Codes as adopted and/or amended by The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

E. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.


A. Mass notification has the capability to provide real-time information to all building occupants or personnel in the immediate vicinity of a building during emergency situations. To reduce the risk of mass casualties, there must be a timely means to notify building occupants of threats and what should be done in response to those threats. Pre-recorded and live voice emergency messages are required to provide this capability.

B. Failure of either the mass notification functions or fire alarm functions in the FMCP shall still provide for a minimum means of occupant notification by the remaining system.

C. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products by manufacturers, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection and/or UL listed communication devices for over five years.

D. The system as specified is subject to review, full testing, and approval by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and shall be turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

E. The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of crafts.


A. Comply with all referenced documents.

B. Mass Notification initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations 2. Switches or pushbuttons located with the main panel and local operator console.

C. Mass Notification activation shall initiate the following actions:

1. Display action initiated on the FMCP. 2. Initiate the appropriate alert tone and pre-recorded message for the respective alert switch

activated. 3. Activate the mass notification strobes throughout the building. 4. Mass notification functions shall have alert priority over fire alarm functions. Thus, if fire alarm is

also in alarm state, the fire alarm audible alarms shall stop during the mass notification messages. All prerecorded messages shall automatically shut-off after 10 minutes. At end of 10 minutes, the mass notification devices shall shut off and fire alarm notification devices shall reactivate.

5. Mass notification signals shall not be displayed as alarm conditions. Text descriptions shall clearly indicate appropriate condition.

6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the FMCP and remote annunciator.


2. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signals. 3. Provide a means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated,

located in a locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.

4. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event. 5. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Display at the local fire alarm / mass notification control panel the origin of the trouble condition report.

2. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the control panels and as indicated on the drawings. 3. Silence audible signals via a trouble acknowledge switch. 4. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally delayed

for a period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

5. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate audible and visual signals at the main panels and remote annunciators.

G. Power and Voltage Limitations:

1. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst-case condition plus 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 4A supply x .25 spare = 1A reserve.)

2. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst-case condition. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, voltage drop calculations shall be performed using the Lump-Sum approach. Calculations must include and clearly indicate wire length out and back to panel. Calculations shall be provided for horn, strobe, and speaker circuits.

3. Device current values for voltage calculations shall be based on the lowest nameplate voltage. (i.e. current values at a voltage of 20 volts shall be used when available rather than current values for 24 volts.)

4. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) design shall incorporate a 25% spare capacity for future expansion.

5. In no case shall indicating/evacuation circuits be designed or measured to have an end-of-line voltage below 20 volts or the manufactures nameplate voltage, whichever is higher.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with submittal requirements in Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System.



B. Qualifications: See Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System, for qualification requirements.


A. See Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System, for criteria.


1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. See Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System, for criteria.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Fire Alarm / Mass notification control panel: a. Fire-Lite Alarm (Honeywell) ECC-100(E) Emergency Command Center

2. Wireless Transceiver / Basewide Communications b. Monaco Enterprises Inc.

2. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

3. Audible and Visual Signals: a. Strobes, Horns, Speakers and Speaker Strobes as specified in Section 2.4.

2.2 MASS NOTIFICATION COMPONENTS

A. Multi-Function Mass Notification Control Panel (FMCP) 1. The system shall be a Single channel voice evacuation system incorporating user selectability of

8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a digital voice module for prerecorded messaging. The system shall incorporate microphone override. The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station with redundant controls of the evacuation system control panel. Actuation of alarm notification appliances including emergency voice communications shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

2. A hand held microphone shall be provided in the FMCP and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or remote microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe circuits activation.

3. The system shall be capable of interconnection with Giant Voice, an installation-wide notification system that includes wireless operation from a central communication center.

4. Appropriate consoles, batteries, modules, kits, and mounting accessories. 5. 100 Watt integral audio amplifier 6. Mass Notification Strobe Power Supply - 8 Amp capable of monitoring / controlling four 3-

amp class A strobe circuits. 7. Push to talk microphone 8. Minimum 8 message initiation pushbuttons 9. Integral HVAC shutdown pushbutton. 10. Battery and charger with capacity to operate system for 72 hours supervision and 15 minutes

alarm. 11. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the mass notification panel. 12. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for

supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

13. Alarm Silencing / Bypass, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the mass notification panel and remote annunciators, after initiating devices are restored to normal.

14. Provide a notification device bypass switch in the FMCP to allow system maintenance and testing while facility is occupied. When switch is in “bypass” position, a supervisory signal shall be displayed on the FMCP and remote annunciator, and at the remote alarm monitoring / receiving station. Bypass switch shall prevent operation of notification appliances.


15. Provide a notification device silencing switch in the FMCP. Silencing switch Bypass switch shall halt alarm operation of notification appliances and activate an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

B. Alarm Indicating Devices: See paragraph 2.4.

C. Circuits:

2. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 6. 3. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A for speaker circuits and strobe circuits.

D. Local Operator’s Control (LOC):

1. System shall be capable of adding up to three (3) remote microphones. 2. The LOC station shall be compatible with the FMCP. 3. The unit shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system

status indicators of/for the system. 4. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. 5. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. 6. The unit shall be made of steel and be flush mounted to a steel backbox with a hinged, non-

lockable door. 7. Unit shall have integral HVAC shutdown pushbutton which shall interface the fire alarm system by

means of an addressable module..

E. Function of Amplifier:

1. Automatic transmission of different pre-recorded announcements to the facility, or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall be UL 1711 listed.

2. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones. 3. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. Provide separate tone/message sequence

for fire alarm and mass notification alarms. 4. Digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." All messages to be reviewed and

approved by AHJ. 5. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of the type recommended by NFPA 72

and that are compatible with tone patterns of the notification-appliance circuits of the FACP. 6. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones. 7. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

8. The alarm current draw of the mass notification system shall not exceed 80 percent of each respective power-supply module ratings.

9. Power supply shall have a dedicated circuit breaker with handle lock for this connection. Provide a red label at circuit breakers and identify it with "FIRE ALARM/MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM."

F. Primary Power: 24V dc obtained from 120V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24V dc source.

G. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium. 2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72. 3. Provide minimum 72 hours standby and 15 minutes alarm back-up power. Plus 25% spare

capacity.


H. Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the control panel, each power supply, and all accessories. Comply with Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors.

2. Install surge protectors recommended by control panel manufacturer. Install on all system wiring external to the building housing the control panel. This shall include power, telephone, and radio transmitter wiring.

I. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.3 MASS NOTIFICATION MESSAGE CONTENT

A. The following messages will be used for the mass notification system. Listed messages are based on example message contained in UFC 4-021-01. Custom messages shall be provided to match current base standards. Contractor shall request base messages from base fire department two weeks prior to programming. Messages shall be recorded with a male voice.

B. Messages are listed in order of priority with number 1 having highest priority. Example: Message 1 will override message 2, which will override message 3, and so on. Live messages from panel microphones are other appropriate input devices such as a Monaco BTXM will override all pre-recorded messages.

Message1: Bomb Threat. “Attention. A bomb threat alert has been issued for this building. All personnel are to evacuate immediately using the nearest exit. Further instructions will be issued outside the building by emergency response teams.” Message 2: Intruder Alert. “Attention. A force protection antiterrorism threat has been issued for this area. Effective immediately, we are operating, “secure and lockdown procedures.” All personnel should remain calm and stay where you are. Please wait for further instructions.” Message 3: Shelter In Place. “Attention. All personnel shelter in place.” Message 4: Alternate Evacuation. “Attention. Evacuate building using exists other than the main entrance and exits. All personnel are to evacuate immediately using the nearest alternate exit. Further instructions will issued outside the building by emergency response teams.” Message 5: Weather. “Attention. The National Weather Service has issued a severe weather warning for our area.” Message 6: Fire Evacuation. “Attention. A fire emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building by the nearest exit.” Message 7: All Clear.


“Attention. The building emergency has ended. An all clear has been given. Please resume normal activities.” Message 8: Text. “Attention. This is a test of the emergency notification system, repeat, this is only a test.”

2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Speakers: supervised, 8” diameter, ceiling mount, U.L. listed for use in life safety systems.

Provide white grille and surface backbox in exposed areas, white grille and flush backbox in exposed areas. Rated .1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 watts at 70-volts, unless otherwise noted on the plans. Mounting: Flush mount in areas with suspended accoustical tile or gypsumboard ceilings. Surface mount in areas with exposed structure. Provide minimum 60 degree symmetrical dispersion. Provide with matching transformers tapped to match to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. Provide steel back box suitable for surface or recess mounting as required. Provide perforated aluminum grille factory painted white.

2. Visible Alarm Devices: Combination fire/mass notification Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1638 and 1971. Mass notification strobe shall be amber translucent lens. There shall be no wording on this strobe. Fire alarm strobe shall be clear polycarbonate with “FIRE” engraved in 1” high letters on lens. Provide a white aluminum trim.

3. Provide manufacturer’s standard combination speaker / strobe where indicated on plans.

2.5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Trouble and supervisory conditions with the mass notification circuits shall be indicated on the FMCP and remote annunciators.

2.5 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

A. Mass notification panel shall be capable of integration with a site-wide wireless communication system UL listed for emergency notification.

B. Provide a Monaco transceiver compatible with basewide mass notification communication system. Provide relay and voice card to allow transceiver to broadcast installation-wide radio frequency alert messages transmitted by the Giant Voice system. This transceiver shall be the same as the transceiver described in Section 28 31 11 – Fire Alarm.

C. FMCP shall be capable of silencing all AF/AI paging and music system equipment. Contractor shall field coordinate locations of AF/AI equipment with Contracting Officer. Connections shall be made such that in event of fire alarm or mass notification alarm, the AFFES equipment will be silenced until mass notification or fire alarm is cleared. Contractor to coordinate with AAFES Equipment Installer and provide all relay and connections to AAFES equipment as required to accomplish.

2.6 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for mass notification systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760 and shall be in accordance with requirement of Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Notification equipment shall be installed and mounted in accordance with design documents and specific mounting details.


B. Control panels shall be mounted in a neat, orderly, and space-limiting manner. Details in drawings shall be used as a guide and represent allotted space.

C. No portion of a mass notification system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been reviewed, approved, and stamped by the appropriate reviewing agency and/or AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.

3.2 BACK BOXES

A. All speakers are to be installed in at least a 4-inch square deep box with extension ring to limit potential damage to wiring.

B. 5" Square Boxes 2-7/8" x 5" (67 cubic inch) deep metal box with a 5" extension ring shall be allowed. If used, careful consideration in the centering of finished devices is required due to larger box size when mounted to studs.

C. Manual push/pull stations shall be located on walls such that tamper resistant covers can be installed as may be indicated, or in the future. Therefore, a 3-inch clearance from other switches, window openings, door frames, etc. shall be provided on each side of a manual pull station and 4 inches clear area above and below the manual pull station.

D. Provide special backbox for surface mounting of dual system indicating devices. Wheelock #SBL2-W or equal.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring shall be installed in accordance with Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System,

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."

B. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

C. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FMCP.

D. Paint power supply circuit breaker(s) red and label “FIRE ALARM”.

E. All initiating devices shall have permanent making indicated address in FMCP.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground the MNCP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.


A. Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing shall be conducted prior to scheduling commission testing and shall comply with criteria in Section 28 31 11.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. System testing shall be conducted per criteria in Section 28 31 11.


B. Testing shall include the initial activation of the fire alarm system and then a subsequent and sequential activation of the mass notification system. This sequence shall be reversed. System function shall comply with criteria of this Section.

C. System testing shall verify that the criteria outlined in this specification are complied with.

D. Contractor shall conduct speaker intelligibility walk thru with fire department representative. Speakers shall be activated and taps adjusted as needed on a room by room basis to ensure message intelligibility.

3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. Final documentation shall be submitted following the criteria in Section 13851, Fire Alarm System.

3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. Very detailed system training shall be provided to the owner following the criteria in Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A. Mass notification system adjusting, inspection, and testing shall comply with the criteria in Section 28 31 11, Fire Alarm System.

3.11 WARRANTY AND SERVICES

A. The contractor shall warranty the entire system for electrical and mechanical failures for a period of one year. The warranty shall begin with the completion of the commissioning testing or when beneficial use to the owner is determined and so documented.

B. The FMCP and system components shall have a 3-year manufacturer warranty.

END 27 51 17

INTRUSION DETECTION 28 16 00 -1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 16 00 - INTRUSION DETECTION

PART 1. GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Intrusion detection with multiplexed, modular, microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. PIR: Passive infrared.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

F. Protected or Protection Zone: A space or area for which an intrusion must be detected and uniquely identified, the sensor or group of sensors assigned to perform the detection, and any interface equipment between sensors and communication link to central-station control unit.

G. Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 100 lb or less and whose height is 60 inches or less; dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks, and shoes.

H. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a “standard intruder” in a protected zone.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data in accordance with Division 01 – Quality Control: Components for sensing, detecting, and control, including dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building.

2. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 3. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all

devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.

4. Details of surge-protection devices and their installation. 5. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges.

B. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and automatically


initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, testing agency.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For intrusion detection system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following:

1. Data for each type of product, including features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. Central-station control-unit hardware and software data.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

G. Other Information Submittals:

1. Test Plan and Schedule: Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications within 60 days of date of Contract award.

2. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions. 3. Anchor inspection reports documenting inspections of built-in and cast-in anchors.



1. An employer of workers, at least one of whom is a technician certified by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association.

2. Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Intrusion Detection Systems Integrator Qualifications: An experienced intrusion detection equipment supplier and Installer who has completed systems integration work for installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

1. Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Person currently certified as an advanced alarm technician by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70-05, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. FMG Compliance: FMG-approved and -labeled intrusion detection devices and equipment.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:


1. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet. 2. Central-Station Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F and

a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 3. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed

in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

4. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 0 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of beneficial occupancy.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM

A. Supervision: System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device or circuit in which deviation has occurred and whether deviation is an alarm or malfunction.

1. Alarm Signal: Display at central-station control. 2. Trouble Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating that system is not fully functional.

Trouble signal shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or shorted transmission line conductors, or controller failure.

3. Supervisory Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating an abnormal condition as specified for the particular device or controller.

B. System Control: Central-station control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices and connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a network.

C. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after any system disturbance.

D. Operator Commands:

1. Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command.

2. Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator. 3. Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion-alarm circuits of a specific protected zone.

Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator. 4. Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion-alarm circuits of a protected zone. 5. Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone. 6. System Test: Initiate system-wide operational test. 7. Print Reports.

E. Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When central-station control unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events.


F. Response Time: Thirty seconds maximum between actuation of any alarm and its indication at central-station control unit.

G. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors from central-station control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an LED. Maximum permissible elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and indication at central-station control unit is 30 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line.

H. Manual Secure-Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of associated protected zone between secure and access conditions.

I. Alarm Transmission to Remote Monitoring Station: Transmit all alarm and supervisory indications to a designated remote monitoring station via telephone lines, dedicated alarm network. Transmissions must be compatible with monitoring station equipment. Coordinate with local authority having jurisdiction.

2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section “Transient Voltage Suppression.”

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section “Transient Voltage Suppression” as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-V RMS injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz.

C. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, controllers, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Central-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations.

D. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicated unique device identification and status reports to central-station control unit.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.

B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12.

C. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are accessible to unauthorized persons, secure with security fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure.

2.4 SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. ICIDS. IV


B. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system-status changes and for displaying system-status and command-related data. LCD type, backlit, with four line, 20 character display. Semi-flush mount. Provide backbox.

2.5 BALANCED MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. ADEMCO Group; Pittway Corporation. 2. Aleph International Corporation. 3. Amseco; Division of Kobishi America, Inc. 4. FBII; Pittway Corporation. 5. GE Interlogix; General Electric Company. 6. George Risk Industries. 7. Honeywell International Inc. 8. Optex. 9. Ultrak, Inc.; a Division of Ademco Video Systems.

B. Description: Wide gap, surface mounting balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum of two encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields.

2.6 PIR SENSORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. ADEMCO Group; Pittway Corporation. 2. Aleph International Corporation. 3. Crow Electronic Engineering, Inc. 4. Digital Security Controls, Ltd. 5. FBII; Pittway Corporation. 6. Honeywell International Inc. 7. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 8. Optex. 9. Richardson Electronics, Ltd. 10. Visonic Inc.

B. Description: Sensors detect intrusion by monitoring infrared wavelengths emitted from a human body within their protected zone and by being insensitive to general thermal variations.

1. Ceiling-Mounting Unit Spot-Detection Pattern: Full 360-degree conical. 2. Ceiling-Mounting Unit Pattern Size: 84-inch diameter at floor level for units mounted 96 inches

above floor; 18-foot diameter at floor level for units mounted 25 feet above floor.

C. Device Performance:

1. Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg F or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor’s detection patterns at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps across 2 adjacent segments of detector’s field of view.

2. Test Indicator: LED test indicator that is not visible during normal operation. When visible, indicator shall light when sensor detects an intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover.

2.7 DURESS-ALARM SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. ADEMCO Group; Pittway Corporation.


2. GE Interlogix; General Electric Company. 3. NAPCO Security Systems, Inc. 4. Visonic Inc.

B. Description: A switch with a shroud over the activating lever that allows an individual to covertly send a duress signal to central-station control unit, with no visible or audible indication when activated. Switch shall lock in activated position until reset with a key.

1. Minimum Switch Rating: 50,000 operations. 2. Push Button: Finger activated, suitable for mounting on horizontal or vertical surface.

2.8 SECURITY SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL (SSCP)

A. Manufacturer: ICIDS. IV

B. General Capabilities:

1. SSCP design shall be the primary communication processor and control unit and shall be installed in a protected facility. SSCP shall interface with all optional modules and devices and provide communication with the integrated monitoring system – transmitting and displaying all security messages from the equipped facility.

2. Standard UL enclosure (20 gauge steel). 3. Enclosure of SSCP shall be securable with lock and key.

C. Power Requirements:

1. Electrical input shall be provided by a dedicated 120VAC, 60 Hz, using 16.5VAC, 50VA, Class 2 plug-in transformer with the option of adding surge protection.

2. SSCP shall be equipped with a secondary power supply consisting of two 12VDC, sealed lead-acid rechargeable batteries capable of providing power for 8 hours. Internal battery charger and integral battery supervision for AC power loss and low battery and battery trouble shall be provided.

3. Plug-in transformer shall provide auxiliary power of 1.6 amps continuous at 12VDC.

D. Alarm Loops:

1. Programmable, supervised, hard wired alarm loops, expandable to a total of 144 points with expansion modules and another 63 points with wireless module, shall be included in the SSCP design. See security plan for number of points required.

2. Alarm loops shall be N/C, N/O, or both (dry contacts) and shall operate under normal ground fault conditions.

3. SSCP design shall provide programmable alarm codes assignable to minimum of 8 separate partitions.

E. Transmission Media:

1. Dedicated or dial transmission of signal shall be incorporated into the SSCP design. 2. Dedicated transmission shall be UL Grade AA and upgradeable to DES Class A. Supervision for

compromise, failure and trouble conditions shall be mandatory. 3. Dial Transmission capabilities shall include: pulse or DTMF dialing; integrated cut line

supervision; RJ31X jack connection; and, include expansion for a secondary dial line and/or cellular communication capabilities.

4. The addition of optional surge protection for dedicated or dial transmission lines shall be available.

F. Arm/Disarm Function (Secure/Access)

1. SSCP shall be capable of integrating with 16 keypads (up to 3 per partition) with an 8 partition capacity.


2. Design of SSCP shall include programmable switch arming via momentary contact closure. 3. Programmable arm/disarm functions shall include: single key; non-reporting; reporting; and, arm

at shift.

G. Communications:

1. Central station shall provide a 300 Baud asynchronous, full duplex secure protocal communication device capable of transmitting at 1070/1270 Hz and receiving at 2025/2225 Hz.

2. SSCP shall provide an RS-485 port and have a communication link of 2,000 feet maximum using 22AWG, shield twisted pair cable.

3. A maximum of forty RS-485 devices shall be supported by the SSCP. The 40 device total shall include: 16 total keypads; 8 expansion modules; 8 Smart/Audio or Listen In modules (in any combination); one wireless module; and 7 access modules.

H. General Information:

1. SSCP shall be UL listed for the specific application. 2. SSCP shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15, Class B.

I. Expansion Module:

1. Expansion module shall mount locally inside the SSCP enclosure and provide the option of remote mounting within an enclosure up to 2,000 feet from SSCP.

2. Expansion module shall provide 16 programmable, supervised, hard wired alarm loops. 3. Alarm loops shall be programmable alarm into any of 8 separate arming zones (protected areas). 4. Alarm loops shall be N/C, N/O, or both (dry contacts) and shall operate normally under ground

fault conditions. 5. Four 100mA programmable hardwired auxiliary outputs shall be incorporated into the Expansion

Module design. 6. Module shall operate in an environment of 0 to 122 degrees Farenheit. 7. Expansion module power shall be provided by the SSCP 12 VDC transformer and shall operate

at 130mA maximum in normal standby and alarm modes. 8. Expansion module shall be compatible with the SSCP RS-485. 9. Expansion module shall be UL listed for the specific application.

2.9 SECURITY FASTENERS

A. Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Camcar Textron Inc. 2. Holo-Krome; a Danaher Corporation. 3. Safety Socket Screw Corporation. 4. Tamper-Pruf Screws, Inc.

C. Drive System Types: Pinned Torx-Plus, Pinned Torx, or pinned hex (Allen).

D. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners:

1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879, Group 1 CW.

E. Socket Button Head Fasteners:

1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM F 835. 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 879), Group 1 CW.


F. Socket Head Cap Fasteners:

1. Heat-treated alloy steel, ASTM A 574. 2. Stainless steel, ASTM F 837, Group 1 CW.

G. Protective Coatings for Heat-Treated Alloy Steel:

1. Zinc chromate, ASTM F 1135, Grade 3 or 4; for exterior applications and interior applications where indicated.

2. Zinc phosphate with oil, ASTM F 1137, Grade I, or black oxide, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of intrusion detection.

1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of intrusion detection connections before intrusion detection installation.

2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of intrusion detection.

B. Inspect built-in and cast-in anchor installations, before installing intrusion detection, to verify that anchor installations comply with requirements. Prepare inspection reports.

1. Remove and replace anchors where inspections indicate that they do not comply with requirements. Reinspect after repairs or replacements are made.

2. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional anchor installations. Prepare inspection reports.

C. For material whose orientation is critical for its performance as a ballistic barrier, verify installation orientation.


3.2 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with UL 681.

B. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to unauthorized persons, install intrusion detection components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project. Provide stainless-steel security fasteners in stainless-steel materials.


A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 26 Conduit and boxes. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be ¾ inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring Method: Cable in metal raceways, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated


with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system’s wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Wires and Cables:

1. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26. 3. Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Size and type cable as recommended by

manufacturer.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

F. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at controllers, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices they serve.

G. Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for central-station control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide 5-ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 26.


A. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.

1. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing and include in O & M data. Testing shall be done in presence of Base Security and AAFES Store Manager. Schedule testing with all parties minimum 14 days in advance.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare reports:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed. Test all modes of system operation and intrusion detection at each detection device. Test for detection of intrusion and for false alarms in each protected zone. Test for false alarms by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns.

3. Electrical Tests: Comply with NFPA 72, Section A-7. Minimum required tests are as follows:


a. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. b. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device. c. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit resistance

with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Record Drawings. d. Verify that each controller is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer’s operation

and maintenance manual. e. Verify that transient surge-protection devices are installed according to manufacturer’s

written instructions. f. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at

central-station control unit. g. Test both primary and secondary power.

D. Report of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and detailed test results in the form of a test log.

E. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily completed.

END 28 16 00

FIRE ALARM 28 31 11-1

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 31 11 - FIRE ALARM

PART 1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Fire protection systems are life-safety systems and will therefore be designed, installed, tested, and expected to perform as such.

B. This Section includes fire alarm systems.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1.

2. Section 27 51 17 - Mass Notification System

3.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. FMCP: Combination fire alarm / mass notification control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

E. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction is an individual responsible for review, inspection, and/or approval of a system and shall include the building official, fire marshal, engineer, Contracting Officer, or Owners insurance representative. For this project, the AHJ shall be Ft Drum fire chief or authorized representative.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. All references shall be of the latest edition.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 13 Standard For The Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 4. NFPA 90A Standard For The Installation of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems 5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Appropriate UL equipment standards:

1. UL 864 Control Panels. 2. UL 268 Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors (HVAC). 4. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 5. UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling. 6. UL 1971, Standard for Visual Signaling Appliances.

D. Building Codes:

1. International Building Code 2. International Fire Code


E. ADA, and/or State and local equivalency standards as adopted by The Authority Having Jurisdiction.

F. Military Unified Facilities Criteria:

1. UFC 3-600-01 2. UFC 3-601-02 3. UFC 4-021-01


A. Noncoded, analog-addressable system; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission.

B. All equipment furnished shall be new and the latest state of the art products of a single manufacturer, engaged in the manufacturing and sale of analog fire detection devices for over ten years.

C. The system as specified shall be reviewed, fully tested and approved by each of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and turned over to the owner in an operational condition.

D. In the interest of job coordination and responsibilities the installing contractor shall contract with a single supplier for fire alarm equipment, engineering, programming, inspection and testing.

E. The contractor shall provide a representative as requested for project meetings such as to assist in coordination of trades.


A. Comply with NFPA 72.

B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations. 2. Smoke or heat detectors. 3. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 4. Fire extinguishing system operation. 5. Heat detectors at gasoline canopy.

C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Sound evacuation signals or voice messages and display a custom screen/message defining the building/zone/room in alarm and the specific alarm point initiating the alarm.

2. Log to the system history archives all activity pertaining to the alarm condition. 3. Activate visual strobe signals throughout the facility. 4. Visual signals shall be programmable to flash until system reset or additional alarm silencing, as

required. 5. A signal dedicated to sprinkler system water flow alarm shall not be silenced while the sprinkler

system is flowing at a rate of flow equal to a single head.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Signal from the FMCP 2. Display the origin of the supervisory condition report at the local fire alarm control panel. 3. Activate supervisory audible and dedicated visual signal. 4. A means for silencing a supervisory signal shall be permitted only if it is key-operated, located in a

locked enclosure, or arranged to provide equivalent protection against unauthorized use. Such a means shall be permitted only if it transfers the supervisory indication to a lamp or other visible indicator and subsequent supervisory signals in other zones cause the supervisory notification appliance(s) to re-sound.

5. Record within system history the initiating device and time of occurrence of the event. 6. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station.


7. Emergency stop of HVAC equipment. 8. Emergency stop of gasoline equipment. 9. Emergency stop of certain food preparation equipment.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Signal from the Mass Notification Panel. 2. Display at the FMCP the origin of the trouble condition report. 3. Activate trouble audible and visual signals at the FMCP and remote annunciator.. 4. Silence audible signals from the FMCPvia a trouble acknowledge switch. 5. Trouble reports for primary system power failure to the master control shall be optionally delayed for a

period of time not greater than 200 seconds. Trouble conditions that have been restored to normal shall be automatically removed from the trouble display queue and not require operator intervention. This feature shall be software selectable and shall not preclude the logging of trouble events to the historical file.

6. Record within system history, the occurrence of the event, the time of occurrence and the device initiating the event.

7. Transmit the signal to the monitoring station. 8. Emergency stop of HVAC equipment. 9. Emergency stop of gasoline equipment.

10. Emergency stop of certain food preparation equipment.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble alarm and annunciate at the FMCP and remote annunciators.

G. Power and Voltage Limitations:

1. Battery capacity calculations. Battery size shall be a minimum of 125% of the calculated requirement.

2. Power supplies shall be sized to furnish the total connected load in a worst-case condition plus 25% spare capacity. (i.e. 4A supply x .25 spare = 1A reserve.)

3. Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs demonstrating worst-case condition. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer, voltage drop calculations shall be performed using the Lump-Sum approach using device nominal rating voltage. Calculations must include and clearly indicate wire length out and back to panel. Calculations shall be provided for strobe and speaker circuits.

4. Device current values for voltage calculations shall be based on the lowest nameplate voltage. (i.e. current values at a voltage of 16 volts shall be used when available rather than current values for 24 volts.)

5. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) design shall incorporate a 25% spare capacity for future expansion.

6. In no case shall indicating/evacuation circuits be designed or measured to have an end-of-line voltage below 16 volts or the manufacturers nameplate voltage, whichever is higher.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: All submittals shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. The contractor shall include the following information in submittals.

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared and signed by persons with the following qualifications: a. Registered Fire Protection Engineer. b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level IV. Trained and certified by manufacturer in

fire alarm system design.

2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

3. Device Address List: Coordinate final system programming with owner and base fire department.


4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and sizes. 5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for

system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color code. 6. Batteries: Size calculations. 7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturers written recommendations.

8. Elevation Details: Details shall be provided showing mounting of wall and ceiling devices. Where exposed or pocketed ceilings are involved, specific dimensioned details of detector and notification devices shall be provided.

9. Device Mounting Details: Details of device back-box requirements shall be provided. 10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show

size and route of cable and conduits. CADD files for floor plans may be obtained through General Contractor from the Architect/Engineer. Allow for minimum two week return.

C. Cut Sheets, Calculations, and other Design Documents: Each set of shop drawings shall be

accompanied with supportive submittal documentation. This documentation shall be quality bound and shall be organized and numerically tabbed into the following sections.

1. FMCP, Power Supplies and Annunciators 2. Detection Devices 3. Audio/Visual Devices 4. System Components, Modules and Relays 5. Battery Calculations and cut sheets (summary of results shall also be on plans) 6. Voltage Calculations (summary of results shall also be on plans) 7. Compatibility Listings (matrix, table, or info showing device compatibility) 8. Operating Instructions for entire System (This will include a copy of what will be posted adjacent

to FACP) 9. Manufacturers Inspection instructions and other maintenance criteria from NFPA 72 and UFC 3-

600-02 10. Designer and installer certificates (documents prepared by a PE do not require certificate, but are

required to be sealed.)

D. Qualification Data: Copies of certificates for installers and documenting approved manufacture representation shall be provided.

E. Field quality-control test reports. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. Tester shall provide spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A, recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at the FMCP.

G. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Contracting Officer for review.

H. Documentation:

1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to NFPA 72 to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.


2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to NFPA 72 to Owner. Format of the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix. (a) Typed hard copies on paper to Owner.

I. A copy of these fire alarm specifications shall be included with all submittal packages including those to the engineer, owner, and local AHJ’s.

J. Incomplete submittals shall be returned without review, unless previously approved by the Contracting Officer.



B. Qualifications:

1. The contractor shall submit copies of all required Licenses and Bonds as required in the State having jurisdiction to the Contracting Officer upon award of contract, and engineer upon request.

2. The contractor shall employ on staff a minimum of one NICET level IV Fire Alarm Technician, a registered Fire Protection Engineer, a professional engineer registered in the State of the installation, or a Certified Safety Professional with proven experience in fire alarm systems. This individual shall make regular site visits as necessary to oversee the system installation. This individual will be held accountable for system oversight, code compliance, and quality of installation. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Qualified individual shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

3. At least one NICET Level II Fire Alarm Technician shall be present and have oversight anytime fire alarm equipment and/or wiring is being installed. This requirement shall apply to the fire alarm contractor and any other contractor installing portions of the system such as wiring and/or devices by an electrical contractor. Technician shall immediately provide evidence of qualification upon request.

4. Fire alarm shop drawings shall be prepared and signed by a Registered Fire Protection Engineer with proven and documented experience/training in fire alarm system design and codes. Plans not prepared by the Registered Fire Protection Engineer or under the direct supervision (same employment) of the Registered Fire Protection Engineer shall not be approved. Design documents shall bear a seal of the engineer.

5. The Contracting Officer may accept a testing or qualification body other than NICET, if submitted and approved prior to bidding the project,. Evidence of qualification and means for verification shall be provided in writing to the Contracting Officer with sufficient time for evaluating such request prior to awarding of contract. However, such qualifications shall be specifically focused towards fire alarm system design, installation, and codes. Qualifications for other low voltage systems such as security, access control, telephone, etc. shall not be approved.

6. The State approved or licensed fire alarm contractor whose name appears on the system and who is responsible for system warranty and service shall have sole authority to establish installation responsibilities. Thus, if any portion is to be wired or installed by a separate contractor (such as an electrical contractor), then the fire alarm contractor will by contract select and warrant such contractor. An electrical or other contractor not licensed by the state and/or not meeting qualification requirements of this specification shall not dictate installation conditions for this system.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Fire Alarm / Mass notification control panel (FMCP): a. Fire-Lite Alarm (Honeywell) ECC-100(E) Emergency Command Center

2. Wireless Transceiver / Basewide Communications b. Monaco Enterprises Inc.

2. Wire and Cable: a. Comtran Corporation. b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company. c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company. d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.

3. Audible and Visual Notification Devices: a. Fire-Lite / Honeywell b. Gentex Corporation. b. Wheelock, Inc.

2.2 FIRE ALARM / MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL.(FMCP)

A. General Description of fire alarm functions of the FMCP:

1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at the FMCP.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment. 4. Interface with the Mass Notification Control Panel. (Refer to Division 27 Section “Mass

Notification System”.)

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, three line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands; and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 6. 2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z. 3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, emergency voice communications, annunciation,

elevator recall, and actuation of suppression systems shall occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FMCP for mechanical equipment shutdown is not required, provided a break in the circuit will cause food preparation equipment shutdown, and other peripheral functions equipment to shut down.

D. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FMCP. 2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FMCP and the detector. 3. Record events by the system memory. 4. Sound general alarm. 5. Cancel FMCP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E. Audible Notification: Evacuation speakers shall be capable of sounding temporal pattern 3, complying with ANSI S3.41.


F. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

G. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: See 27 51 17.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and make a print-out of the final adjusted values on the system printer.

I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: See 27 51 17.

J. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in terminal unit.

1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted password algorithm.

K. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory signal, and supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

2. Power supply shall have a dedicated branch circuit. Provide handle lock at branch circuit breakers. Apply red paint to branch circuit breakers per NPFA 72.

L. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

M. Battery and Charger Capacity: See 27 51 17.

N. Surge Protection: See 27 51 17.

O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.2 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES

A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FMCP.

2. Station Reset: Key-operated switch. Device shall be keyed same as fire alarm control panel and other fire alarm equipment cabinets. Use of break glass rods not acceptable.

3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear polycarbonate plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate fire alarm. STI or equal.

2.3 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description:


1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to the FMCP. 3. Multipurpose type, containing the following:

a. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FMCP.

4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FMCP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FMCP.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according

to UL 268A.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested

according to UL 268A.

2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to the FMCP. 4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied detector. The

enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type 4X.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at the FMCP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FMCP.

8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the specific duct

size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 10. Relay for Equipment Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan control or power circuit. 11. Combination remote status LED and magnetic test switch mounted flush in ceiling directly below

device. In exposed ceiling areas, remote mount status LED adjacent to nearest exterior exit next to manual pull station. Label devices to match HVAC schedule.

2.5

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. See 27 51 17.

B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 10


feet from the bell. 10-inch size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells shall be weatherproof. Color: Red. Label bells “SPRINKLER WATER FLOW”.

2.7 REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and magnetic test stations when detector is above accessible ceiling, with LED indicating lights. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the duct smoke detector, smoke detector, or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch.

2.8 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FMCP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FMCP, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FMCP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FMCP.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Monitor module listed for use in providing a system address for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Control module shall have double throw form C contacts with minimum rating of 125VAC, 1 ampere inductive. Module shall receive control signal from signaling line circuit (SLC) and shall require no other external power for operation.

1. Control module shall be capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall.

2.10 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A. Description: Welded wire mesh or polycarbonate of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, strobe, or other device requiring protection. Any device located in Receiving/Staging area shall be protected as such.

B. Manual pull stations in areas accessible to the public shall have polycarbonate tamper proof cover equivalent to Edward Systems Stopper II without sounder.

2.11 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Signaling Line Circuits: Plenum rated twisted, shielded pair, No. 14 AWG.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Plenum rated solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.


2.12 ALARM MONITORING

A. The contractor shall connect the system to base-wide Fire Reporting System.

B. Provide a Monaco Radio-frequency transceiver and antenna to match the base-wide fire reporting system. This transceiver shall be the same as the transceiver described in Section 28 31 11 – Fire Alarm.

B. Provide input/output interface in FMCP to allow specific alarm and trouble signals to be transmitted. Provide a wall mounted antenna, mast, lightning arrestor, and all required accessories. Trim antenna to base operating frequency. Coordinate frequency selection with base fire department prior to trimming.

C. This equipment shall be capable of transmitting to the monitoring equipment the device address that is in alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions.

D. Water-flow signals, gasoline fire suppression signals, and exhaust hood fire suppression signals shall be specifically transmitted locally and received by the remote monitoring station.

2.13 REMOTE POWER SUPPLIES

A. Provide remote power supply for for fire alarm strobes. Power supply shall have NEMA 1 enclosure and shall provide four 24VDC, 3A Class A circuits. Power supplies shall have sealed batteries and a two rate charger. Battery capacity shall be 15 minutes of alarm and 72 hours of supervision plus minimum 25% spare capacity. See 27 51 17.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that new fire alarm system is operational before making changes or connections to existing fire alarm system.

B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 2. Spacing of smoke detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and

recommendations in NFPA 72.

C. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct. Provide 36” square access hatch with operable door and latch per architectural specifications for all devices located above inaccessible ceilings.

E. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. Label device to match HVAC schedule.

F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling, but not higher than 8 feet unless otherwise noted.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

H. FMCP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

I. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.


J. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount per manufacturer’s recommendations to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind load with a 1.3 gust factor without damage.

K. No portion of a fire alarm system shall be installed prior to having plans on site that have been approved and stamped by the Contracting Officer and the local AHJ. This includes wiring. Approved stamped plans shall be on site at all times while the system is in the installation stage.

1. Smoke detectors shall not be installed until the construction cleanup of all trades is complete per NFPA 72. Any smoke detector that has been installed prior to the construction cleanup of all trades and without prior written approval of the engineer and local AHJ shall be marked in a permanent manner that will identify it from re-use and shall be replaced prior to commissioning of the system and/or turning over to the owner. Such detectors shall be replaced at the sole expense of the installing contractor. Subject to approval of the engineer and local AHJ this may exclude services, which do not create air-born particles such as telephone/network services, and modular furniture installation.

2. Orange shipping covers, rubber gloves, tape, or other devices shall not be used to bypass these basic requirements.

3.2 BACK BOXES

A. Backboxes for notification devices: see 27 51 17.

B. Manual pull stations shall be located on walls such that tamper resistant covers can be installed as required, or in the future. Therefore, a 3-inch clearance from other switches, window openings, door frames, etc. shall be provided on each side of a manual pull station and 4 inches clear area above and below the manual pull station.


A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 16 Section “Raceways and Boxes.”

1. Fire alarm/mass notification circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

2. Devices shall be included on the circuits as indicated on the approved plans and calculations. Changes must be evaluated by the designer. Changes in wire routing may require new calculations.

3. Raceway system shall be minimum 3/4" EMT Type. 4. Paint all fire alarm conduit and boxes red. See Division 26, Identification.

C. Unless noted otherwise on the plans, power booster panels shall not be fed from a separate notification power booster panel (daisy chained).

D. Each circuit entering or exiting the building shall be protected with surge protection. This includes 24vdc, 120vac, and telephone circuits serving the fire alarm system.

E. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.


E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FMCP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification”.

B. Each conductor shall be identified as shown on the drawings at each end and at terminal points with wire markers. Attach permanent wire markers within 2 inches of the wire termination. Marker legends shall be visible.

C. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FMCP.

D. Paint power supply circuit breaker(s) red and label “FIRE ALARM”.

E. All initiating devices shall have permanent making indicated address in FMCP.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FMCP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100.


A. Contractor Pre-Testing and Record of Completion Testing:

1. This section covers contractor pre-testing and documentation by the installing contractor that shall be conducted before any commissioning inspection or AHJ testing is scheduled.

2. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before any system devices are installed or energized.

3. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

4. 100% of alarm devices shall be tested for correct operation and resetting. Tester shall provide typed spread sheet format listing address, device description, date tested, pass, fail and date corrected columns as a minimum. Tester’s shall sign and date report. Report to be given to fire department prior to scheduling acceptance testing. Also include copy in O & M manual.

5. Duct smoke detectors shall not be installed or in-place when the HVAC systems are first turned on. All HVAC systems shall be run sufficiently to remove loose dust and debris. Failure to protect detectors may result in detector replacement per this specification.

6. Audibility testing shall not be conducted until all doors, windows, walls, ceilings, and carpeting are in place.

7. All Alarm Initiating Devices shall be observed and logged for correct zone and sensitivity. These devices and their bases shall be tagged with adhesive tags located in an area not visible when installed, showing the initials of the installing technician and date.

8. Computer/labeler generated labels with the address number only may be installed on the exterior of the device as long as the background is clear and installed in a quality


manner. This will assist in the inspection, testing, maintenance, and trouble-shooting of the system.

9. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of Magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is Strictly Prohibited.

10. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, dates and witnesses.

11. Air velocity readings shall be taken and recorded for each HVAC related smoke detector. 12. The installing contractor shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the

system tests available. 13. The following equipment shall be a minimum for conducting the tests:

a. Ladders, scaffolds, or lifts as required to access all installed equipment. b. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance. c. Two way radios, flashlights, screwdrivers, measuring tapes. d. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring airflow through air duct

smoke detector sampling assemblies. e. Calibrated decibel meter.

B. At minimum the following tests shall be conducted and documented.

1. Turn each sprinkler system flow valve two full turns and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FMCP.

2. Verify activation of all flow switches under approved flowing conditions. 3. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 4. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 5. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 6. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 7. Check presence and audibility of tone throughout building spaces. This includes

measuring dBA levels. 8. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced

on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FMCP and the correct activation of the control points.

9. Each notification circuit shall be tested under standby/battery power. Any circuit that measures less than 16 volts dc or the nameplate voltage, whichever is higher, shall be considered as failing the design. Note: Some systems incorporating synchronizing modules can impair results. If the module cannot be bypassed for voltage readings, the manufacturer should be contacted for guidance.

10. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. This section details criteria for commissioning inspections by AHJ’s and the owner. Testing shall be scheduled with all parties minimum 10 working days in advance.

1. This stage of testing shall not be scheduled or conducted until all pre-testing has been

completed and is in compliance with applicable requirements. 2. A signed Record of Completion shall be provided to the inspector prior to starting this

testing. 3. The contractor is responsible for testing all components in accordance with the

manufacturers required and suggested procedures and in accordance with NFPA 72. If this specification incorporates a detailed Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) prepared by the engineer than it shall also be followed.

4. A program matrix shall be provided by the installing contractor referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that input.

5. The commissioning inspector shall use the system record drawings and other documents specified under this specification during the testing procedure to verify operation as


programmed. In conducting the commissioning test, the inspector shall request demonstration of any or all input and output functions.

6. All Smoke detectors shall be commissioned using canned smoke or a method that will functionally test the smoke chamber. The use of magnets for commission testing of smoke detectors is strictly prohibited

7. New detectors that show to be dirty through system sensitivity testing shall be replaced. 8. The items tested shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. System wiring shall be tested to show the following results and the systems subsequence operation: 1) Open, Shorted or Grounded Circuits. 2) Primary and Battery power disconnected. 3) End-of-line voltage readings on notification circuits.

b. System notification circuits and appliances operate as programmed. Audibility

and visual levels meet required standards. c. A minimum of 15 dBA above ambient shall be obtained in every occupiable

space (throughout) per NFPA 72. This includes storage rooms, electrical rooms, telephone rooms, and any other occupiable space.

d. System shall demonstrate the correct messages at the FMCP and any remote annunciator.

e. System off-site reporting shall be verified for alarm, supervisory, trouble, correct address, facility name, contact phone number, and contact name.

f. System shall be tested for stand-by battery backup as outlined in this specification.

3.8 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. System documentation shall be supplied to the owner and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. System record (as-built) drawings and wiring details including one set of reproducible

drawings, and a CD ROM with copies of the record drawings in AUTOCAD .dwg format, or .dxf format for use in a CAD drafting program.

2. System Operating, Installation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. System matrix showing input signals to output commands. 4. Provide a copy of the FACP system programming on a CD-ROM.

B. A copy of all above materials and documentation shall be provided in O & M package. C. The installation contractor shall provide the owner with account information, phone numbers,

passwords, and terms/conditions of the monitoring company. 3.9 FINAL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. The installation contractor shall familiarize the owner and/or owner representative with location of all fire alarm panels, modules, devices, wire routing, and plan cabinet contents.

B. The installation contractor shall furnish training as follows: 1. A simplified training manual on system operation unique to the system shall be prepared

and presented to the owner. This manual shall cover key items and day-to-day operation. Such manual shall be presented in a professional and legible format such as that provided through use of a Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Word.

2. The owner shall be provided with at least 3 hard-copies and an electronic PDF format that can be edited through commonly available software.

3. The training program shall be presented such that the owner can readily train new staff over the life of the system.

4. Training in the receipt, handling and acknowledgment of alarms. This shall include emphasis that alarms shall not be silenced until after a complete and thorough


investigation has been conducted. If there is a hazard, then only the fire department is authorized to silence an alarm.

5. Sequence of operation for all interconnected systems. 6. Training in the system operation including manual control of output functions from the

system control panel. 7. The total training requirement shall be a minimum of 8 hours, but shall be sufficient to

cover all items specified. The contractor shall provide two such training sessions.

3.10 ADJUSTING AND FOLLOW-UP

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of beneficial occupancy, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. Annual Test and Inspection: Eleven months after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire

alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. The owner should be encouraged to participate in these services as reinforcement of system operability.

END 28 31 11

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING

SITE CLEARING 31 10 00-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section Includes:

1. Clearing and grubbing 2. Removal of surface debris. 3. Removal of asphalt paving, concrete paving, curbs, and curb and gutter. 4. Removal of existing utilities, as indicated on the drawings. 5. Removal of existing fence. 6. Provisions for protection, removal, replacement and disposal.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01 00 00 - Requirements of Fort Drum 2. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals 3. Section 01 35 56 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures 4. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/REFERENCES

A. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of Fort Drum Military Reservation.

B. Streets, roads, trees, adjacent property, and other works to remain shall be protected throughout the work by the General Contractor.

C. Maintain all bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed by the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer if additional bench mark information is required.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

3. EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain is tagged or identified.

B. Prior to commencement of work, the contractor shall identify the proper area for placing removed materials.

C. Underground Utilities: Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the location, identification and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction.



3.2 PROTECTION

A. Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered, use traffic barricades with flashing lights.

B. Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage during construction operations. Contractor shall submit details of protection system. Tree protection shall extend to one foot beyond the tree’s drip line.

C. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, pavements to remain, existing structures, and all existing facilities which remain from damage or displacement.

D. Provide contractor design shoring, bracing and protection systems as required to prevent damage or displacement to new work and existing facilities.

E. Protection and Removal of Utility Lines

1. Existing utility lines that are shown on the plans or the locations of which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation and that are to be retained, as well as utility lines constructed during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during all site work operations, and if damaged shall be repaired by the Contractor at no expense to AAFES. In the event that the Contractor damages existing utility lines that are not shown on the plans, or the locations of which have not been known to the Contractor, report of such damage shall be made immediately to the Contracting Officer. When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in ample time for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.

2. The contractor shall be required to hand excavate adjacent to active utilities. Any damages to existing utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to AAFES as identified in specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of Fort Drum.

3.3 REMOVAL / DEMOLITION

A. Remove asphalt paving, concrete paving, curbs, and curb and gutter in their entirety as indicated on the drawings. Neatly saw cut edges at right angle to surface.

B. Remove existing utilities, utility piping, utility poles and all structures in their entirety as indicated on the drawings.

C. Remove existing fence, including pickets, line posts, and concrete foundations in their entirety as indicated on the drawings.

3.4 CLEARING

A. Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the work. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing. Any application of any herbicide or pesticide must be



pre-approved by the Environmental Division of Base Civil Engineering (BCE) prior to the application.

3.5 GRUBBING

A. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas, which are all areas to be improved. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas under this contract. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground.

3.6 DRAINAGE / DEWATERING

A. See specification Section 01 55 00 – Temporary Facilities, Barriers and Controls for requirements.

3.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. If in the performance of the work the Contractor encounters any abnormal materials such as, but not limited to drums, tanks, stained earth, unexploded munitions, or unusual odors during site clearing operations, the work shall be temporarily discontinued, equipment left in place, the area cordoned off and the proper authorities notified, including Base, the Exchange Contracting Officer, AE and PM. The area is considered to contain hazardous or toxic material. Work may be resumed only after a determination has been made by the proper authorities and unsafe materials removed and the area declared safe.

3.8 REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED AREAS

A. Contractor shall repair or replace at no additional cost to the AAFES any damage resulting from, or incidental to, construction.

1. Replacement or repair of seeded areas, sod, bituminous pavement and concrete pavement, structures, shrubbery, trees, drives, walks, and/or fences damaged by construction work, or work incidental thereto, shall be performed by the Contractor as soon as is practical.

2. Replacement shall include existing trees and shrubs not scheduled for removal, that do not show definite signs of life and/or satisfactory growth during the growing period following construction.

B. Where removals leave holes and damage surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces.

3.9 DISPOSAL

A. Removing From Construction Site:

1. All concrete, asphalt pavement, excavated materials, below grade utilities and structures, and demolition debris not required for construction shall be removed in accordance with the provisions of specifications Section 01 00 00 –



Requirements of Fort Drum. 2. The General Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the Contracting

Officer, the Contracting Officer, and the Fort Drum BCE prior to the start of excavation and disposal of materials.

3. Burning shall not be permitted.

3.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to ensure compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for all materials, equipment, and construction operations, including but not limited to the following:

1. Clear areas flush or below original ground surface. 2. Disposal of cleared and grubbed materials.

B. A copy of these records and Contractor tests, as well as the records of corrective action taken, shall be furnished to Fort Drum BCE as directed by the Contracting Officer.

END 31 10 00

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 20 00 EARTH MOVING

EARTH MOVING 31 20 00-1

1. PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes the following:

1. Soil Materials 2. Excavating for building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, curbs and gutters,

landscaping and site utilities. 3. Removal of overburden 4. Fill under slabs-on-grade and paving. 5. Consolidation and compaction. 6. Fill for over-excavation. 7. Backfilling and compaction of building and site structures. 8. Excavating, and compacting trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to

tie to existing utilities.


1. Section 01 00 00 - Requirements of Fort Drum 2. Section 01 35 56 - Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures 3. Section 31 10 00 – Site Clearing 4. Section 31 21 00 – Landscape Grading 5. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials 6. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill – Soil or crushed stone used to fill the space between the excavation and the exterior of a structure or around the foundation walls to provide a means for water to drain away from the foundation.

B. Fill – Soil, crushed stone or overburden material used to raise an existing grade or a man-made deposit.

C. Utility – Any buried pipe, duct, conduit or cable.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

1. AASHTO T 180 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18-in. Drop.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM D 1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.

2. ASTM D 1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbf/ft.

3. ASTM D 2167 - Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.

4. ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 5. ASTM D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place

by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 6. ASTM D 3017 - Test Methods for Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

Mixtures.


C. State of New York, Department of Transportation

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

A. Samples:

1. Submit 10 pound samples of existing soil and each type of fill to field office. 2. All sample containers shall be identified with the name of the material source. 3. Testing Results for Proctor and Sieve Analyses


A. Specification Section 01 45 16 - Quality Control and specification Section 01 45 29 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and analysis of soil material.

B. Testing and Analysis of Subsoil Material: Perform in accordance with ASTM D1557 and ASTM D2487.

C. Testing and Analysis of Topsoil Material: Composition testing as specified herein.

D. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.

2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Source: Materials classified below as Backfill and Fill Material, and Select Material shall be obtained from source outside of Fort Drum. For additional requirements, refer to specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of Fort Drum.

B. Soil Materials: Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle shall be one-half the lift thickness or 3", whichever is smaller, in any dimension at the intended location.

C. General Fill: Approved, soil materials free of organic or other deleterious materials; have a maximum liquid limit of 40, a plasticity index between five (5) and 25, and a maximum particle size of two (2) inches. An occasional particle size of up to four (4) inches will be allowed. Lean clays, sandy clays, clayey sands, clayey gravels, and/or crushed limestone are acceptable materials. The Existing Fill soils and natural sandy lean clay soils excavated during construction may be suitable for re-use as General Fill if tested and processed so as to verify they meet the specified requirements for General Fill.

D. Structural Fill: Imported granular material conforming to NYSDOT Specification Item 203-2.02 Type C, NYSDOT Item 304.03, Subbase Course Type 2 crushed rock, or approved equal. Existing on-site soil may potentially be suitable for structural fill if tested and processed so as to verify they meet the specified requirements for Structural Fill.

E. Select Fill: Imported granular material conforming to NYSDOT specifications for Item 304-2.02 Type 2 or 4.

F. Existing Soil Material: See specification Section 02 31 00 - Subsurface Investigation


& Geotechnical Report for additional information.

2.2 TOPSOIL MATERIALS

A. Existing Soil: Modify existing soil to conform to the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition."

B. On-Site Topsoil: Reuse surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site if requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition" are met.

C. Off-Site Topsoil: Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the contractor.

D. Composition: Provide topsoil that is fertile, friable, naturally loamy, surface soil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds, and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. On-site soil may be used, if suitable. If on-site is not suitable, obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil characteristics to that found at site of work. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil is at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2.3 UNSUITABLE MATERIALS

A. In-Situ soil or other material which can be identified as having insufficient strength characteristics or stability to carry intended loads without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. Also backfill material which contains refuse, frozen material, large rocks, debris, soluble particles, and other material which could damage the pipe or cause the backfill not to compact.

B. Vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs.

3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

B. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Newly graded areas shall be protected from traffic, erosion, and any settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to acceptance. Damaged areas shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes at no additional cost to AAFES until such time that newly planted vegetation has stabilized the slopes.

C. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. Care shall be taken to prevent excessive drying or wetting of exposed soils.

3.3 SITE PREPARATION


A. Site shall be stripped of existing vegetation, roots, and any loose, soft wet, organic or otherwise unsuitable materials from areas developed during the proposed construction.

B. Structures and improvements shall be stripped to bear on undisturbed sand.

3.4 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION

A. Proof Rolling

1. Proof rolling shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. After stripping and excavation, proof roll the existing subgrade of the pavement with a fully loaded dump truck or equivalent equipment. Areas that rut, weave, or deflect shall be overexcavated and replaced with compacted Structural Fill.

2. Proof rolling shall be performed under the observation of a geotechnical engineer and the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of three (3) days prior to proof rolling. Upon approval of the sub-grade by the geotechnical engineer, the Contractor may commence placement of base course.

3. If the geotechnical engineer does not approve the sub-grade, the contractor shall immediately notify the Contracting Officer of the unsatisfactory condition for further direction.

B. Compaction

1. After proof-rolling operations are completed, exposed subgrade soils shall be scarified to a depth of eight (8) inches, moisture conditioned if necessary, and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the Modified Proctor (ASTM D1557).

3.5 EXCAVATING

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavating work.

B. Excavate existing soils to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving and site structures, and construction operations, and detention basins.

C. Excavate sufficiently outside the finished lines of walls to allow for placement and removal of forms where required.

D. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

E. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of existing soil.

F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

G. Grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

H. Any existing drainage or utility lines which may be uncovered and/or broken or destroyed shall be repaired and protected at the contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.

3.6 STOCKPILING


A. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site.

1. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements. 2. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile apart to prevent mixing. 3. Prevent intermixing of soil types or contamination.

B. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

C. Remove stockpile, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing surface water.

3.7 DRAINAGE/DEWATERING

A. Dispose of surface water which may accumulate in open excavations, unfinished fills, or other low areas. Surface dewatering shall include rerouting of any storm water runoff or natural drainage if necessary.

B. Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing or excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction.

C. Rework by the contractor due to insufficient drainage / dewatering techniques during construction shall be performed at no additional expense to AAFES.

D. Perform Dewatering in accordance with New York State rules and regulations.

3.8 FILL & COMPACTION

A. Compact subgrade to the density requirements specified herein.

B. Under and Immediately Adjacent to Building Foundations

1. Fill Type: Foundations shall bear on undisturbed sand. The bearing grade shall not be disturbed by over-excavation or allowed to saturate and soften. The bearing grade is cohesionless and shall be compacted prior to placement of reinforcing steel. Backfill against any walls shall be Structural or Select Fill having no more than 10% passing the No. 200 Sieve.

2. Compaction: Structural and Select Fill shall be placed in twelve (12) inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction. The moisture content of the General and Select Fill soils shall be maintained within two (2) percentage pointsof the optimum moisture content value.

C. Utility Trenches

1. Pipe Embedment Zone: Comply with Section Section 31 23 23 Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

2. Trench Zone: a. Paved Areas:

1.) Fill Type: Structural Fill 2.) Compaction: Structural Fill shall be placed in eight (6) inch lifts,

compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction. The moisture content of the Select Fill soils shall be maintained within two (2) percentage points of the optimum moisture content value.

b. Non-Paved Areas:


1.) Fill Type: Structural Fill 2.) Compaction: Structural Fill shall be placed in eight (8) inch lifts,

compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction. The moisture content of the Select Fill soils shall be maintained within two (2) percentage points of the optimum moisture content value.

D. Fill Under Grass and Landscaped Areas:

1. Fill Type: General, to bottom of topsoil, each 8 inch lift, compacted to 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction.

2. Compaction: Compact to 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction.

E. Interior Concrete Slabs on Grade

1. Fill Type: Select Fill. 2. Compaction: Select Fill shall be placed in twelve (12) inch lifts, compacted to

95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction. The moisture content shall be maintained within two (2) percentage points of the optimum moisture content value.

F. Under ASTs, Sidewalks, and Paving:

1. Fill Type: Structural Fill. 2. Compaction: Structural Fill shall be placed in shall be placed in twelve (12)

inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the ASTM D-1557 method of compaction. The moisture content shall be maintained within two (2) percentage points of the optimum moisture content value.

3.9 FINISHED EXCAVATION AND FILLS

A. All areas covered by the project, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas, shall be uniformly smooth graded. The finished surface shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish shall be that ordinary obtainable from blade-grader operations, except as otherwise specified. Surface shall be finished not more than 0.10 foot above or below the established grade.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. All excess excavated material shall be removed from the site and disposed of at a location outside Fort Drum at the Contractor's expense.

B. Trucks hauling excavated material shall not be loaded beyond their rated load capacity.


A. The testing services shall be supervised by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of New York.

B. Soil Compaction Testing:


1. The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified geotechnical engineering consultant for advice on all earthwork techniques involved in the work. Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer of conditions requiring a variation to the Contract Documents and consult with the Contracting Officer regarding disposition of earthwork variations.

2. The Contractor will employ an independent testing agency to perform tests on structural fill for compaction. Tests shall be provided by a laboratory approved and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide a 50-pound sample of each material, from each source, to the testing agency five days prior to start of earthwork. Do not place any fill material until laboratory tests confirm material suitable as structural fill.

3. Laboratory Test on soil materials for compaction: ASTM D 1557. 4. Laboratory test on structural fill for compaction: ASTM D 1557. 5. Contractor shall notify the testing agency and geotechnical engineering

consultant sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for their assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

6. Testing Agency and geotechnical engineer shall prepare written reports of services performed. Testing Agency shall provide three (3) copies of testing reports to the Contracting Officer no later than 10 calendar days from the date testing occurs or test results are obtained.

7. Tests: a. Perform tests in areas where compacted fill densities are specified. b. Perform tests on sub-grade areas prior to backfilling, and at each layer of

compacted fill for every 500 square feet, or less, of filled area, for areas other than back fill at foundation walls.

c. Perform tests at undisturbed bearing area and at each layer of compacted fill in bearing area not to exceed 50 feet o.c. at each individual footing.

d. Perform tests at each layer of compacted backfill at foundation walls; perform tests at locations not to exceed 50 feet o.c.

e. Perform tests remote from each other and in areas representative of the entire subgrade.

f. Perform tests at each layer of compacted fill in utility trenches not to exceed 50 feet o.c.

8. The testing laboratory shall promptly notify Contracting Officer and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies of work which are observed during performance of services. If in the opinion of the Contracting Officer additional tests are required beyond those specified and their results indicate compaction less than the percentage density specified, the contractor shall bear the expense of such additional tests ordered.

C. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Perform all earthworks to a finished tolerance within plus or minus five hundredths of a foot (0.05').

END OF 31 20 00

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork SECTION 31 21 00 LANDSCAPE GRADING

Landscape Grading 31 21 00 - 1


A. Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 45 29 - Testing Laboratory Services

B. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving

C. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials

D. Section 32 92 00 Turf & Grasses PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL

A. Topsoil: Provide Topsoil as specified in Specification Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving.


A. Verify that building and trench backfilling have been inspected.

B. Verify that substrate base has been contoured and compacted. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of ½ inch in size.

C. Scarify surface to depth of 6 inches (150 mm) where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil.

3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and planting is required to thickness as scheduled.

B. Place topsoil during dry weather.

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork SECTION 31 21 00 LANDSCAPE GRADING

Landscape Grading 31 21 00 - 2

C. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

D. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

E. Manually spread topsoil close to existing plant life and building to prevent

damage.

F. Lightly compact placed topsoil.

G. Surplus imported subsoil and topsoil shall be removed from Government Property.

H. Leave stockpile area and site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus ½ inch.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final work.

B. Protect existing structures, fences, sidewalks, utilities, paving, and curbs. 3.06 SCHEDULES

A. Compacted topsoil thickness at the following areas:

1. Lawn: 4 inches. 2. Landscape Beds: 12 inches.

END OF SECTION

Division 31 – Earthwork

Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction For Utilities

Excavation Backfill and Compaction For Utilities 31 23 33 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Trench excavation, backfill, and compaction shall include, but not necessarily be

limited to, the excavation, backfill, and compaction of trenches for water mains, and sanitary sewers, shown on the Drawings.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe Foundation: Suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at trench

subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of bedding as shown on Drawings, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over-excavations.

B. Embedment Material/Pipe Bedding: Portion of trench backfill that extends

vertically from top of foundation up to level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

C. Haunching: Material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to

springline of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

D. Initial Backfill: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from springline of pipe (top of haunching) up to level line 12-inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall.

E. Pipe Embedment Zone: Portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding,

haunching and initial backfill. F. Trench Zone: Portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe

embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement.

G. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soil materials are the following:

1. Materials that are classified as ML, CL-ML, MH, PT, OH, and OL

according to ASTM D2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to required density due to gradation,

plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 4-

inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials.

4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical

contaminants.




H. Suitable Material: Suitable soil materials are those meeting specification requirements. Materials mixed with lime, fly ash, or cement that can be compacted to required density and meeting requirements for suitable materials may be considered suitable materials, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Backfill: Suitable material meeting specified quality requirements placed and

compacted under controlled conditions. J. Ground Water Control Systems: Installations external to trench, such as well

points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering to lower ground water, intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from side or bottom of trench excavation, and depressurization to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom.

K. Surface Water Control: Diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain

water away from trench excavation. Rain water and surface water accidentally entering trench shall be controlled and removed as part of excavation drainage.

L. Excavation Drainage: Removal of surface and seepage water in trench by sump

pumping and using drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D2321, placed on foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material.

M. Trench Conditions are defined with regard to stability of trench bottom and trench

walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill, except where structural trench support is necessary.

1. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level.

2. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water

seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. a. Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage

is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement.

b. Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is

provided in embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils.

3. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in pipe embedment

zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil




disturbances, such as sloughing, sliding, boiling, heaving or loss of density.

N. Sub-trench: Sub-trench is special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench

excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor.

O. Trench Dam: Placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or

foundation to prohibit ground water flow along trench. P. Over-excavation and Backfill: Excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory

bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Drawings, and backfilled with foundation backfill material.

Q. Foundation Backfill Materials: Natural soil or manufactured aggregate of

controlled gradation, and geotextile filter fabrics as required, to control drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs.

R. Trench Safety Systems: Includes both protective systems and shoring systems. S. Trench Shield (Trench Box): Portable worker safety structure moved along trench

as work proceeds, used as protective system and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave in, thereby protecting persons within trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected.

T. Shoring System: Structure that supports sides of an excavation to maintain

stable soil conditions and prevent cave-ins, or to prevent movement of ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements.

U. Special Shoring: Shoring system meeting special shoring as specified in

Paragraph 1.06, Special Shoring Design Requirements, for locations identified on Drawings.

1.03 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on same day that

acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section of pipe installation, manhole, or other structures.

B. The Contractor shall not excavate more trench in any day than can be completed

(facility installed and trench backfilled) in the same day, unless by written permission of CONTRACTING OFFICER. CONTRACTING OFFICER shall be




empowered at any time to require the backfilling of open trenches over completed pipe lines if, in their judgment, such action is necessary.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 –Shop Drawings Product Data &

Submittals. B. Submit planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction

including:

1. Trench widths 2. Procedures for foundation and pipe zone bedding placement, and trench

backfill compaction. 3. Procedures for assuring compaction against undisturbed soil when pre-

manufactured trench safety systems are proposed.

C. Submit backfill material sources and product quality information in accordance with requirements of Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials.

D. Submit trench excavation safety program. Identify by name who will be OSHA

competent person for excavations. If special shoring system is to be used, include designs for special shoring meeting requirements defined in Paragraph 1.06, Special Shoring Design Requirements contained herein.

E. Submit record of location of utilities as installed, referenced to survey control

points. Include locations of utilities encountered or rerouted. Give stations, horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts, and gradients.

1.05 TESTS

A. Geotechnical testing and analysis of backfill materials for soil classification and

compaction testing during construction shall be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, and performed by an independent, State-certified, testing company approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER. The results of all failing tests shall be communicated to CONTRACTING OFFICER immediately. Written results of all tests performed, shall be presented to CONTRACTING OFFICER in a timely manner. When test results indicate that the density is less than the percent specified, tractor shall excavate and re-compact the areas that have failed at no expense to AAFES.

B. The Contractor will arrange for all in-place moisture/density testing on the project.

C. Frequency :




Compaction testing shall be performed on random lifts a minimum of every 300 LF unpaved areas and 100 LF in paved areas unless otherwise approved by the CONTRACTING OFFICER. CONTRACTING OFFICER reserves the right to require re-tests if the initial compaction test fails.

1. If ground water is present, at the discretion of the CONTRACTING

OFFICER, compaction testing shall be increased to every 100 LF in unpaved areas.

2. A minimum of one (1) compaction test per lift shall be performed for all

backfill operations with less linear footage than specified in 1.05 D.

3. The testing agency shall determine at the time of testing the location of each compaction test within the specified testing length.

4. As an alternative to the compaction testing frequency specified, the

Contract shall have the option to demonstrate aceptable compaction at the start of the project.

a. At the start of the trenching operation, the Contractor shall

demonstrate to the CONTRACTING OFFICER representative through the results reported by the accepted testing agency that the compaction density specified can be attained by the compaction equipment and methods the Contractor intends to use.

b. Once the method and equipment has been approved, no

substitutions will be permitted without CONTRACTING OFFICER’s approval.

c. Additional demonstration of the suitability of the compaction

equipment and methods will be required whenever there is a significant change in material characteristics or change in compaction equipment or method.

d. Should testing determine that the required density is not being

met, or the material is outside the specified moisture range, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, reexcavate, rework, and/or recompact the particular layer or section until the required density and/or moisture is attained.

D. Compaction

1. The Contractor shall, in unimproved areas outside the public rights-of-way, compact each trench backfill layer in such a manner as to obtain a dense backfill free of voids and not susceptible to undue settlement or depression. Trench backfill extending to not less than 1-foot in depth above the top of pipe shall be compacted to at least 90% of maximum




density at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum in accordance with ASTM D1556.

2. Trench backfill within all rights-of-way of improved or paved areas shall

be compacted to at least 95% of maximum density at a moisture content within 5%, or local requirements which ever is more stringent, of the optimum moisture in accordance with ASTM D1556. The final 1-foot of trench backfill to pavement subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95% of maximum density at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum in accordance with ASTM D1556.

1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Have special shoring designed or selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer

registered in the State the project is being completed to provide support for sides of excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. Special shoring may be a premanufactured system selected by Contractor's Professional Engineer to meet project site requirements based on manufacturer's standard design.

B. The requirement for special shoring shall be determined by CONTRACTING

OFFICER for all excavations within 10-feet of an CONTRACTING OFFICER owned asset.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Perform excavation with hydraulic excavator or other equipment suitable for

achieving requirements of this Section. B. Heavy compaction equipment shall not be used until adequate cover is attained.

in order to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other protective systems or shoring systems, including

special shoring systems as referenced in Paragraph 1.06, which are designed and operated in accordance with all Local, State, and Federal (including OSHA) standards and regulations.

2.02 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Embedment and Trench Zone Backfill Materials: Conform to classifications and

product descriptions of Section 31 23 23– Utility Backfill Materials. B. Concrete Encasement: Concrete used for encasement or caps shall have a

minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi.




C. Concrete Backfill: Also known as flowable fill. Flowable fill must be “excavatable” as defined by the National Ready Mixed Association as having a compressive strength not exceeding 150 psi.

D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed (bag) concrete.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 STANDARD PRACTICE

A. Install flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, to conform to standard practice

described in ASTM D2321, and as described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs.

B. Install rigid pipe to conform to standard practice described in ASTM C12, and as

described in this Section. Where an apparent conflict occurs between standard practice and requirements of this Section, this Section governs.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Maintain barricades and warning lights for streets and intersections affected by

Work, and that are considered hazardous to traffic movements as specified in the approved traffic control plan for the project.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtained all required permits for excavation

to include a Traffic Control Plan approved by the local governing authority. C. Perform work to conform to applicable safety standards and regulations, as

outlined in current OHSA , State and local regulations D. Immediately notify agency or company owning any existing utility line which is

damaged, broken, or disturbed. Obtain approval from CONTRACTING OFFICER and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.

E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways,

to conform to local (local, State DOT, DPW, etc.) requirements F. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface-water control measures.

Provide stable trench to allow installation in accordance with Specifications. G. Maintain permanent benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points.

Unless otherwise directed in writing, at the expense of the Contractor a Licensed Surveyor shall replace those which are damaged or destroyed in accordance with the requirements of the CONTRACTING OFFICER and local or State requirements.




3.03 CRITICAL LOCATION INVESTIGATION

A. Horizontal and vertical location of various underground lines shown on Drawings,

including but not limited to water lines, gas lines, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, telecommunication lines, electric lines or power ducts, pipelines, concrete and debris, are based on best information available but are only approximate locations.

B. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating all utility locates within the Limits

of Disturbance per the standard procedures for the project location (One call system, DPW, Utility Company Coordination, etc.)

C. The Contractor is responsible for verifying the location of existing utilities in

manner that complies with all local, State and Federal regulations. Use extreme caution and care when uncovering these lines.

D. Notify CONTRACTING OFFICER Project Manager in writing immediately upon identification of obstruction.

E. Notify involved utility companies of date and time that investigation excavation

will occur and request that their respective utility lines be marked in field. Comply with utility or pipeline company requirements that their representative be present during excavation. Provide CONTRACTING OFFICER written 48 hours notice prior to field excavation or related work.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, existing structures, and other permanent objects

outside of grading limits and within grading limits as designated on Drawings. B. Protect and support above-grade and below-grade utilities which are to remain. C. Restore damaged permanent facilities to a condition equal to or better than pre-

construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on Drawings.

D. Take measures to minimize erosion of trenches. Do not allow water to pond in

trenches. Where slides, washouts, settlements, or areas with loss of density or pavement failures or potholes occur, repair, recompact, and pave those areas at no additional cost to CONTRACTING OFFICER.

E. Protection of Property and Structures: The Contractor shall be responsible for all

damage and assume all expense for direct or indirect injury caused by his work, to above ground facilities or below ground facilities shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, sustain in place and protect from direct or indirect injury all existing facilities in the vicinity of the excavation, whether above or below the ground, or that may appear in the trench. The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of protective measures associated with the




presence or proximity of pipes, poles, tracks, walls, buildings, property markers, and other structures and property of every kind and description in or over his trenches or in the vicinity of his work whether above or below the surface of the ground.

. 3.05 EXCAVATION

A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on Drawings, install underground utilities

in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe, conduit, and ducts can be installed to

depths and alignments shown on Drawings. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements.

C. Trenches shall be wide enough to allow for compaction equipment. D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above embedment zone for installation of

well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms, pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials.

E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for

removal, or concealed conditions notify CONTRACTING OFFICER immediately F. Trench Support:

1. The Contractor shall support the sides and ends of all excavations

wherever necessary with braces, sheeting, shoring or stringers, trench boxes, or other acceptable excavation support systems. All timbering shall be installed by persons skilled in such work and shall be so arranged that it may be withdrawn as backfilling proceeds, without injury to the utility or structure constructed or to any roadbed or adjacent structure or property.

2. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest OSHA

requirements. 3. All timbering in excavations, trench boxes, or excavation support systems

shall be withdrawn as the backfilling is being done, except where and to such extent as the CONTRACTING OFFICER shall order in writing that said timbering or excavation support system be left in place or where the CONTRACTING OFFICER Project Manager permits the trench support to be left in place at the Contractor's expense and upon his request. The Contractor shall cut off any sheeting left in place 2 feet below finished grade and shall remove the material cut off without compensation therefore.




4. The support of the trench shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

5. Removal or Moving of trench shoring shall be performed so that pipe, and

backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor degree of compaction reduced. Re-compact after shoring is moved if soil is disturbed.

6. The Contractor shall coordinate and provide safe access at all times to all

inspecting and testing activities for CONTRACTING OFFICER and CONTRACTING OFFICER-authorized representatives.

3.06 HANDLING EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Use only excavated materials, which are suitable as defined in this Section and

conforming to Section – Utility Backfill Materials. Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles per the most current OSHA standards.

B. When required, provide additional backfill material conforming to requirements of

Section – Utility Backfill Materials. C. Stockpile locations shall be pre-approved by the CONTRACTING OFFICER and

the local governing authority.

D. All excavated material not used as backfill the same day as excavated shall be removed from the site and/or stockpiled in an area pre-approved by the CONTRACTING OFFICER or DPW.

3.07 TRENCH FOUNDATION

A. The Contractor shall, before any pipe or appurtenance is installed, fill all

unauthorized depressions or irregularities in the bottom of the trench or tunnel with firmly compacted embankment or other approved material.

B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to adequately control water that may be

present in the excavation. He shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in such a manner not to cause damage to public or private property or to any portion of the Work completed or in progress or cause any impediment to the use of any area by the public. Nor shall the Contractor discharge any flushing or ground water or any material of any nature into existing sanitary sewer system during construction of the facilities. All water shall be discharged through an approved sediment control device.

C. Notify CONTRACTING OFFICER immediately when unsatisfactory material is

encountered on trench bottom. With CONTRACTING OFFICER approval, up to 12 -inches of additional undercut may be permitted to achieve suitable trench bottom. If the additional undercut does not result in a satisfactory trench bottom,




the Contractor shall obtain a bedding design prepared by a Geotechnical Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is being constructed.

D. Perform over excavation, if directed by CONTRACTING OFFICER, in

accordance with Paragraph 3.07.C above. Removal of material maybe required. Even though Contractor has not determined material to be unsuitable.

E. Trench dams shall be installed as determined by the CONTRACTING OFFICER

when ground water is encountered. 3.08 PIPE EMBEDMENT, PLACEMENT, AND COMPACTION

A. The following material shall be used for the pipe embedment zone (bedding,

haunching, and initial backfill): NYSDOT Item No. 304.03 sub base course Type 2.

B. Remove loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil from bottoms and

sidewalls of trenches immediately prior to placement of embedment materials. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching, and initial backfill as shown on

Drawings. D. For pipe installation, manually spread embedment materials around pipe to

provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Protect flexible pipe from damage during placing of pipe zone bedding material. Perform placement and compaction directly against undisturbed soils in trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place.

E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of embedment zone unless

means to maintain density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of material against undisturbed soil.

F. Place geotextile to prevent particle migration from in-situ soil into open-graded

(Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers. G. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting

operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates.

H. Place haunching material around pipe and compact per the pipe manufacture’s

recommendation to provide uniform bearing and side support. The haunching shall be installed in a manner that prevents the pipe from moving.

I. Place electrical conduit, if used, directly on foundation without bedding. J. The method of compaction of the embedment zone material shall comply with the

pipe manufacture’s recommendation. Water tamping is not allowed.




3.09 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION

A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable.

Leave only minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction.

B. For water and sewer lines under existing pavement, use Structural Fill backfill up to the pavement base or sub grade.

C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, for trench excavations not under

pavement, random backfill of suitable material may be used in trench zone. 1. Clay Soils may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas. 2. Place in maximum 8-inch thick lift. 3. Compact per Paragraph 1.05 of this specification section. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density.

D. For electric conduits, remove form work used for construction of conduits before

placing trench zone backfill. 3.10 MANHOLES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES

A. Manholes, junction boxes and other pipeline structures shall have bedding

consisting of a minimum of 1’ compacted ¾” to 1” clean stone. The compacted ¾” to 1” stone shall be installed horizontally out from the base to the limits of the excavation (minimum 1’), and extend up to a minimum of 1’ above the pipe or base, which ever is greater (does not include the upper connection of a drop inlet). The stone shall be installed to a uniform depth around the entire perimeter of the structure. The remainder of the backfill shall be installed per section 3.09 Trench Zone Backfill Placement and Compaction to include paved and unpaved area requirements.

3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL

A. Dispose of excess materials in accordance with requirements of the contract

documents, State and local requirements.


DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 31 16 – TERMITE CONTROL

TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-1

1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor Provide:

a. Soil treatment of Building elements for termite control. b. Certification of EPA compliance. c. Testing services certificate of application rates. d. Warranty.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Division 2 – Site Work. 3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications:

1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. 2. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for preparation of substrate and

application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

C. Use only termiticides that bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

1. formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA registered label.

D. Obtain termite control products from single manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.

B. Certification:

1. Provide written certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations for Termiticides.

2. Provide written certification of applicator/installer qualifications.

C. Testing Service: Provide and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to certify termiticide application rates and submit observation data as follows:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide manufacturer and brand name. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used and rates of application.


6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations.

B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather.

C. Fully comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.

1.6 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites.

1. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil.

2. Repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

B. Warranty shall be for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, signed by Applicator and Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION

A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites that is EPA registered and complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. 2. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and

concentrations:

a. TalstarOne: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, PA 19103.

b. Premise 75: 0.5 percent in water emulsion, Bayer Corporation, Kansas City, MO 64120.

c. Termidor SC: 0.6 percent in water emulsion, BASF Corporation, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to the Contracting Officer or designated representative and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities.

C. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not injurious to planting.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated.


1. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations.

2. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

B. Under new slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:

1. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet to soil in critical areas under existing and new slab-on-grade construction, including:

a. Entire perimeter inside of foundation walls. b. Along both sides of interior partition walls. c. Around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab. d. Around interior wall footings.

2. Under new slab areas:

a. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 square feet to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material.

b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 square feet as an overall treatment under slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel.

3. Apply 2 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lineal feet of trench for each foot of depth from grade to footing along outside edge of building.

a. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12".

b. Punch holes in backfill to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution.

c. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench.

C. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 lineal feet, poured directly into the hollow spaces.

D. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 2 gallons per 10 lineal feet of penetration.

E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied and remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.

F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, or other construction activities following application.

END 31 31 16.

DIVISON 2 – SITE WORK Section 32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING

ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16-1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aggregate base course 2. Tack Coat. 3. Asphalt concrete paving, wearing binder and base course. 4. Surface sealer. 5. Pavement Marking.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS TT-P-1952B, Type 1 – Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Waterborne 2. FS TT-B -1325C, Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective

B. State of New York, Department of Transportation


A. Paving: Designed for parking and movement of trucks up to 60,000 lbs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittals.


A. Perform work in accordance with New York State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications

B. Qualifications of Asphalt Concrete Producer: Use only materials which are furnished by a bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete.


A. Job-mix Criteria:

1. Provide job-mix formulas for each required asphalt-aggregate mixture. 2. Establish a single percentage of asphalt cement to be added to aggregate, and

a single temperature at which asphalt concrete is to be produced. 3. Comply with the mix requirements of the NYSDOT “Construction and Material

Specifications”, Latest edition.



4. Maintain material quantities with allowable tolerances of the governing standards.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Tack Coat

1. NYSDOT Item 407.0102 Tack Coat

B. Primer

1. NYSDOT Item 402.25 Prime Coat

C. Asphalt Concrete Surface Course

1. NYSDOT Section 402.12 Asphaltic Concrete.

D. Pavement Marking

1. NYDOT Section 688 Traffic Paint. 2. Provide glass bead reflectors conforming to FS-TT-B, Type I, Gradation A. 3. Color as indicated.

E. Geotextile Soil Stabilization

1. NYSDOT Item 207.24

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that compacted base course is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide size and quantity of equipment to complete the work specified within the project time schedule.

B. Bituminous Pavers; Self-propelled that spread hot asphalt concrete mixtures without tearing, shoving or gouging surfaces, and control pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms.

C. Rolling Equipment:

1. Self-propelled, steel-wheeled and pneumatic-tired rollers that can reverse direction without backlash.

2. Other type rollers may be used if acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

D. Hand Tools: Provide rakes, lutes, shovels, tampers, smoothing irons, pavement



cutters, portable heaters, and other miscellaneous small tools to complete the work specified.

E. Bituminous Distributor:

1. Distributor shall be mounted on pneumatic tires of such size and number to prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the base surface or other layers in the pavement structure.

2. The distributor shall be designed and equipped to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled rates with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent, and at variable widths.

3. Distributor equipment shall include a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars, tachometer, pressure gages, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for heating for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor.

4. The distributor shall be equipped to circulate and agitate the bituminous material during the heating process.

F. Power Brooms and Power Blowers:

1. Power brooms and power blowers shall be suitable for cleaning the surfaces to which the tack coat is to be applied.

3.3 TRANSPORTING

A. Transport asphalt concrete mixtures from mixing site in trucks having tight, clean compartments.

B. Coat hauling compartments with a lime-water mixture to prevent asphalt concrete mixture from sticking.

C. Elevate and drain compartment of excess solution before loading mix.

D. Provide covers over asphalt concrete mixture when transporting to protect from weather and to prevent loss of heat.

E. During periods of cold weather or for long distance deliveries, provide insulation around entire truck bed surfaces.

3.4 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Begin spreading base material at the point nearest the source of supply. Permit traffic and hauling over the base. Fill ruts formed by traffic and re-roll. After base course placement, continue machining and rolling until surface is smooth, compacted, well bonded, and true to the designed cross section. Compact to 100 percent ASTM D 698 maximum dry density. Maintain the base smooth and true to grade and cross section until bituminous concrete placement.



B. Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches, the material shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more layers of approximately equal thickness, the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer not to exceed 6 inches. When vibrating or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used, the compacted depth of a single layer of base course may be increased to 8 inches upon approval by the Contracting Officer.

C. Not more than one sample in every 5 shall have a density of less than that specified and the density of such sample shall not be more than 2 percent below that specified.

D. If the surface of the base becomes uneven, or distorted and sets up in that condition, it shall be scarified, reshaped and re-compacted. If the subbase, when compacted and shaped, shows a deficiency in thickness or if depressions occur in the surface, the Contractor shall scarify such sections before additional material is added and allowance will not be made for such scarifying.

3.5 FRAME ADJUSTMENTS

A. Set frames of subsurface structures to final grade as a part of this work.

B. Placing frames:

1. Surround frames set to elevation with a ring of compacted asphalt concrete base prior to paving.

2. Place asphalt concrete mixture up to 1 inch below top of frame, slope to grade, and compact by hand tamping.

C. Adjust frames to proper position to meet paving or grade indicated.

D. If permanent covers are not in place, provide temporary covers over openings until completion of rolling operations.

E. Set cover frames to grade, flush with surface of adjacent pavement.

3.6 TACK COAT:

A. Bituminous material for the tack coat shall be applied in quantities of not less than 0.05 gallon per square yard nor more than 0.15 gallon per square yard of pavement surface. The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer.

B. Cutback asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 centistokes, kinematic. The temperature viscosity relation shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.

C. Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, the tack coat shall be applied at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be



treated. All areas and spots missed by the distributor shall be properly treated with the hand spray.

D. Following application of the tack material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of pavement, the tack shall be allowed to cure and obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture.

E. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, and tacked area shall be maintained by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing the re-tacking deficient areas at no additional cost to AAFES.

F. If required, clean dry sand shall be spread to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material.

G. No smoking, fires, or flames other than the heaters that are a part of the equipment shall be permitted within 25 feet of heating, distributing, and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous emulsions.

3.7 PLACEMENT

A. Install work in accordance with NYDOT Standards.

B. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

C. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

D. Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off using paving machine.

E. Spread mixture at a minimum temperature of 225 degrees F.

F. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand.

G. Place each course at thickness so that when compacted it will conform to the indicated grade, cross-section, finish thickness, and density indicated.

H. Hand Placing:

1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible, as acceptable to Contracting Officer.

2. Place mixture at a rate that will insure handling and compaction before mixture becomes cooler than acceptable working temperature.

I. Joints:

1. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. All joints



shall be sealed with a protective coating of liquid asphalt sealer. 2. Construct joints to have same texture, density and smoothness as adjacent

sections of asphalt concrete course. 3. Clean contact surfaces free of sand, dirt, or other objectionable material and

apply tack coat. 4. Offset transverse joints in succeeding course not less than 24 inches (600

mm). 5. Cut back edge of previously placed course to expose an even, vertical surface

for full course thickness. 6. Offset longitudinal joints in succeeding courses not less than 6 inches (150

mm). 7. When the edges of longitudinal joints are irregular, honeycombed, or

inadequately compacted, cut back unsatisfactory sections to expose an even, vertical surface for full course thickness.

3.8 COMPACTION

A. Compact in accordance with NYDOT Standards.

B. Provide sufficient rollers to obtain the required pavement density.

C. Begin rolling operations as soon after placing when the mixture will bear weight of roller without excessive displacement.

D. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers to stand on finished surface before it has thoroughly cooled or set.

E. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating place compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

F. Start rolling longitudinally at extreme lower side of sections and proceed toward center of pavement. Roll to slightly different lengths on alternate roller runs.

G. Do not roll centers of sections first under any circumstances.

H. Breakdown Rolling:

1. Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of transverse and longitudinal joints and outside edge.

2. Operate rollers as close as possible to pavers without causing pavement displacement.

3. Check crown grade and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if

required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling.

I. Second Rolling:

1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction.

2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted.



J. Finish Rolling:

1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks.

2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specified density.

K. Patching:

1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. 3. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 4. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 5. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. 6. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete

mixture.

3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Cleaning:

1. Sweep surface with power broom supplemented by hand brooms to remove loose material and dirt.

2. Do not begin marking asphalt concrete pavement until acceptable to Contracting Officer.

B. Apply paint with mechanical equipment:

1. Provide uniform straight edges. 2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommended rates.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Aggregate Base

1. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/2 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. 2. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/2 inch. 3. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.

B. Bituminous Pavement

1. Surface Tolerance: The surface will be tested using a 10-foot (3.05 M) straightedge. The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straightedge between any two contacts with the surface shall not exceed 1/4-inch (6 mm). All humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerance shall be corrected or the defective work removed and replaced with new material.

2. Thickness Tolerance: It is the intent of these specifications that the base course shall be constructed in accordance with the thickness shown on the plans and the binder and surface courses constructed in accordance with the rate of application shown on the plans. Where any such courses are found not so constructed, the rules for correction provided herein shall govern.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:



A. The Contractor will employ, and pay for, services to perform asphalt concrete testing and inspection service. Contractor is responsible to include sampling and testing of asphalt concrete materials proposed, and tests and calculations for asphalt concrete mixtures.

B. Asphalt testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the NYDOT Standard Specifications.

C. Field testing shall include the following:

1. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness shall not be acceptable if exceeding 1/2 inch allowable variation from thickness shown on drawings.

2. Density: Min 92% expressed as a percentage of the mix maximum theoretical density (MMTD).

3. Surface Smoothness: Inspect finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using a 10-foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas. Surfaces will not be acceptable if the base course smoothness exceeds 1/4 inch in 10 feet:

D. Test locations will be taken in the new pavement area.

E. Contractor shall repair holes from test specimens as specified for patching defective work.

3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Contracting Officer.

B. Protection:

1. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement, until is has cooled and hardened, and in no case sooner than 6 hours.

2. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the general public.

3. Cover openings of structures in the area of paving until permanent coverings are placed.

3.13 PREPARATION OF SURFACE:

A. Immediately before applying the tack coat all loose material, dirt, clay, or other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface to be treated. The area to be tacked shall also be dry and clean.

END 32 12 16

DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK SECTION 32 13 13 – CONCRETE PAVING

SITE CONCRETE WORK 32 13 13 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this section includes the following:

1. Concrete Pavement 2. Curbs 3. Sidewalks 4. Jointing Materials

B. Related Sections

1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement 2. ASTM A 497 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement 3. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,

Grade 60 4. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregate 5. ASTM C78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength 6. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete 7. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 8. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement 9. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 10. ASTM C 172 -Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 11. ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method 12. ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 13. ASTM C 494 - Admixtures 14. ASTM D 422 - Particle-Size Analysis of Soils 15. ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

C. AASHTO

1. M 295 – Fly Ash

D. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS SS-S-1401 - (Rev. C) Sealants, Joint, Non-Jet-Fuel-Resistant, Hot-Applied, for Portland Cement and Asphalt Concrete pavements.

E. State of New York, Department of Transportation


A. Paving: Designed for parking, light duty commercial vehicles, and movement of trucks



up to 80,000 lbs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Shop Drawings, Product Data, & Submittals.


A. Except as modified herein or as indicated, work and materials shall be performed in accordance with the NYSDOT.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations

1. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40°F, or surface is wet or frozen.

2. Except by specific written authorization of the Contracting Officer, concrete shall not be placed when the temperature is below 40° F and falling but may be placed when the temperature is above 35° F and rising. The temperature shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat.

3. When the temperature of the air is above 85° F, an approved retarding agent will be required in concrete. The maximum temperature of all regular concrete placed shall not exceed 95° F, unless otherwise specified.

4. When the temperature is being placed in cold weather, the Contractor shall have available sufficient supply of an approved covering material to immediately protect concrete if the air temperature falls to 30° F or below, before concrete has been placed for 4 hours. Protection shall remain in place during the period the temperature continues below 32° F or for a period of not more than 5 days. Neither salt nor other chemicals shall be added to prevent freezing. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and strength of concrete under cold weather conditions. Concrete shall not be placed before sunrise and shall not be placed later than will permit finishing during sufficient natural light.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE:

A. See Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving, for aggregate base course material requirements.

2.2 FORMWORK

A. Form Materials: Conform to section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Forms shall be of steel, except that wood forms may be used on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets.

C. Forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the slab as shown on the drawings.



D. Forms shall be in one piece for the full depth required except where the drawings require several different slab thicknesses; forms may be built-up with metal or wood to provide an increase in depth of not more than 26 percent.

1. Steel forms shall be furnished in sections not less than 10 feet in length, except that on curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, the length of the sections shall be 5 feet unless the sections are flexible or curved to the proper radius. Each 10-foot length of form shall be provided with at least three form braces and pin sockets so spaced that the form will be rigidly braced throughout its length. Lock joints between form sections shall be free from play or movement. Forms shall be free of warps, bends, or kinks. The top surface of a form shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true line. The face of the form shall not vary more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane. Forms with battered top surfaces or distorted faces or bases shall be removed from the project.

2. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made of well-seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend. Wood forms shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced.

2.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper type, grade, color, and certification have been received.

B. Protect all materials from damage due to jobsite conditions and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the work.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products:

1. Materials/products shall contain the maximum amount of recycled content allowed that retains material integrity and product safety in order to meet the finished installation requirements. a. If achievable given these requirements, provide products with an average

recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.

C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A185or ASTM A497; in flat sheets; unfinished.

D. Dowels: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade, plain steel, unfinished finish.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, gray. a. Temperature of cement shall not be over 140 degrees F when delivered to

the batching plant.



2. Fly ash (Pozzolan): Fly ash shall conform to the chemical and physical requirements for Mineral Admixture, Class F listed in AASTHTO M 295 including Table 2 (except Footnote A). Loss of Ignition shall not exceed 4%.

B. Aggregates:

1. Concrete Sand a. Meeting the following gradation requirements:

Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight

Minimum Maximum 3/8 in No. 4 No. 8

No. 16 No. 30 No. 50

No. 100 No. 200 (Wet)

100 90 75 50 25 10 1 0

100 100 85 60 30 10 3

b. Sample and test aggregate for friction characteristics in accordance with NY

DOT Materials Method 28.

2. Coarse Aggregate a. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag

meeting NY DOT requirements for Coase Aggregates and the following gradation requirements:

TABLE 501-2 COARSE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS

Sieve Sizes Type CA 1 General Limits

% Passing Type CA 2 General Limits

% Passing 1 1/2 inches - 100

1 inch 100 93-100 1/2 inch 90-100 27-58 1/4 inch 0-15 0-8

a. Sample and test aggregate for friction characteristics in accordance with NY

DOT Materials Method 28.

C. Admixtures

1. Air-Entraining. The air-entraining agent shall entrain air in the concrete and the concrete containing an air-entraining agent shall conform to the following requirements: a. Bleeding. The bleeding of the concrete made with the admixture under test

shall not exceed that of concrete made with the reference admixture by more than 2 percentage points, the bleeding being computed as a percentage of the net amount of mixing water in each concrete. The net mixing water is the water in excess of that present as absorbed water in the aggregate.

b. Time of Setting. The initial time of setting of concrete containing the



admixture under test shall not deviate from that of the concrete made with the reference admixture by more than ±1 hour and 15 minutes.

c. Compressive Strength. The compressive strength of concrete containing the admixture under test shall be not less than 90 percent of the control concrete, at the same air content, containing the reference admixture at 48 hours, 7 days and 28 days.

d. Resistance to Freezing and Thawing. The hardened concrete containing the admixture under test shall not exceed a weight loss of 4.0 percent in 25 cycles in a 10% NaC1 solution.

e. Length Change. Length changes shall be based on initial measurements taken at the time of removal of the specimens from the molds and final measurements taken at the end of 14 days of air drying. The specimens shall be moist-cured for 14 days followed by 14 days of air drying. Length change shall not be greater than ± 20% of similar concrete containing the reference admixture.

2. Non-Chloride Accelerating Admixtures. Non-chloride accelerating admixtures

shall conform to the requirements outlined in ASTM C494 for Type C or Type E admixtures.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures (ASTM TYPE D). The water-reducing

and retarding admixtures shall reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency, and retard the setting of concrete. Concrete containing this admixture shall conform to the following requirements a. Water Reduction. The mixing water required for concrete containing the

admixture under test shall be reduced at least 5.0 percent when compared to that of the reference concrete without the admixture under test.

b. Time of Setting. The initial set time of the concrete containing the admixture under test shall be increased by at least 50 percent when compared to that of the reference concrete without the admixture under test.

c. Compressive Strength. The compressive strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test, when compared to concrete without the admixture under test, shall be equal or greater at 48 hours, 7 days and 28 days.

d. Resistance to Freezing and Thawing. The hardened concrete containing the admixture under test shall not exceed a weight loss of 4.0 percent, in 25 cycles in a 10% NaC1 solution.


4. Water-Reducing Admixtures (ASTM TYPE A). The water-reducing admixtures

shall reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. Concrete containing this admixture shall meet the requirements of the water reducing and retarding admixtures above except that the time of setting of the concrete containing the admixture under test shall not deviate from that of similar concrete without the admixture under test used as a reference by more than ±1 hour and 15 minutes.



5. Water-Reducing (High Range) Admixtures (ASTM TYPE F). The water-reducing (High Range) admixture shall reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. Concrete containing this admixture shall conform to the following requirements: a. Water Reduction. The mixing water required for concrete containing the

admixture under test shall be reduced at least 12.0 percent when compared to that of the reference concrete without the admixture under test.

b. Time of Setting. The initial set time of the concrete containing the admixture under test when compared to that of the reference concrete shall not be more than 1 hour earlier nor 1 hour, 30 minutes later.

c. Compressive Strength. The compressive strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test when compared to concrete without the admixture under test shall be as follows: Compressive Strength, minimum percent of control:

1 day 3 days

140% 125%

7 days 28 days

115% 110%

The compressive strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test at any test age shall be not less than 100% of that attained at any previous age

d. Resistance to Freezing and Thawing. The hardened concrete containing the admixture under test shall not exceed a weight loss of 4.0 percent in 25 cycles in a 10% NaC1 solution.


D. Water

1. Water used for mixing and curing Portland Cement concrete, mortar, treated subgrade and soil cement shall meet the requirements indicated in Table 712-1, Water. NYSDOT Test Method No. 712-01P shall apply to all Physical tests.

2. Water for curing concrete shall not contain any impurities in sufficient amount to cause discoloration or surface deterioration.

3. Water applied to seeded or sodded areas, plants or planted areas shall be free from oil, have a pH not less than 6.0 nor greater than 8.0 and shall be free from impurities injurious to vegetation.

TABLE 712-1 WATER

Air Content of Mortar, percent by volume Soundness, Autoclave Expansion, percent

Compressive Strength, 7 day, 28 day (optional) percent of compressive strength of

mortar cubes made with standard water Time of Setting, Vicat Test,

Initial Set, minutes Final Set, hours

12.0 Max. 0.50 Max. 90 Min.

45 Min. 8 Max.



Presence of Oil pH, AASHTO T26

Organic Solids, AASHTO T26, ppm Total Inorganic Solids, AASHTO T26, ppm

Chloride Ion Content, ppm Sulphate Ion Content, ppm

None 5.0 - 8.5 200 Max. 2000 Max. 500 Max. 1000 Max.

4. Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic

matter or other deleterious substances. Water sources from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing. Contractor shall sample and test water from other sources and submit test results to the Contracting Officer for approval 10 days prior to proposed use.

E. Curing Materials:

1. The use of covering material that contains or becomes contaminated with sugar in any form, tannic acid or any other substance detrimental to Portland Cement concrete will not be permitted. a. Polyethylene Sheeting shall be white, opaque, free of visible defects,

uniform in appearance, and shall be not less than 0.004 inch thick. Polyethylene sheeting shall conform to the water retention requirements of ASTM C171.

b. Waterproof paper shall conform to ASTM C171. The top side of the waterproof paper shall be white.

2. Membrane curing compound a. Product shall be from NY DOT Approved List with Materials Bureau

2.6 JOINT FILLER

A. For expansion joints.

1. Shall conform to NY DOT “Construction and Materials Specification”, Latest edition, for the type specified on the plans or in the Contract.

B. Sealant, Joint, Non Fuel Resistant, Hot Applied

2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS:

A. General:

1. For additional requirements see paragraph herein entitled “Inspection and Testing”.

2. Laboratory test reports shall be identified with project location and submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval.

3. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate testing procedures with the laboratory and be responsible for incorporating into the paving concrete of the minimum strengths specified.

B. Concrete Mix Design:

1. The concrete mix shall be designed to produce a concrete with the following requirements:



TABLE 501-3 CONCRETE MIXTURES

Design Mix Guidelines (where sand fineness modulus = 2.80) Concrete Class

T.C.M.5

Content (lb/cy)

Sand % Total Agg. (solid volume)

Water/ cementitious mat’ls (by weight)

Air Content % desired (Range)

Slump Range (in)

Type of Coarse Aggregate Gradation

Primary Use

C1

605

35.8

0.44

6.5 (5.0 - 8.0)

1 - 3

CA 2

Pavement: slipform paving, form paving

E

648

35.8

0.44 6.5

(5.0 - 8.0)

3 - 4

CA 2

structural slabs and structural approach slabs

F

716

34.6

0.38

6.5 (5.0 - 8.0)

2 - 3

CA 2

high early strength for pavement or structural applications

NOTES : 1. Slump range for slipform paving is 1 – 2 1/2 inches and for fixed form paving is 1 1/2 – 3 inches.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength

a. Sidewalks, Curbs, Flumes – 4000 psi at 28 days b. Pavement – 4500 psi at 28 days

3. Minimum Flexural Strength a. Pavement - 550 psi at 28 days

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing the placement of base course, the previously constructed subgrade, as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving, shall be inspected for surface tolerances and shall be cleaned of all foreign substances.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF BASE COURSE

A. See Section 31 20 00 for base course installation requirements.

B. No work shall proceed on pavement course until the base has been satisfactorily installed and inspected.

3.3 FORM SETTING

A. The forms shall be set in firm soil cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire length and base width.



B. The form sections shall be staked into position and tightly locked together.

C. The length of pins and quantity provided in each section shall be sufficient to hold the form at the correct line and grade.

D. When tested by a 10 foot straightedge the top of the form shall conform to the requirements specified for the finished surface of the concrete, and the longitudinal axis of the upstanding leg shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the straightedge.

E. Conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings shall be checked, and necessary corrections shall be made immediately prior to placing the concrete.

F. The forms shall be cleaned and coated with non-staining form oil before being set in place.

3.4 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with NY DOT.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Items to be embedded in the concrete shall be positioned accurately before placing concrete and held securely in position.

D. No concrete shall be placed until preparatory work (forms, reinforcement, subgrade, etc) has been approved by the project inspector. Each time the contractor intends to place concrete he shall notify the inspector and obtain approval. The contractor shall notify the inspector at least 24 hours before the intended time for placement.

E. Prior to placement of concrete the forms and subgrade shall be free of debris, ice, snow, extraneous oil, or other harmful substances or coatings. Any oil on the reinforcing steel or other surfaces required to be bonded to the concrete shall be removed. Rock surfaces shall be cleaned by wire brush scrubbing, as necessary, and shall be wetted immediately prior to placement of concrete. Placement of concrete on mud, dried earth, uncompacted fill or frozen subgrade will not be permitted.

F. Concrete placed in hot, dry, or windy conditions, shall have the subgrade lightly dampened with water in advance of concrete placement.

G. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

H. Concrete shall be distributed so that when consolidated and finished, the grade, surface elevation, and dimensions at all points are as required.

I. All edges that will be exposed to view when the structure is completed shall be given a 3/4 inch chamfer unless the edge is indicated to be rounded by a finishing tool. Chamfers shall be made by placing suitable forming strips inside the forms.



J. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as closely as possible to its final position. Concrete shall not be dropped from higher than 2 feet above the surface where it is being deposited. Chutes, pipes or "elephant trunks" will be used where required to distribute the concrete and to avoid dropping the concrete. Concrete shall be thoroughly distributed and worked into corners and around reinforcement as required to prevent formation of voids in the concrete.

K. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by vibrating, rodding, or tamping. Mechanical vibrators shall be used wherever possible. Vibration shall not be applied directly to the reinforcing steel or to the forms.

L. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete damaged in form removal shall be repaired promptly by the contractor at no cost to AAFES.

M. After removal of forms, formed surfaces shall be patched as follows: Remove loose material, cut back unsound concrete, and voids fill holes with a stiff Portland cement mortar mix. Make patching mortar using some white cement with the regular cement and sand. Mix patching mortar to match surrounding concrete.

N. Unless noted otherwise, the concrete may be placed by using forms or by use of a slip form paver. Any concrete not placed as herein prescribed within 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected and disposed of except as provide otherwise herein. If in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the temperature, wind, and/or humidity conditions are such that the quality of concrete will not be adversely affected, the specified placing time may be extended by a maximum of 45 minutes. Concrete with high range water reducing admixture shall not be placed after the slump has dropped by 3 inches or more.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Joints shall conform to the details indicated and shall be perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement.

B. Transverse expansion and contraction joints shall be straight and continuous from edge of the pavement.

C. Expansion Joints shall be formed of preformed filler material. The filler shall be securely held in position by means of approved metal supports which shall remain in the pavement. A removable metal channel cap bar shall be used to hold the parts of the joint in proper position and protect the filler from damage during concreting operations. The cap bar shall be removable without damage to the pavement to provide a space for sealing of the joint. Adjacent sections of filler shall be fitted tightly together and the filler shall extend across the full width of the paving lane in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features that project through, into, and against the pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed in such a manner as to form a complete, uniform separation between the structure and pavement.

D. Construction Joints: Provide if an emergency stop occurs. Remove the concrete



back to indicated location of expansion joint and install dowelled construction joint as shown.

E. Sealing Joints: Joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit, as directed. Crimping or sawing of filler-type joints shall be accomplished immediately before sealing of the joints.

F. Grooving and Sealing Cracks: Random cracks, except those specifically excluded by the Contracting Officer, that occur in the pavement during construction shall be grooved and sealed. The top of the crack shall be grooved to a depth of 3/4 inch and to a width not less than 3/8 inch or more than 5/8 inch by means of an approved mechanical grooving machine. The grooving tool shall be capable of following closely the path of the crack and of widening the top of the crack to the required section without damaging the concrete. Loose material shall be removed and the groove shall be completely sealed with an approved type of joint sealing material.

3.6 FINISHING

A. Formed Surfaces: Fins and loose material shall be removed. Unsound concrete and voids shall be cut back to solid concrete, reamed, brushed-coated with cement grout, and filled solid with a stiff portland-cement-sand mortar mix. Patchwork shall finish flush with adjoining concrete surfaces and, where exposed, shall match adjoining surfaces in texture and color. Patchwork shall be cured for 72 hours. White Portland cement shall be used as needed to attain color match.

B. A finish coat of mortar shall be applied on the exposed surfaces of the monolithic curbs. The mortar shall be composed of 1 part of Portland Cement and 2 parts of fine aggregate. A mortar coat will not be required for extruded curbs.

C. Unformed Surfaces: Surfaces shall be finished to a true plane with no deviation exceeding 5/16 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains. Surfaces shall be screeded and floated to the required level with no coarse aggregate visible before finishing as specified below.

1. Monolithic Finish: Monolithic finish shall be given to slabs unless otherwise specified. After the surface moisture has disappeared, floated-surfaces shall be steel-troweled to a smooth, even, dense finish free from blemish including trowel marks.

2. Nonslip Finish: Nonslip finish shall be given to stair treads, landings, exterior building entrances, vestibules, and sidewalks so indicated by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of main traffic.

3.7 PATCHING

A. Patch to match material, color and texture of surrounding area.

B. Replace defective work if patching is not acceptable to Contracting Officer.

3.8 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Curing:

1. Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surface shall be cured.



2. Immediately after finishing the concrete, the exposed surfaces shall be coated with a membrane-forming curing compound. The compound shall be applied in 2 coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet per gallon for each coat. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be repaved by the method and at the coverage specified above at no additional cost to the Government. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for seven days from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action which might disrupt the continuity of the membrane.

B. Backfilling: After curing, debris shall be removed, and the area adjoining the sidewalk shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with the lines and grades indicated.

C. Protection: The completed sidewalk shall be protected from damage until accepted. The Contractor shall repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Sidewalk that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed by the Contracting Officer.

3.9 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING

1. Perform concrete inspection and tests as listed in “Methods and sampling and Testing”, ASTM C94 latest edition, ACI 301, Chapter 16 and ASTM C78.

2. Slump, air content, density, temperature, and strength of the fresh concrete shall be tested at least once for every 5000 ft2 of pavement and at least once per day

3. Test samples shall meet the curing requirements set forth in the New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications.

END 32 13 13

DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK SECTION 32 13 73 – CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 13 73 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Section includes the following:

1. Expansion and contraction joints within Portland cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between Portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Related Sections including the following:

1. Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving for constructing joints in concrete paving.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00.

1. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that

the products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.

C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until



contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.2 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone Joint Sealants

1. Sealant shall be on NY DOT Approved List for Joint Materials, Pavement for Silicone Joint Sealants.

2. Shall conform to the following requirements:

Property Test Method Specification ASTM D5893 Tack-Free Time, min. ASTM C679 5 hrs. ± 10 min.

Accelerated Weathering ASTM C793 Satisfactory Flow ASTM C639 No Flow

Modulus of Elongation ASTM D412 600% (Minimum) Bond, Non-Immersed ASTM D5329 Satisfactory

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

2.4 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on pre-construction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoin surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position require to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant

application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths

that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer

and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. For placement in vertical joints either of the following procedures may be used.

1. An amount of mixed material may be set aside until partial curing has taken place and carefully trowelled into the joint with a suitable tool.

2. The portion of the joint in roadway shall be poured and cured. The vertical curb faces shall then be taped or formed and the material poured into the vertical joint from the top.

G. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work



progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.


DIVISION 32 – SITE WORK

SECTION 32 17 23 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Pavement Markings 32 17 23 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Traffic line paint and thermoplastic material for traffic striping and marking.

B. Application of traffic striping and control markings.


A. Concrete paving is specified in Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving

B. All other painting is specified under Division 9.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. State of New York Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, most recent edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings and diagrams indicating stripe width of divider stripes and parking stalls; configuration and dimensions of directional arrows, style, and size of letters for indicated designations; configuration and dimensions of international handicapped symbol; and any other traffic control markings on pavement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Paint and Thermoplastic Material: Provide paint and thermoplastic material conforming to the requirements of NY DOT Standard Specifications, colors as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Apply no paint or thermoplastic material until pavement has cured for at least 3 days or for the number of days as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is longer. Ensure that pavement has cured sufficiently to carry application equipment without damage.

B. Provide traffic striping and control markings on pavement, parking stalls, and curbs in accordance with the layout configurations, and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and approved shop drawings.

C. Application equipment and procedures shall conform to the applicable requirements of the NY DOT Standard Specifications. Keep paint thoroughly mixed throughout application.

D. Traffic control markings and parking stalls shall be applied with the use of substantial cutout patterns and templates, or with striping equipment that applies straight, uniform width, sharp lines. Coverage shall be thorough and complete in accordance


SECTION 32 17 23 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Pavement Markings 32 17 23 - 2

with the paint and thermoplastic manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Provide three coats for painted striping and pavement markings. Application rate per coat shall match that specified in the NY DOT Standard Specifications.

2. Apply thermoplastic material at a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch or at the manufacturer’s recommended minimum thickness, whichever is greater.

E. Traffic control markings and parking stalls shall be sharp and accurate, straight where required without fuzziness at edges of lines.

F. Accessible parking stalls shall include the International Symbol for Accessibility.

G. At completion, the Contractor shall check the work thoroughly and shall touch up traffic control markings and parking stalls that are not distinct or thorough in coverage, or are not uniform in color.

3.2 TOLERANCES AND APPEARANCE

A. In addition to the tolerances and appearance requirements specified in the NY DOT Standard Specifications, edges shall be uniform with local variations not exceeding 1/8 inch per foot and surfaces shall be smooth and uniform.

B. Letter sizes and patterns shall be as indicated on the Drawings with variations of not more than plus or minus 15 percent in dimension.


DIVISION 32 – SITEWORK Section 32 31 00 – FENCES & GATES

FENCES & GATES 32 31 00 -1

1. GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Contractor provide:

a. Aluminum posts. b. Aluminum gates, hinges and cane bolts. c. Fittings and accessories to complete fence enclosures.

1.2 RELATED WORK


1. Division 1 – General Requirements. 2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving. 6. Section 32 13 73 – Concrete Paving Joint Sealants.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,

and Tubes. 3. ASTM D822 - Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related

Coatings. 4. ASTM D2794 - Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact). 5. ASTM D3363 - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All products covered under this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Fences and Gates: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of component for fences and gates from one source with resources to provide fences and gates of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accord with 01 33 00:

B. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:


1. Fence and gate posts, rails and fittings. 2. Gates, hardware and attachments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations of gate, posts, rails, hardware, and accessories. 2. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. 3. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and

operational clearances, and details of post anchorage, attachment and bracing.

D. Samples: Provide 12 inch long samples of each component.


A. General: Deliver and store in accord with Section 01 66 00.

B. Packaged Materials:

1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

2. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed packages.


A. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of work with other supporting, adjacent, contiguous or otherwise related material trades.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard warranty.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the following provide products as manufactured by Ametco Manufacturing Corporation, 4326 Hamann Parkway, Willoughby, Ohio 44096.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

B. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6.

C. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, and water-reducing and plasticizing additives.

2.3 FENCE SYSTEM

A. Type: Ornamental fencing system consisting of vertical, fixed louver, modular fence panels fabricated with extruded aluminum framing bars and supported by extruded aluminum fence posts.

1. Style: Saturn Aluminum Fixed Louver Fencing as manufactured by Ametco Manufacturing Corporation.

B. Fence Panel:

1. Fixed louver blades: Extruded tubular aluminum louver blades spaced at 4 inches to provide 100 percent direct visual screening.


a. Size: 1/2 by 4 inches. b. Material thickness: 0.09 inch.

2. Framing bars: Extruded aluminum flat bars welded to ends of louvers. 3. Panel height: As indicated on drawings. 4. Panel width: As indicated on drawings.

C. Posts:

1. Type: 5-inch square extruded tubular aluminum sections with solid aluminum caps. 2. Length: As indicated on drawings.

2.4 GATES

A. Type: Hinged swinging single and double gate as indicated on drawings.

1. Construction: Welded frame fabricated from 2-inch square extruded aluminum tubing with aluminum fixed louver panels to match fencing material.

a. Size: As indicated on drawings. b. Hardware:

1.) Hinges: Heavy duty, brass bearing.

a) Provide 2 hinges for each leaf up to 6 feet high and 1 additional hinge for each additional 24 inches in height or fraction thereof.

2.) Latch: 3/4 inch diameter slide bolt to accommodate padlock. 3.) For double gates provide padlockable, 5/8 inch diameter center cane

bolt assembly and strike.

2.5 FACTORY FINISH

A. Large gate panels shall be coated with 2-part polyurethane coating.

B. Polyurethane coating: 1.0 mil dry film thickness of coating of test panel cured 30 minutes at 180 degrees F and aged 14 days shall resist the following test conditions without failure:

1. 5 percent salt spray for 500 hours. 2. 100 percent relative humidity for 1000 hours. 3. Water immersion for 100 hours. 4. 20 double rubs with cloth saturated with either lacquer thinner, acetone, MEK,

gasoline, or xylene. 5. Exposure to lubricating oils, hydraulic fluids, and cutting oils. 6. 16 cycles of 24 hours at 100 percent humidity, 24 hours at 10 degrees F, and 24

hours at 77 degrees F. 7. Hardness: H to 2H. 8. Flexibility: 1/8 inch conical mandrel.

C. Color: Match Sherwin-Williams color number 7025, “Backdrop” designated as PNT 6 on Drawings.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Prior to fabrication, field verify required dimensions.


C. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Contracting Officer or designated representative.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fencing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Install fence posts plumb and level.

C. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged panels.

1. Remove damaged components from site and replace.

D. Secure fence panels with standard stainless steel bolts to fence posts after posts have been set in footings.

E. Gates:

1. Install gates and adjust hardware for smooth operation. 2. Provide concrete center foundation depth and drop rod retainers at center of

double swinging gate openings.

F. Touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by manufacturer and matching original coating.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.

B. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

C. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

END 32 31 00


SECTION 32 92 00 – TURF & GRASSES

Turf & Grasses 32 92 00 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Seeding, optional Hydroseeding, mulching, and fertilizing.

B. Maintenance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02205 - Soil Materials: Topsoil material.

B. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Rough grading of site.

C. Section 02225 - Trenching: Rough grading over underground utility installations.

D. Section 02923 - Landscape Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the work of this section.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section01 77 00 - Project Closeout. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, recommended cutting methods and

maximum grass height, types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.

C. Product Data: Submit seed vendors' certified statement for grass seed mixture required,

stating botanical and common names, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species.

D. Certificate of Compliance: See Regulatory requirements.


A. Provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging.





A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from Project Manager indicating approval of seed mixture.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with Specification Section 01 65 00 – Material and Equipment, and Section 01 66 00 – Storage and Protection.

B. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed that is wet or moldy or that has

been otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be acceptable.

C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Provide lawn maintenance including, but not limited to watering, cutting, weeding, fertilizing, re-seeding areas that are not taking hold for all seeded areas for sixty (60) days after the Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SEED MIXTURE

A. Seed Mixture: Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act.

B. Seed mix required as follows: 25% Chewings Fescue 25% Creeping Red Fescue 17% Hard Fescue 8% Elite Hybrid Bluegrass 25% Elite Perennial Ryegrass

2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: As specified in Specification SECTION 02205 - SOIL MATERIALS. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Mulching Material: Wood cellulose fiber, free of growth or germination inhibiting ingredients.

B. Fertilizer: FS O-F-241, recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived

from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil ,as indicated in analysis to the following proportions: Nitrogen 12 percent, phosphoric acid 12 percent, soluble potash 12 percent.




C. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit

vigorous growth of grass.

1. Water will be provided to the Landscape Contractor at the building hose bibbs.

2. The Landscape Contractor shall furnish all equipment and hose as required to properly water the seeded areas.

D. Herbicide: Teflan or approved equal.

E. Protection Stakes: Softwood lumber, chisel pointed.

F. Protection String: Inorganic fiber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared topsoil base is ready to receive the work of this Specification Section. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare subsoil as per Specification Section 31 21 00 Landscape Grading.


A. Place topsoil as per Specification Section 31 21 00 Landscape Grading

3.04 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 30 pounds per 1,000 square feet.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction.

C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed.

D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 SEEDING

A. Apply seed at a rate of 8-10lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly.

B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on same day.

C. Planting Season: As established by the Project Manager.

D. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods.

E. Roll seeded area with roller not exceeding 112 lbs.




F. Immediately following seeding and compacting, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches .

Maintain mulch clear of shrubs and trees.

G. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate the depth of the topsoil.

3.06 OPTIONAL HYDROSEEDING

A. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder at a rate of 6 lbs per 1000 sq ft evenly in two intersecting directions.

B. Do not hydroseed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on the same day.

C. Immediately following seeding, apply mulch to a thickness of 1/8 inches. Maintain mulch

clear of shrubs and trees.

D. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to the depth of the topsoil.

3.07 SEED PROTECTION

A. Identify seeded areas with stakes and string around area periphery. Set string height to 36 inches. Space stakes at 60 inches.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. Verify areas that will be mowed FOR ONLY ONE INITIAL CUTTING with Contracting Officer. Refer to Landscape Plans.

B. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.

C. Immediately remove clippings from Government Property after mowing and trimming.

D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.

E. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities.

F. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.

G. Immediately reseed areas which show bare spots.

H. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. 3.09 SCHEDULE

A. All project disturbed areas not scheduled to receive impervious materials, or plant bed areas, as shown on drawings, shall receive grass seed in accordance with this Specification Section. Verify extend of work with Project Manager.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 93 00 – PLANTS

Plants 32 93 00 - 1


A. Preparation of subsoil and topsoil.

B. Topsoil bedding.

C. New trees, plants, and ground cover.

D. Mulch and fertilizer.

E. Maintenance. F. Tree Pruning.


A. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.

B. Section31 21 00 – Landscape Grading.

C. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities.

D. Section 32 92 00 – Turf & Grasses.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock.

B. NAA (National Arborist Association) - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.

B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 30 00 – Shop Drawing, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Certificate of Inspection of Plant Material by State or Federal Authorities.



Plants 32 93 00 - 2

C. Maintenance Data: Include pruning and trimming method; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer for all installed plants.

D. Submit list of plant material sources.

E. Submit one 2 lb bagged sample of decorative gravel for approval by Project Manager.


A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with

minimum three years experience and approved by nursery.

C. Tree Pruner Qualifications: Company specializing in pruning trees with proof of Arborist Certification.

D. Tree Pruning: NAA - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.

E. Maintenance Services: Performed by qualified installer.

F. Plant Materials: Nursery grown trees and shrubs grown in a recognized nursery in

accordance with good horticultural practice with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide only healthy, vigorous stock, free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Do not make substitutions of tree and shrub materials. If required landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Project Manager and a proposal for use of equivalent material.

1.08 INSPECTION

A. The Project Manager may inspect trees and shrubs either at the place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Project Manager retains the right to inspect trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site and replace with new material.


A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of plants, fertilizer and herbicide mixture.

C. Plant Materials: Certified by federal or state department of agriculture Described by

ASTM Z60.1; free of disease or hazardous insects.



Plants 32 93 00 - 3


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 66 00.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, name of manufacturer, and certification of conformance to State regulations.

C. Protect and maintain plant materials until planted.

D. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Do not deliver more plant

material than can be planted in one day. Keep plants moist.

E. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread.

F. Prune, thin out, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural

practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from trees. Required shrub sizes indicated are size after pruning. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Any shrubs sheared into smooth regular shapes will be rejected.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install plant materials when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F (2 degrees C) or rise above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C); where soil is frozen or muddy.

B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr).

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide one-year warranty.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season after all plant materials are installed; replace dead or unhealthy plants, or plants dead beyond normal pruning limits.

C. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing

season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. 1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintain plant life for sixty (60) days after Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Maintain plant life immediately after placement until plants are well established and exhibit a vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until termination of warranty period.

C. Maintenance to include:

1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree mulch rings. 2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides.



Plants 32 93 00 - 4

3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. 4. Water sufficient to saturate root system. 5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches. 6. Disease control. 7. Replacement of mulch.

D. Inspect plant life at a minimum of once per week. Perform maintenance promptly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER

A. Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work.

2.02 SIZE

A. Provide trees and shrubs of the sizes indicated in plant list and in accordance with dimensional relationship requirements of ANSI Z60.1 for kind and shape of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of larger size than specified may be used if approved by the Project Manager. Size of roots or balls shall be increased proportionately.

B. Plugs shall be in a minimum 2” square open-bottomed pots.

Plugs shall be thoroughly rooted through the container. No species shall be substituted without approval of the architect.

2.03 MEASUREMENTS

A. Measure trees and shrubs with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4 inches caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread dimensions: do not measure from branch or root tip to tip.

2.04 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Provide topsoil that is fertile, friable, naturally loamy, surface soil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds, and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. On-site soil may be used, if it is determined acceptable by the Project Manager.

B. If on-site is not suitable, obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having similar soil

characteristics to that found at site of work. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil is at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

2.05 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS

A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: Nitrogen 11 percent, phosphoric acid 8 percent, soluble potash 4 percent.



Plants 32 93 00 - 5

B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or

acidic materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4 to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.

C. Bone Meal: Raw, finely ground, commercial grade, minimum of 3 percent nitrogen and

20 percent phosphorous.

D. Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates.

E. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants.

1. Water will be provided by the contractor at the nearest available source in the

vicinity of the project. Contractor to furnish hose and other equipment. 2.06 MULCH MATERIALS

A. Mulching Material: Mulch shall be a 50/50 mix of fine grade of shredded hardwood bark, 'Paygro' or an approved equal and leaf compost. Mulch shall be free of foreign matter and wood particles over 6" in length or 2" in width. Mulch may be obtained from the Fort Drum Recycling Center (depending on availability).

B. Crushed Decorative Gravel: # 3 size. Provide Project Manager with sample for approval. 2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Anti-desiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard excessive loss, of moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer’s fully identified containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2.08 PLANT SOIL MIX

A. A uniform mixture of 1 part topsoil and 1 part compost. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared subsoil is ready to receive work; coordinate with lawn work; install plant materials after lawn grading, but prior to seed or sod work. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.

B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare subsoil as per Specification Section 31 20 00.



Plants 32 93 00 - 6

B. Dig pits and beds 6 inches larger than plant root system.


A. Place topsoil as per Specification Section 31 20 00.

3.04 FERTILIZING

A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil.

C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.

D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 PLANTING

A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Project Manager.

B. Space plants in beds as shown on drawings. Set minimum 3' from structures, pavement edges, buildings, face of curb or as noted on drawings.

C. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 6

inches under each plant. Remove all twine, bags and roping from base of trunks. Remove top 1/3 of the wire from root balls having wire baskets. Remove all rot-proof burlap.

D. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.

3.06 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune trees to NAA Class 1 - Fine Pruning. B. Remove and replace excessively pruned or malformed stock resulting from improper

pruning. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 42 10 - Quality Control: Field inspection and testing.

B. Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to or during planting.

3.08 MAINTENANCE



Plants 32 93 00 - 7

A. Neatly trim plants where necessary removing dead or broken branches. Do not sheer plants into smooth, regular shapes.

B. Immediately remove clippings after trimming.

C. Water to prevent soil from drying out.

1. Water will be provided to the Landscape Contractor at the building hose bibbs. 2. The Landscape Contractor shall furnish equipment and hose as needed.

D. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.09 SCHEDULE - PLANT LIST

A. See schedule on Landscape Plan. 3.10 SITE RESTORATION

A. Daily: At the end of each day, the grounds shall be cleaned of all landscape contractor- related refuse and debris.

B. Upon completion: All paved surfaces affected by planting operations will be swept and hosed off. All plant beds shall be free of weeds.


Division 33 – Utilties

Section 33 01 10 – Pressure and Leakage Tests

Pressure and Leakage Tests 33 01 10 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Test all piping, valves, and appurtenances installed under this Contract. Testing shall be performed concurrent with installation. Do not install more than 1,000 feet of pipe without being tested, unless approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit schedules and procedures to CONTRACTING OFFICER for testing of all parts of the water main installed in accordance with this Contract. Submit the schedule at least seven days prior to any testing.

B. Prior to commissioning the line, all test reports shall be submitted to Fort Drum, Master Planning and Environmental Division with a cover letter from the designer of record stating “In accordance with Environmental Conservation Law, ECL 17-0819, I hereby affirm under penalty of perjury that the information provide is true to the best of my knowledge and belief. False statements made herein are punishable as a Class A misdemeanor pursuant to Section 210.45 of the Penal Law.”

C. Video television records shall be provided on DVD medium.

D. As-built information. Location and top feature elevation whether below grade or above grade shall be reported, along with actual materials used, shall be referenced to the New York State Plane Central grid based on the NAD 83 datum in US survey feet. One digital copy of the as-built mark-ups shall be provided to the Fort Drum DPW.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish the pump, pipe connections, and all necessary apparatus for the pressure and leakage tests including gauges and metering devices. CONTRACTING OFFICER reserves the option to furnish the gauges and metering devices for the tests. Excavate, backfill, and furnish all necessary assistance for conducting the tests.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Leakage Tests must be in accordance with ASTM C969 and C1244. Leakage test are required for all gravity lines. Perform hydrostatic pressure tests in




accordance with AWWA C600, Section 5.2 - Hydrostatic Testing after the pipe or section of pipe has been laid, thrust blocking cured (min. 5 days), and the trench is completely or partially backfilled. Where practical, testing shall be performed fully isolated from the active distribution system.

B. Contractor may, at his option, completely backfill the trench or partially backfill

the trench over the center portion of each pipe section to be tested. However, CONTRACTING OFFICER may direct the Contractor to completely backfill the trench if local traffic or safety conditions require.

C. Perform hydrostatic testing at a pressure of no less than 150 psi for a minimum

duration of 2 hours. Fort Drum DPW, O&M will be scheduled to witness the testing. Water lines shall be tested to 1.5 times the operating pressure or 150 psi, whichever is greater. Fire lines shall test to 200 psi.

D. Valves shall not be operated in either direction at a differential pressure

exceeding the rated valve working pressure. A test pressure greater than the rated valve working pressure can result in trapped test pressure between the gates of a double-disc gate valve. For tests exceeding the rated valve working pressure, the test setup should include a provision, independent of the valve, to reduce the line pressure to the rated valve working pressure on completion of the test. The valve can then be opened enough to equalize the trapped pressure with the line pressure, or the valve can be fully opened if desired.

E. The test pressure shall not exceed the rated working pressure or differential

pressure of the valves when the pressure boundary of the test section includes closed, resilient-seated gate valves or butterfly valves.

F. Contractor shall attach a tapping sleeve and valve assembly to the main, and

pressure test the assembly prior to making the tap. The required test pressure shall be determined in the same manner as for pipe. The test is acceptable if there is no pressure drop in 2 hours at test pressure. Pressure test shall be witnessed by DPW and O&M.

3.02 FILLING AND TESTING

A. Slowly fill each segregated section of pipeline with water ensuring that all air is expelled. Extreme care must be taken to ensure that all air is expelled during the filling of pipe. The line shall stand full of water for at least twenty-four hours prior to testing to allow all air to escape. If necessary, tap the main at points of highest elevation to expel air as the pipe is filled. Remove the corporation stops and plug the taps after successfully filling the pipeline and expelling all air as approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

B. Apply the specified test pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation,

using a suitable pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the CONTRACTING OFFICER. If the elevation of the high point of the pipeline being tested is such that the pressure during testing will be below 85% of the required test pressure, CONTRACTING OFFICER will require a separate test to




be performed on this section of pipeline. In lieu of a separate test, the test pressure measured at the lowest elevation may be increased, within the pressure rating of the pipeline material, such that the resulting pressure at the highest point exceeds 85% of the required test pressure. The test will be conducted for at least two (2) hours at the required test pressure ± 5 psi.

C. Conduct a leakage test concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage is defined

as the volume of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipeline to maintain pressure within ± 5 psi of the test pressure after it is filled and purged of air. Measure the volume of water using a calibrated container or meter.

D. No pipeline installation will be accepted by CONTRACTING OFFICER if the

leakage is greater than that shown in the following table:

Allowable Leakage per 1000 ft. of Pipeline*---gph __________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________ *If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be the sum of the computed leakage for each size.

The table has been generated from the formula: 000,148

* PDSL =

Where: L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour,

S is the length of pipe in feet, D is the nominal pipe diameter in inches, and P is the average test pressure in psig.

E. Should any test disclose damaged or defective materials or leakage greater than that permitted, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s expense, locate and




repair and/or replace the damaged or defective materials. Materials used for repair must be approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER and meet the relevant specifications. Repeat the tests until the leakage is within the permitted allowance and is satisfactory to CONTRACTING OFFICER.


Division 33 – Utilities

Section 33 01 15 – Disinfecting Pipelines

Disinfecting Pipelines 33 01 15 - 1

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Flush and disinfect all pipelines installed under this Contract as indicated in the Drawings. This would include furnishing the necessary labor, tools, transportation, and other equipment for the operation of valves, hydrants, and blowoffs during chlorination. Install, and if directed by the CONTRACTING OFFICER Project Manager, remove all chlorination taps required for disinfection. Disinfection will be performed under the supervision of CONTRACTING OFFICER.

1.02 WORK BY POST

A. Contractor must coordinate for provision of water testing, flushing and

disinfecting pipelines. Following the pipe disinfection, two bacterial samples for each approved test site will be taken 24 hours apart and will be collected and laboratory tested. Fort Drum Public Works O&M will be contacted to schedule a witness to the disinfection and sample collections. Upon sample acceptance DPW will be notified to facilitate the final connection to the existing main. Contact for testing schedule is DPW O&M Division, Work Reception, 315-772-5495.

1.03 PROTECTION

A. Chlorine disinfection and dechlorination shall be under the direct supervision of someone familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical properties of the form of chlorine used. They shall be trained and equipped to handle any emergency that may arise. All personnel involved shall observe appropriate safety practices to protect working personnel and the public.

B. The forwards of AWWA Standards B300 and B301 contain information and

additional reference material regarding the safe handling of hypochlorites and liquid chlorine. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with this information prior to performing any disinfection work.

1.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product

Data, & Submittals

B. Submit Disinfection Procedures. Base DPW and O&M must approve Disinfection Procedures prior to begin disinfection process. Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Connection Plan including type of connection 2. Testing Plan of the connection and valve 3. Sanitation Plan of the connection. 4. Source of water supply for testing. 5. Pressure testing plan for main/lateral lines




6. Disinfection plan

C. All test reports shall be submitted to Fort Drum, Master Planning and Environmental Division with a cover letter from the designer of record stating “In accordance with Environmental Conservation Law, ECL 17-0819, I hereby affirm under penalty of perjury that the information provide is true to the best of my knowledge and belief. False statements made herein are punishable as a Class A misdemeanor pursuant to Section 210.45 of the Penal Law.”

D. As-built information. Location and top feature elevation whether below grade or above grade shall be reported, along with actual materials used, shall be referenced to the New York State Plane Central grid based on the NAD 83 datum in US survey feet. One digital copy of the as-built mark-ups shall be provided to the Fort Drum DPW.

1.05 RELATED WORK

A. Observe the precautions described in Section 33 11 00 – Piping – General Provisions to avoid contamination during installation of the pipeline.

1.06 REFERENCES

A. Refer to current AWWA Standard C651 for Disinfecting Water Mains.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish sodium hypochorite or calcium hypochlorite and injection equipment as needed to disinfect all pipelines and appurtenances.

B. Sodium hypochlorite solution shall contain 5 percent to 15 percent available chlorine and shall be packaged in glass, rubber-lined, or plastic containers, one quart to 5 gallons in size.

C. Calcium hypochlorite is available in granular form or in approximately 5-g tablets,

and contains approximately 65% available chlorine by weight. The material should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark environment to minimize its deterioration. Do not use calcium hypochlorite intend for swimming pool disinfection, as this material (containing trichloroisocyanuric acid) has been sequestered and is extremely difficult to eliminate from the pipe after the desired contact time had been achieved.

D. Calcium hypochlorite must conform to AWWA B300.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION




A. All pipelines shall be pressure and leak tested, flushed, and cleaned of debris and dirt prior to application of the disinfectant. Flushing shall continue until the volume in the newly installed main has turned over at least one time unless CONTRACTING OFFICER determines that conditions do not permit the required volume to be safely discharged to waste.

3.02 APPLICATION OF DISINFECTANT

A. Methods to be used for disinfection are those detailed in ANSI/AWWA C651

Disinfecting Water Mains.

3.03 WATER MAINS

Three methods of chlorination are described below. The third method, using tablets of hypochlorite, is only permitted by expressed approval of CONTRACTING OFFICER and under no circumstance allowed for projects of 2000 feet or more. Otherwise, information in the forward of AWWA Standard C651 will be helpful in determining the best method to be used.

A. Continuous Feed Method

1. Set-up

a. The continuous feed method consists of completely filling the main to

remove all air pockets, flushing the completed main to remove particulates, and then refilling the main with chlorinated potable water. The potable water shall be chlorinated, so that after a 24-hour holding period in the main, there will be a free chlorine residual of not less than 10 mg/L in collected samples.

b. Chlorine can be applied in advance of preliminary flushing by swabbing

joints with bleach or placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the pipe in areas where contamination is suspected. In any such case, the Contractor shall make sure and take appropriate action to make sure that the flushed water is dechlorinated.

c. Preliminary flushing - Prior to being chlorinated, fill the main to eliminate

air pockets and flush to remove particulates. The flushing velocity in the main shall be not less than 2.5 ft/sec unless the CONTRACTING OFFICER Project Manager determines that conditions do not permit the required flow to be discharged to waste. Table 1 below shows the rates of flow required to produce a velocity of 2.5 ft/sec in pipes of various sizes.

NOTE: Flushing is no substitute for preventive measures during construction.

Certain contaminants such as caked deposits resist flushing at any feasible velocity.

TABLE 1




Required Flow and Openings to Flush Pipelines (40 psi Residual Pressure in Water Main)*

Pipe

Diameter (inches)

Flow Required to Produce 2.5 ft/sec

velocity in main (gpm)

Size of Tap, (inches) Number of 2½-inch Hydrant

Outlets to Use

1 1-1/2 2 Number of taps on

Pipe † 4 100 1 - - 1 6 200 - 1 - 1 8 400 - 2 1 1 10 600 - 3 2 1 12 900 - - 2 2 16 1600 - - 4 2

*With a 40 psi pressure in the main with the hydrant flowing to atmosphere, a 2½-inch hydrant outlet will discharge approximately 1,000 gpm and a 4½-inch hydrant outlet will discharge approximately 2,500 gpm. † Number of taps on pipe based on discharging through 5 feet of galvanized iron pipe with one 90° elbow.

d. In mains of 24-inches or larger diameter, an acceptable alternative to flushing is to broom-sweep the main, carefully removing all sweepings prior to chlorinating the main.

2. Chlorinating the Main

a. Flow water from the existing distribution system or other approved source

of supply at a constant, measured rate into the newly laid water main. In the absence of a meter, approximate the rate by placing a Pitot gauge in the discharge or measuring the time to fill a container of known volume.

b. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new

main, dose the water entering the new main with chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 25 mg/L free chlorine. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals to ensure that this concentration is provided. Measure chlorine in accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of the AWWA Manual M12 or of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.

c. Table 2 below gives the amount of chlorine required for each 100 feet of

pipe of various diameters. Solutions of 1 percent chlorine may be prepared with calcium hypochlorite. The solution requires 1 pound of calcium hypochlorite in 8 gallons of water.




TABLE 2 Chlorine Required to produce 25 mg/L

Concentration in 100 feet of Pipe by Diameter

Pipe Diameter (inches)

100% Chlorine (lb)

1% Chlorine Solution (gallons)

4 0.013 0.16 6 0.030 0.36 8 0.054 0.65

10 0.085 1.02 12 0.120 1.44 16 0.217 2.60

d. During the application of chlorine, position valves so that the strong chlorine solution in the main being treated will not flow into water mains in active service. Do not stop the chlorine application until the entire main is filled with heavily chlorinated water. Keep the chlorinated water in the main for at least 24 hours. During this time, operate all valves and hydrants in the section treated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24-hour period, the treated water in all portions of the main shall have a residual of not less than 10 mg/L free chlorine.

e. Hypochlorite solution may be applied to the water main with a gasoline or

electrically powered chemical feed pump designed for feeding chlorine solutions. Feed lines shall be of such material and strength as to safely withstand the corrosion caused by the concentrated chlorine solutions and the maximum pressures that may be created by the pumps. Check all connections for tightness before the solution is applied to the main.

f. If gaseous chlorine in solution is permitted by the CONTRACTING

OFFICER and proposed by the Contractor, the preferred equipment for the gas application employs a feed vacuum-operated chlorinator to mix the chlorine gas, in combination with a booster pump for injecting the chlorine gas solution water into the main to be disinfected. Direct feed chlorinators cannot be used. (A direct feed chlorinator is one which operates solely from the pressure in the chlorine cylinder.)

B. Slug Method

1. Set-up

a. The slug method consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the main during construction; completely filling the main to eliminate all air pockets, flushing the main to remove particulates, and slowly flowing a slug of water containing 100 mg/L of free chlorine through the main so that all parts of the main and its appurtenances will be exposed to the highly chlorinated water for a period of not less than 3 hours.




2. Chlorinating the main.

a. At the option of CONTRACTING OFFICER, place calcium hypochlorite

granules in the main during construction. The purpose of this procedure is to provide a strong chlorine concentration in the first flow of flushing water especially to fill annular spaces in pipe joints. Flush the main to eliminate air and remove particulates to include management of dechlorination and discharged water.

b. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new

main, dose the water entering the new main with chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 100 mg/L free chlorine. Measure the chlorine concentration at regular intervals to ensure that this concentration is provided. Measure chlorine in accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of the AWWA Manual M12 or of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. The chlorine shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient period to develop a solid column or "slug" of chlorinated water that will, as it moves through the main, expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of approximately 100 mg/L for at least 3 hours.

c. The free chlorine residual shall be measured in the slug as it moves

through the main. If at any time it drops below 50 mg/L, stop the flow, relocate the chlorination equipment to the head of the slug, and as flow is resumed, apply chlorine to restore the free chlorine in the slug to not less than 100 mg/L.

d. As the chlorinated water flows past fittings and valves, operate related

valves and hydrants so as to disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches.

C. Tablet Method

1. Set-up

a. The tablet method consists of adhering calcium hypochlorite tablets in the water main as it is being installed and then filling the main with potable water when installation is completed. This method may be used only if the pipes and appurtenances are kept clean and dry during construction and with permission by CONTRACTING OFFICER for short main installations.

2. Chlorinating the Main

a. Placing of Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets -. During construction, 5-g calcium

hypochlorite tablets shall be placed in each section of pipe. Also, one such tablet shall be placed in each hydrant, hydrant branch, and other appurtenance. The number of 5-g tablets required for each pipe section shall be 0.0012 d²L rounded to the next higher integer, where d is the inside pipe diameter, in inches, and L is the length of the pipe section, in




feet. Table 3 below shows the number of tablets required for commonly used sizes of pipe. The tablets shall be attached by a food-grade NSF approved adhesive. There shall be no adhesive on the tablet except on the broadside attached to the surface of the pipe and no adhesive applied or spilled on the pipe surface. Excess adhesive must be removed immediately using mechanical means or an NSF-approved adhesive solvent. Attach all the tablets inside and at the top of the main, with approximately equal numbers of tablets at each end of a given pipe length. If the tablets are attached before the pipe section is placed in the trench, their position shall be marked on the section so it can be readily determined that the pipe is installed with the tablets at the top.

TABLE 3 Number of 5-g Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets required for dose of 25 mg/L

b. Filling and Contact - When installation has been completed, the main shall be filled with water at a rate such that water within the main will flow at a velocity no greater than 1 ft/sec. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that air pockets are eliminated. This water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours. If the water temperature is less than 41°F (5°C), the water shall remain in the pipe for at least 48 hours.

3.04 DISPOSAL OF HEAVILY CHLORINATED WATER

A. Do not keep heavily chlorinated water in contact with pipe for more than 48 hours

after the applicable retention period. In order to prevent damage to the pipe lining or corrosion damage to the pipe itself, flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main fittings, valves, and branches until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally prevailing in the distribution system or is acceptable for domestic use.

B. Contact Fort Drum Environmental Scientist and Water/Wastewater Program

Manager, Diane Covell (315-523-2143) prior to discharge of the water. Provide

Length of Pipe Section, ft

Pipe Diameter

13 or less 18 20 30 40

inches

Number of 5-g Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets

6

1 1 1 2 2

8

1 2 2 3 4

12

3 4 4 6 7

16

4 6 7 10 13




the chlorine residual and water volume for approval. Contractor shall also contact DPW O&M Division 48 hours prior to discharging the water from disinfection activities into the sewer.

3.05 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING

A. After final flushing and before the water main is placed in service, the first of two

consecutive sets of acceptable samples can be collected from the new main. The second set of samples must be taken at least 24 hours after the first set of samples. The main should not be flushed between collection of the first and second set of samples except to clear the sample site to collect the second sample. At least one set of samples shall be collected from every 1,200 feet, of the new water main, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch when possible or as required by regulatory requirements.

B. Samples shall be collected by a person knowledgeable in collecting samples for

bacteriological sampling or arrange for CONTRACTING OFFICER to collect the sample. Coordinate with CONTRACTING OFFICER and submit samples to CONTRACTING OFFICER for testing of bacteriological (chemical and physical) quality. Testing will be in accordance with Standard Methods of the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Samples shall show the absence of coliform organisms; and the presence of a chlorine residual. Samples shall also be tested for turbidity, pH, and standard heterotrophic plate count (HPC). HPC levels must be consistent with levels normally found in the distribution system to which the new main is connected.

C. Bacteriological tests must show complete absence of coliforms and acceptable

HPCs. If tests show the presence of coliform or unacceptable HPCs, perform additional flushing and disinfection of the pipeline until acceptable tests are obtained, all at no cost to CONTRACTING OFFICER. The Contractor will not be charged for the additional testing performed by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

3.06 RETESTING AND TESTING SOURCE WATER

A. At the time of initial flushing the main to remove material and test for air pockets,

Contractor may request CONTRACTING OFFICER to continue flushing until the desired chlorine residual is met at the discharge point. Notification must be provided in advance and the Contractor shall be prepared to test for chlorine at intervals of no more than five minutes as the water clears. This will provide the Contractor with some assurance that the source water is chlorinated.

B. If the subsequent tests for bacteriological contamination conducted by the

Contractor fail, the Contractor may request CONTRACTING OFFICER to continue flush from the source water into the new pipe system until a chlorine residual is found at the discharge point. Notification must be provided in advance and the Contractor shall be prepared to test for chlorine at intervals of no more than five minutes as the water clears. The operation of all existing system valves shall be by CONTRACTING OFFICER at the Contractor’s




expense and the discharge point must be opened prior to opening existing valves to avoid contamination. This will provide the Contractor with some assurance that the source water is chlorinated for subsequent tests.

3.07 DISINFECTION PROCEDUCE FOR CUT INTO OR REPAIR MAIN

A. The following procedures apply primarily when existing mains are wholly or

partially dewatered. Leaks or breaks that are repaired with clamping devices while the mains remain full of pressurized water may present little danger of contamination and therefore may not require disinfection.

1. Trench Treatment – When an existing main is opened either by accident or

by design, the excavation will likely be wet and may be badly contaminated from nearby sewers. Liberal quantities of hypochlorite applied to open trench areas will lessen the danger from this pollution. Tablets could have the advantage in this situation, as they dissolve slowly and continue to release hypochlorite as water is pumped from the excavation.

2. Swabbing With Hypochlorite Solution – The interior of the pipe and fittings

(particularly couplings and sleeve) used in making the repair shall be swabbed or sprayed with 1% hypochlorite solution before they are installed.

3. Flushing – Thorough flushing is the most practical means of removing

contamination introduced during repairs. If valve and hydrant location permit, flushing toward the work location from both directions is recommended. Flushing shall be started as soon as the repairs are completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated.

4. Slug Chlorination – Where practical, in addition to flushing, the section of the

main in which the break is located shall be isolated, all service connections shut off, and the section flushed and chlorinated as described in Paragraph 3.03B above (Slug Method). The dose may be increased to as much as 300 mg/L and the contact time reduced to as little as 15 minutes. After chlorination, flushing shall be resumed and continued until discolored water is eliminated and the chlorine concentration in the water exiting the main is no higher than the prevailing water in the distribution system or that which is acceptable for domestic use.

5. Bacteriological Samples – Bacteriological samples following procedures in

Paragraph 3.05 above shall be taken after repairs are completed to provide a record for determining the procedure’s effectiveness. If the direction of flow is unknown, then samples shall be taken on each side of the main break. If positive bacteriological samples are recorded, then the situation shall be evaluated by CONTRACTING OFFICER to determine corrective action. Daily sampling shall be continued until two consecutive negative samples are recorded.



Section 33 01 30 – Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers

Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers 33 01 30 - 1

1. PART 1: GENERAL


A. Gravity flow sanitary sewers are required to have straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes.

B. Flexible pipe, including "semi-rigid" pipe, is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than 30 days after backfilling and compacting of line segment but prior to final acceptance using standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances.

C. All new sanitary sewers shall be Mandrel Tested. If the Mandrel Test is failed, the pipe shall also be televised in accordance with the requirements outlined in this Specification.

D. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration

1. The total exfiltration, as determined by hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at minimum test head of 2 feet above crown of pipe at upstream manhole or 2 feet above groundwater elevation, whichever is greater.

2. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below groundwater level, use infiltration test in lieu of exfiltration test. Total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater elevation must be at least 2 feet above crown of pipe at upstream manhole.

3. Refer to Table 1 at the end of this section, for water test allowable leakage in sewers. Perform leakage testing to verify that leakage criteria are met.

E. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this Specification and the any State or local environmental agency requirements.

1. Refer to Table 2 at the end of this section, for time allowed for pressure loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig;

2. Refer to Table 3 at the end of this section, for minimum testing times for low pressure air test; and

3. Refer to Table 4 at the end of this section, for vacuum test time table.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Test Plan: Test plan shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer and DPW O&M for review two weeks prior to testing. Test plan shall include testing procedures, methods, equipment, and tentative schedule. Contractor shall obtain advance written approval for deviations from Drawings and Specifications.

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for each test on each segment of sanitary sewer. Prior to commissioning the sewer line, all test reports shall be submitted to Fort Drum, Master Planning and Environmental Division with a cover letter from the designer of record stating “In accordance with Environmental




Conservation Law, ECL 17-0819, I hereby affirm under penalty of perjury that the information provide is true to the best of my knowledge and belief. False statements made herein are punishable as a Class A misdemeanor pursuant to Section 210.45 of the Penal Law.” Designer of Record’s Certified Test Reports to the Project Manager shall be submitted to DPW O&M Division (John Parobeck) and DPW Environmental Division (Diane Covell) for review and approval. Testing and connections for all utilities must be scheduled with the DPW O&M Division.

D. Video television records shall be provided on DVD medium.

E. As-built information. Location and top feature elevation whether below grade or above grade shall be reported, along with actual materials used, shall be referenced to the New York State Plane Central grid based on the NAD 83 datum in US survey feet. One digital copy of the as-built mark-ups shall be provided to the Fort Drum DPW.

1.3 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested.

B. Provide testing reports and video of television inspection as directed by Contracting Officer.

C. Upon completion of video televising reviews by the Contracting Officer, Contractor will be notified regarding final acceptance of sewer segment.

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed sewer remains untested at one time.

B. Coordinate testing schedules with the Contracting Officer. Perform testing under observation of the Contracting Officer and the Fort Drum DPW.

1.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION

A. Quality Assurance: Submit one example video DVD of previous sewer inspection work that shows operational and structural defects in sewers, complete with audio commentary and inspection log(s).

1. Video and inspection logs will be reviewed to determine if quality of CCTV image is acceptable, and if defects were properly identified and documented.

2. Modify equipment and/or inspection procedures to achieve report material of acceptable quality.

3. Do not commence work prior to approval of report by the Contracting Officer.

B. Inspection Logs: Unless otherwise indicated, submit inspection logs that include the following as a minimum:

1. Project title 2. Time of day 3. System map number




4. Manhole to manhole pipe section 5. Pipe segment length 6. Pipe material 7. Line size 8. Compass direction of viewing 9. Direction of camera’s travel 10. Pipe depth 11. Operator name 12. Tape counter reading at beginning and end of each manhole to manhole

pipe segment.

C. Video DVD’s: Submit completed video DVD’s after sanitary sewer main installation, cleaning and/or rehabilitation.

D. Maintain copy of all inspection documentation (DVD’s, databases, and logs) for duration of Work and warranty period.

2. PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 DEFLECTION MANDREL

A. Mandrel Sizing. Rigid mandrel shall have OD equal to 95 percent of inside ID of pipe. ID of pipe, for purpose of determining OD of mandrel, shall be average OD minus two minimum wall thicknesses for OD controlled pipe and average ID for ID controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing.

B. Mandrel Design. Rigid mandrel shall be constructed of metal or rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. Mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as total number of legs is odd number. Barrel section of mandrel shall have length of at least 75 percent of ID of pipe. Rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. Provide and use proving ring for modifying each size mandrel.

C. Proving Ring. Furnish "proving ring" with each mandrel. Fabricate ring of 1/2-inch-thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter.

D. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average ID and minimum mandrel diameter are specified in Table 5, Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter, at end of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength, thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed in table may be used when approved by Contracting Officer.

2.02 EXFILTRATION TEST

A. Test Equipment:

1. Pipe plugs.

2. Pipe risers where manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or service lead.

2.03 INFILTRATION TEST

A. Test Equipment:

1. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir.




2. Pipe plugs.

2.04 LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

A. Minimum Requirement for Equipment:

1. Control panel

2. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel.

3. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing.

4. Air hoses from control panel to:

1. Air supply.

2. Pneumatic plugs.

3. Sealed line for pressuring.

4. Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure.

B. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place pneumatic plug in each end of length of pipe on ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig; then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are acceptable when they remain in place against test pressure without external aids.

2.05 GROUND WATER DETERMINATION

A. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination.

2.06 SMOKE TESTING

A. Equipment:

1. Pneumatic plugs.

2. Smoke generator.

3. Blowers producing 2500 scfm minimum.

2.07 TELEVISION INSPECTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. DVD: Standard size medium usable in laptop and television DVD players.

1. Audio portion of composite DVD shall be sufficiently free from electrical interference and background noise to provide complete intelligibility of oral report.

2. Identify each tape with tape labels showing Project Name, Contractor’s name, and each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment of sewer line represented on tape.

B. Television Inspection Camera(s): Equipped with rotating head, capable of 90-degree rotation from horizontal and 360-degree rotation about its centerline.

1. Minimum Camera Resolution: 400 vertical lines and 460 horizontal lines.




2. Camera Lens: Not less than 140 degree viewing angle, with automatic or remote focus and iris controls.

3. Focal Distance: Adjustable through range of 6 inches (152 mm) to infinity.

4. Camera(s) shall be intrinsically safe and operative in 100 percent humidity conditions.

5. Lighting Intensity: Remote-controlled and adjusted to minimize reflective glare.

6. Lighting and Camera Quality: Provide clear, in-focus picture of entire inside periphery of sewer.

C. Footage Counter: Measures distance traveled by camera in sewer, accurate to plus or minus 2 feet in 1,000 feet .

D. Video Titling: Video equipment shall include genlocking capabilities to extent that computer generated data (such as footage, date, and size as determined by SDR), can be overlaid onto video, and be indicated on television monitor and permanently recorded on inspection DVD.

3. PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Provide labor, equipment, tools, test plugs, risers, air compressor, air hose, pressure meters, pipe probe, calibrated weirs, or any other device necessary for proper testing and inspection.

B. Determine selection of test methods and pressures for gravity sanitary sewers based on ground water elevation. Determine ground water elevation using equipment and procedures conforming to Control of Ground Water and Surface Water.

3.02 MANDREL TESTING FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

A. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D3034. Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to final acceptance testing of line segment.

B. Pull approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer not passing mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs.

C. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections.

3.03 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

A. Test Options:

1. Test gravity sanitary sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods, as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing.

2. Test new or rehabilitated sanitary sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low pressure air shall undergo physical inspection prior to testing.




3. Perform leakage testing after backfilling of line segment, and prior to tie-in of service connections.

4. If no installed piezometer is within 500 feet of sewer segment, provide temporary piezometer for this purpose.

B. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure:

1. Where ground water exists, install pipe nipple at same time sewer line is placed. Use 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10-inches long. Make installation through manhole wall on top of sewer line where line enters manhole.

2. Immediately before performing line acceptance test, remove cap, clear pipe nipple with air pressure, and connect clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 ft/psi to determine ground water pressure to be used in line testing.

C. Exfiltration test:

1. Determine ground water elevation.

2. Plug sewer in downstream manhole.

3. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.

4. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole when highest point in service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone.

5. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser, when used, with water to point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table, whichever is highest.

6. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, over one-hour period, and calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons) or measure quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 1 at the end of this Section.

D. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2 feet above highest point of sewer pipe or service lead (house service).

1. Determine ground water elevation.

2. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole.

3. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole.

4. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes.

5. Take five readings of accumulated volume over period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. Average must not exceed that calculated for 2 hours from allowable leakage according to Table 1 at the end of this Section.




E. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828, ASTM C 924, or ASTM F1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 2 below.

1. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36-inch average inside diameter.

2. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint. Minimum time allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size.

3. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter:

a. Determine ground water level.

b. Plug both ends of pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe.

c. After manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been sliplined and prior to any service lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs.

d. Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). See Table 2 at the end of this Section.

e. To determine air loss, measure time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. Time must exceed that listed in Table 2 at the end of this Section for pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe.

F. Retest: Repair and retest any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements.

3.04 TEST CRITERIA TABLES

A. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 1 at the end of this Section, for water test allowable leakage.

B. Low Pressure Air Test:

1. Time in Table 2 at the end of this Section, allowed for pressure loss from 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, are based on equation from Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Design Criteria 317.2(a)(4)(B). If the State where the project is being completed has more stringent times, the local state’s requirements will apply.

T = 0.0850(D)(K)/(Q)

where: T = Time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds

K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0 D = Average inside diameter in inches L = Length of line of same pipe size in feet Q = Rate of loss, 0.0015 ft³ /min./sq.ft. internal surface




2. Since K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 3 at the end of this Section for minimum testing times for low pressure air test.

Notes: 1. When two sizes of pipe are involved, compute time by ratio of lengths

involved.

2. Lines with 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint.

3. Lines with average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air tested for leakage at each joint.

4. If joint test is used, perform visual inspection of joint immediately after testing.

5. For joint test, pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe. Once pressure has stabilized, time allowable for pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds psi gauge to 2.5 psi gauge shall be a minimum of 10 seconds.

3.05 LEAKAGE TESTING FOR MANHOLES

A. After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation, but prior to backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing procedures.

B. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged when lines entering manhole have not been backfilled.

C. Vacuum testing:

1. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions, inflate sealing element to recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate.

2. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury (Hg), disconnect pump, and monitor vacuum for time period specified in Table 33 01 30.13-4, Vacuum Test Time Table.

3. If drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over specified time period tabulated in Table 33 01 30.13-4, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

D. Perform hydrostatic exfiltration testing as follows:

1. Seal wastewater lines coming into manhole with internal pipe plug. Then fill manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour.




2. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour.

3. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.06 SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE FOR POINT REPAIRS

A. Application: Perform smoke test to:

1. Locate points of line failure for point repair.

2. Determine when point repairs are properly made.

3. Determine when service connections have been reconnected to rehabilitated sewer.

4. Check integrity of connections to newly replaced service taps to liners and to existing private service connections.

B. Limitations: Do not backfill service taps until completion of this test. Test only those taps in single manhole section at one time. Keep number of open excavations to minimum.

C. Preparation: Prior to smoke testing, give written notices to area residents no fewer than 2 days, nor more than 7 days, prior to proposed testing. Also give notice to local police and fire departments 24 hours prior to actual smoke testing.

D. Isolate Section: Isolate manhole section to be tested from adjacent manhole sections to keep smoke localized. Temporarily seal annular space at manhole for sliplined sections.

E. Smoke Introduction:

1. Operate equipment according to manufacturer's recommendation and as approved by Contracting Officer.

2. Conduct test by forcing smoke from smoke generators through sanitary sewer main and service connections. Operate smoke generators for minimum of 5 minutes.

3. Introduce smoke into upstream and downstream manhole as appropriate. Monitor tap/connection for smoke leaks. Note sources of leaks.

F. Repair and Retest: Repair and replace taps or connections noted as leaking and then retest. Taps and connections may be left exposed in only one manhole section at time. When repair or replacement, testing or retesting, and backfilling of excavation is not completed within one work day, properly barricade and cover each excavation as approved by Contracting Officer.

G. Service Connections: On houses where smoke does not issue from plumbing vent stacks to confirm reconnection of sewer service to newly installed liner pipe, perform dye test to confirm reconnection. Introduce dye into service line through plumbing fixture inside structure or sewer cleanout immediately outside structure and flush with water. Observe flow at service reconnection or downstream manhole. Detection of dye confirms reconnection.




3.07 TELEVISION INSPECTION PROCEDURES

A. SEWER FLOW REQUIREMENTS

1. Do not exceed depth of flow shown in Table below for respective pipe sizes as measured in manhole when performing TV inspection.

2. When depth of flow at upstream manhole of sewer line section being worked is above maximum allowable for TV inspection, reduce flow to level shown in Table below, by plugging or blocking of flow, or by pumping and bypassing of flow as specified.

TABLE 1

Maximum Depth of Flow for TV Inspection

Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Depth of Flow

6” - 10” 20 percent of pipe diameter

12” - 24” 25 percent of pipe diameter

B. SEQUENCE OF WORK

Perform Work in the following sequence:

1. Clean sewer lines and manholes in accordance with requirements of Specifications”.

2. Perform TV inspection to comply with requirements of this specification.

C. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

1. Access: CONTRACTING OFFICER shall have access to observe monitor and other operations at all times.

2. DVD Commentary: Record the following information on audio track of DVD inspection tape: narrative of location, direction of view, manhole numbers, pipe diameter and material, date, time of inspection, and location of laterals and other key features

a. DVD shall visually display this information at beginning and end of each manhole-to-manhole pipe segment.

b. DVD between manholes shall visually display length in feet from starting point of given segment.

3. Sewer Identification: DVD and inspection documentation shall include sewer line and manhole identifiers shown on Drawings. After installation




of liner, use upstream manhole as identifier in conjunction with distance meter.

4. Image Perspective: Camera image shall be down center axis of pipe when camera is in motion.

a. Provide 360-degree sweep of pipe interior at points of interest, to more fully document existing condition of sewer.

b. Points of interest may include, but are not limited to the following: defects, encrustations, mineral deposits, debris, sediment, and any location determined not to be clean or part of proper liner installation, and defects in liner that include, but are not limited to bumps, folds, tears, and dimples.

c. Cabling system employed to transport camera and transmit its signal shall not obstruct camera’s view.

5. Sewer Reach Length: Physically measure and record length of each sewer reach from centerline of its terminal manholes.

6. Inspection Rate: Camera shall be pulled through sewer in either direction, but both inspections are to be in same direction. Maximum rate of travel shall be 30 feet (9 m) per minute when recording.

D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. CONTRACTING OFFICER will review DVD’s and logs to ensure lines are clean and free of visible defects.

2. If sewer line, in sole opinion of CONTRACTING OFFICER, is not adequately clean, and free of visual defects it shall be re-cleaned and CCTV-inspected by Contractor at no additional cost.

TABLE 1 WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE

DIAMETER OF RISER OR STACK IN INCHES

VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH

ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE*

INCH GALLONS PIPE SIZE IN

INCHES GALLONS/MINUTE

PER 100FT. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053

2.5 4.9087 .0212 13 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0158 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276

For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by value of 1” diameter

Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours




* Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours, when sewer is identified as located within 25-year flood plain




TABLE 2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS

Pipe Diam. Min.

(in) Time

(min /sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft

6 5:40 398 0.854 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33

8 7:33 298 1.519 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:56 15:12

10 9:27 239 2.374 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45

12 11:20 199 3.419 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39:00 28:30:00 31:20:00 34:11:00

15 14:10 159 5.342 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43:00 31:10:00 35:37:00 40:04:00 44:31:00 48:58:00 53:25:00

18 17:00 133 7.692 17:00 19:14 25:39:00 32:03:00 38:28:00 44:52:00 51:17:00 57:42:00 64:06:00 70:31:00 76:56:00

21 19:50 114 10.47 19:50 26:11:00 34:54:00 43:38:00 52:21:00 61:05:00 69:48:00 78:32:00 87:15:00 95:59:00 104:42:00

24 22:40 99 13.67 22:48 34:11:00 45:35:00 56:59:00 68:23:00 79:47:00 91:10:00 102:34:00 113:58:00 125:22:00 136:46:00

27 25:30:00 88 17.3 28:51:00 43:16:00 57:42:00 72:07:00 86:33:00 100:58:00 115.24 129.49 144.14 158.4 173.05

30 28:20:00 80 21.36 35:37:00 53:25:00 71:14:00 89:02:00 106:51:00 124:39:00 142:28:00 160:16:00 178:05:00 195:53:00 213:41:00

33 31:10:00 72 25.85 43:06:00 64:38:00 86:11:00 107:44:00 129:17:00 150:50:00 172:23:00 193:55:00 215:28:00 237:01:00 258:34:00

TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG

Length for min. time (ft)

Time for Longer Length (sec)

Specification Time for Length (L) shown (min:sec)

TABLE 3 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR SANITARY SEWERS - LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

PIPE DIAMETER (inches)

MINIMUM TIME

(seconds)

LENGTH FOR MINIMUM TIME

(feet)

TIME FOR LONGER LENGTH

(seconds) 0.855 (L) 6 340 398 1.520 (L) 8 454 298 2.374 (L)

10 567 239 3.419 (L) 12 680 199 5.342 (L) 15 850 159 7.693 (L) 18 1020 133 10.471 (L) 21 1190 114 13.676(L) 24 1360 100 17.309 (L) 27 1530 88 21.369 (L) 30 1700 80 25.856 (L) 33 1870 72




TABLE 4 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR SANITARY MANHOLES - LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST

DEPTH IN FEET TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER

48” 60” 72”

4 10 13 16

8 20 26 32

12 30 39 48

16 40 52 64

20 50 65 80

24 60 78 96

* 5.0 6.5 8.0 *Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth. (The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C924-85)

TABLE 5 PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER

Material and Wall

Construction

Normal size

(inches)

Average I.D.

(inches)

MinimumMandrel Diameter (inches)

PVC-Solid (sdr 26)6

6 5.764 5.476

8 7.715 7.329

10 9.646 9.162

PVC-Solid (SDR 35)12

12 11.737 11.15

15 14.374 13.655

18 17.629 16.748

21 20.783 19.744

24 23.381 22.12

27 26.351 25.033

PVC-Truss 8 7.75 7.363

10 9.75 9.263

12 11.79 11.201

15 14.77 14.032

PVC-Profile (ASTM F794)

12 11.74 11.153

15 14.37 13.652

18 17.65 16.768

21 20.75 19.713

24 23.5 22.325

27 26.5 25.175

30 29.5 28.025




36 35.5 33.725

42 41.5 39.425

48 47.5 45.125

HDPE-Profile 18 18 17.1

21 21 19.95

24 24 22.8

27 27 25.65

30 30 28.5

36 36 34.2

42 42 39.9

48 48 45.6

54 54 51.3

60 60 57

Fiberglass 12 12.85 11.822

(Class SN 46) 18 18.66 17.727

20 20.68 19.646

24 24.72 23.484

30 30.68 29.146

36 36.74 34.903

42 42.7 40.565

48 48.76 46.322

54 54.82 52.079

60 60.38 57.361



Section 33 05 27 – Tracer Wire

Tracer Wire 33 05 27 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Install electrically continuous tracer wire with access points as described herein to be used for locating pipe with an electronic pipe locator after installation. Tracer wire shall be installed on all water mains and services, all wastewater lines and sewer mains and services and all wastewater force mains.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 TRACER WIRE MATERIAL

A. Tracer wire to be twelve gauge minimum solid copper with thermoplastic insulation recommended for direct burial. Wire connectors to be 3M DBR, or approved equal, and shall be watertight to provide electrical continuity.

B. Tracer wire color shall be blue for all water construction, green for all wastewater

construction, yellow for natural gas construction, red for electric construction, and orange for communication construction.

2.02 TRACER WIRE ACCESS BOXES

Tracer wires shall not be accessed from a valve box. The tracer wire access point shall be composed of one ASTM A-48 Class 30 Access Box, or approved equal, installed at each proposed access point.

2.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall perform a continuity test on all tracer wire in the presence of Contracting

Officer and DPW O&M Division. If the tracer wire is found to be not continuous after testing, Contractor shall repair or replace the failed segment of the wire at their own expense.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Tracer wire shall be installed on all water, and sewer mains and services as well as natural gas, communication, gasoline, electric and all non-metallic pipe. The wire shall be installed in such a manner as to be able to properly tracer all mains without loss or deterioration of signal or without the transmitted signal migrating off the tracer wire.


Section 33 05 27 – Tracer Wire

Tracer Wire 33 05 27 - 2

B. Tracer wire shall be installed in the same trench and inside bored holes and casing with pipe during pipe installation. It shall be laid in the trench 1’-0” above the utility. The tracer wire for communication duct banks shall be installed in ½-inch diameter conduit of similar material to the ducts and installed within the concrete encasement of the duct banks. The tracer wire shall be securely bonded together at all wire joints with an approved watertight connector to provide electrical continuity, and it shall be accessible at all tracer wire access points.

C. Tracer wire access points shall in general be no more than five-hundred feet and at every

proposed concrete valve box collar (or manhole where required). Concentrations of multiple proposed valves near pipe intersections, i.e. tees or crosses, may require more than one access point assembly in each concrete valve box collar. Tracer wire access points shall be within public right-of-way or public utility easements.

D. At each valve location, (including fire hydrant isolation valves), a tracer wire box shall be

provided. Tracer wires shall not be brought into valve boxes. E. At the point of connection between cast or ductile iron mains, with any non-iron main, the

tracer wire shall be properly connected to the iron pipe with a cad weld or approved equivalent. Tracer wire welds shall be completely sealed with the use of an approved mastic type sealer specifically manufactured for underground use. Mastic shall be applied in a thick coat a minimum of 2 inches thick and shall be protected from contamination by the backfill material with the use of a plastic membrane.

F. Except for approved spliced-in connections, tracer wire shall be continuous and without

splices from each tracer wire access point. Where any approved spliced-in connections occur, 3M DBR water tight connectors, or approved equal, shall be used to provide electrical continuity.

G. At all main end caps, a minimum of 6 feet of tracer wire shall be extended beyond the end

of the pipe, coiled and secured for future connections. The end of the tracer wire shall be spliced to the wire of a six pound zinc anode and is to be buried at the same elevation as the water main.

H. For directional drilling, auguring or boring installations, four #12 tracer wires shall be

installed with the pipe and connected to the tracer wire at both ends, or cad welded to the existing iron pipe at both ends.

I. Spliced connections between the main line tracer wire and branch connection tracer wire

shall only be allowed at water main tees, crosses or at iron or copper water services where a portion of the branch connection water main or water service is replaced with non-iron or non-copper material. The branch connection tracer wire shall be a single tracer wire properly spliced to the main line tracer wire. Where the existing branch connection is neither iron nor copper, then the new branch connection tracer wire shall be properly spliced to the existing tracer wire on the branch connection.

J. At all repair locations where there is existing tracer wire, the tracer wire shall be properly

reconnected and spliced as outlined above.



Section 33 11 00 – Piping – General Provisions

Piping – General Provisions 33 11 00 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DRAWINGS

Dimensions shown on Drawings are approximate only. Verify all piping geometry in the field and to ensure proper alignment and fit of all piping consistent with the intent of the Drawings. Submit field layout drawings as required for approval.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIAL

A. Examine all material carefully for defects. Do not install material which is known, or thought to be, defective.

B. CONTRACTING OFFICER reserves the right to inspect all material and to reject

all defective material shipped to the job site or stored on the site. Failure of CONTRACTING OFFICER to detect damaged material shall not relieve the Contractor from his total responsibility for the completed work if it leaks or breaks after installation.

C. Lay all defective material aside for final inspection by CONTRACTING

OFFICER. CONTRACTING OFFICER will determine if corrective repairs may be made, or if the material is rejected. CONTRACTING OFFICER shall determine the extent of the repairs.

D. Classify defective pipe prior to CONTRACTING OFFICER’s inspection as

follows:

1. Damage to interior and/or exterior paint seal coatings.

2. Damage to interior cement-mortar or epoxy lining.

3. Insufficient interior cement-mortar lining or epoxy thickness.

4. Excessive pitting of pipe.

5. Poor quality exterior paint seal coat.

6. Pipe out of round.

7. Pipe barrel area damaged to a point where pipe class thickness is reduced (all pipe).

8. Denting or gouges in plain end of pipe (all pipe).

9. Excessive slag on pipe affecting gasket seal (DIP).




10. Any visible cracks, holes.

11. Embedded foreign materials.

12. Non-uniform color, density and other physical properties along the length of the pipe.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, fixtures, and

devices furnished. These materials, equipment, fixtures and devices shall comply with the requirements and standards of all Federal, State, and local laws, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations governing safety and health.

F. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the storage and handling of all

material furnished until the material is incorporated in the completed project and accepted by CONTRACTING OFFICER. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe storage of all material furnished to or by him until incorporated in the completed project and accepted by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

G. Load and unload pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories by lifting with

hoists or skidding to avoid shock or damage. Do not drop these materials. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against other pipe. Handle this material in accordance with AWWA C600, C605 or C906 whichever is applicable.

H. Drain and store fittings and valves prior to installation in such a manner as to

protect them from damage due to freezing of trapped water. 2.02 PETROLATUM TAPE COATING

A. The tape coating shall be a cold applied, saturant tape made from either

petrolatum or petroleum wax with a noncellulosic synthetic fiber fabric. The fabric shall be encapsulated and coated on both sides with the petrolatum or petroleum wax. The thickness of the tape shall be no less than 40 mil. The petrolatum or petroleum wax shall be at least 50% of the product by weight.

B. The tape coating shall be supplied in sheets, pads or rolls. Pads and sheets

shall be sized to fit the area that is to be covered, allowing for an overlap per AWWA Standards.

2.03 RUBBERIZED-BITUMEN BASED SPRAY-ON UNDERCOATING

Subject to approval by CONTRACTING OFFICER, an alternative corrosion protection for exposed buried metal is an aerosol applied rubberized coating. The material shall be rapid dry and specifically designed for corrosion protection. 3M Rubberized Underseal Undercoating 08883 or any equivalent rubberized-bitumen based spray-on undercoating may be used. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for storage and application.

PART 3: EXECUTION




3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Lay and maintain all pipe to the required lines and depths. Install fittings, valves and hydrants in strict accordance with the Specifications at the required locations with joints centered, spigots home, and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. Do not deviate from the required alignment, depth or grade without the written consent of CONTRACTING OFFICER.

B. Buried steel lugs, rods, brackets, and flanged joint nuts and bolts are not

permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved in writing by CONTRACTING OFFICER. Cover any and all buried steel lugs, rods, brackets, and flanged joint nuts and bolts with approved coating in accordance with AWWA Standard C217 prior to backfilling. Encase the same in polyethylene encased if the Specifications require polyethylene encasement of the pipe, valves or fittings..

C. Lay all pipe to the depth specified. Measure the depth from the final surface

grade to the top of the pipe barrel. The minimum pipe cover shall be as shown on the Drawings or as specified in the Specifications.

D. Do not lay pipe in a wet trench, on subgrade containing frost, or when trench

conditions are unsuitable for such work. If all efforts fail to obtain a stable dry trench bottom and CONTRACTING OFFICER determines that the trench bottom is unsuitable for such work, CONTRACTING OFFICER will order the kind of stabilization to be constructed, in writing. In all cases, water levels must be at least 6” below the bottom of the pipe.

E. Thoroughly clean the pipes and fittings before they are installed. Keep these

materials clean until the acceptance of the completed Work. Lay pipe with the bell ends facing in the direction of laying, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, or directed by CONTRACTING OFFICER. Exercise care to ensure that each length abuts the next in such a manner that no shoulder or unevenness of any kind occurs in the pipe line.

F. Do not wedge or block the pipe during laying unless by written order of

CONTRACTING OFFICER. G. Before joints are made, bed each section of pipe the full length of the barrel, at

the required grade, and at the invert matching the previously laid pipe. Dig bell holes sufficiently large to permit proper joint making. Do not bring succeeding pipe into position until the preceding length is embedded and secure in place.

H. Take up and relay pipe that is out of alignment or grade, or pipe having disturbed

joints after laying. Take up such in-place pipe sections found to be defective and replace them with new pipe. Take up, relaying, and replacement will be at the Contractor's expense.




I. Place enough backfill over the center sections of the pipe to prevent floating. Take all other necessary precautions to prevent the floating of the pipeline by the accumulation of water in the trench, or the collapse of the pipeline from any cause. Should floating or collapse occur, restoration will be at the Contractor's expense.

J. Contractor shall install tracer wire along all pipelines. Tracer wire may be installed in trench below both the pipe and pipe bedding to prevent the tracer wire from being disturbed during repairs.

K. Bedding materials and concrete work for the pipe bedding and thrust restraint

shall be as specified. L. Prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed. Do not

place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe during laying operations. Close all openings in the pipeline with watertight plugs when pipe laying is stopped at the close of the day's work, or for other reasons such as rest breaks or meal periods.

M. Only cut pipe with equipment specifically designed for cutting pipe such as an

abrasive wheel, a rotary wheel cutter, a guillotine pipe saw, or a milling wheel saw. Do not use chisels or hand saws. Grind cut ends and rough edges smooth. Bevel the cut end slightly for push-on connections as per manufacturer recommendations.

N. In distributing material at the site of the Work, unload each piece opposite or

near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. If the pipe is to be strung out, do so in a straight line or in a line conforming to the curvature of the street. Block each length of pipe adequately to prevent movement. Block stockpiled pipe adequately to prevent movement. Do not place pipe, material, or any other object on private property, obstructing walkways or driveways, or in any manner that interferes with the normal flow of traffic.

O. Exercise special care to avoid damage to the bells, spigots or flanged ends of

pipe during handling, temporary storage, and construction. Replace damaged pipe that cannot be repaired to CONTRACTING OFFICER’s satisfaction, at the Contractor's expense.

P. Remove all existing pipe, fittings, valves, pipe supports, blocking, and all other

items necessary to provide space for making connections to existing pipe and installing all piping required under this Contract.

Q. Maintain the minimum required distance between water and sewer lines and

other utility lines in strict accordance with all Federal, State, and local requirements and all right-of-way limitations.

R. Provide and install polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe, fittings and

valves as required. See Specification Section 33 11 17 - Polyethylene Wrap.




S. The maximum allowable deflection at the joints for push-on joint pipe shall be the lesser of manufacturer’s recommendations or as described in the DIPRA Guideline, Ductile Iron Pipe Joints and Their Uses, as follows: Size of Deflection Maximum Deflection

Pipe Angle (18-ft. Length) (20-ft. Length) 3”-12" 5 degrees 19" 21"

14"-42" 3 degrees 11" 12" 48"-64" 3 degrees N/A 12"

T. The maximum allowable deflection at the joints for PVC pressure pipe shall be as follows:

Size of Deflection Maximum Deflection

Pipe Angle (20-ft. Length) 4”-12" 2 degrees 8"

14" + 1.5 degrees 6"

U. Use short lengths of pipe (minimum length 3 feet, no more than three short sections), when approved by the CONTRACTING OFFICER, to make curves that cannot be made with full length sections of pipe without exceeding the allowable deflection. Making these curves will be at no additional cost to CONTRACTING OFFICER.

V. Furnish air relief valve assemblies in accordance with Drawings provided or as

specified in Specification Special Conditions section. CONTRACTING OFFICER will provide standard detail for additional air release valve assemblies. Any deviation from the standard detail, proposed by Contractor must be approved in advance.

W. Exercise particular care so that no high points are established where air can

accumulate. Install an air release valve and manhole, as extra Work to the Contract, when the CONTRACTING OFFICER determines that unforeseen field conditions necessitate a change in the pipe profile that requires the installation of an air release valve and manhole. If the Contractor requests a change in the pipe profile solely for ease of construction, and the requested change requires the installation of an air release valve and manhole as determined by the CONTRACTING OFFICER, the cost of furnishing and installing the air release valve and manhole will be at the expense of the Contractor.

X. All water mains 20” and greater in diameter shall be constructed using DIP only.

Other construction materials, such as PVC and HDPE, are limited to water mains 16” and under in diameter. Alternate materials for larger water mains may be approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER on a case-by-case basis.




Y. Marking tape to be provided along all mains and service lines installed. Marking tape to be installed 12” below grade. Foil backing is not required on marking tape. Tape shall be colored blue for water mains and green for sewer. Marking tape along pressurized force mains shall be labeled “Pressurized Wastewater”.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS TO AVOID CONTAMINATION

A. Heavy particulates generally contain bacteria and prevent even very high chlorine concentrations from contacting and killing such organisms. It is essential that the procedures of this Section be observed to assure that a water main and its appurtenances are thoroughly clean for the final disinfection by chlorination.

B. Take precautions to protect the interior of pipes, fittings, and valves against

contamination. String pipe delivered for construction so as to keep foreign material out of the pipe. Close all openings in the pipeline with watertight plugs when pipe laying is stopped at the close of the day's work or for other reasons, such as rest breaks or meal periods. Use rodent-proof plugs approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER, where it is determined that watertight plugs are not practical and where thorough cleaning will be performed.

C. Delay in placement of delivered pipe invites contamination. The more closely the

rate of delivery is correlated to the rate of pipe laying, the lower the likelihood of contamination. Complete the joints of all pipe in the trench before stopping work. If water accumulates in the trench, keep the plugs in place until the trench is dry.

D. When encountering conditions on pre-existing pipe that requires packing, employ

yarning or packing material made of molded or tubular rubber rings, or rope of treated paper or other approved materials. Do not use materials such as jute, asbestos, or hemp. Handle packing material in a manner that avoids contamination.

E. Do not use contaminated material or any material capable of supporting prolific

growth of microorganisms for sealing joints. Handle sealing material or gaskets in a manner that avoids contamination. The lubricant used in the installation of sealing gaskets shall be suitable for use in potable water. Deliver the lubricant to the job in closed containers and keep it clean.

F. If dirt enters the pipe, and in the opinion of CONTRACTING OFFICER the dirt

will not be removed by the flushing operation, clean the interior of the pipe by mechanical means, then swab with a 1% hypochlorite disinfecting solution. Clean using a pig, swab, or "go-devil" only when CONTRACTING OFFICER has specified such and has determined that such operation will not force mud or debris into pipe joint spaces.

G. If the main is flooded during construction, the flooded section must be isolated

from the remainder of the installation as soon as practical. Submit a plan to CONTRACTING OFFICER on correcting the condition and do not proceed until




authorized by CONTRACTING OFFICER. Replace or fully clean and disinfect the affected pipe at no additional cost to CONTRACTING OFFICER.


A. Prior to installation, inspect valves for direction of opening, freedom of operation, tightness of pressure containing bolting, cleanliness of valve ports and especially of seating surfaces, handling damage, and cracks. Correct defective valves or hold for inspection by the CONTRACTING OFFICER.

B. Set and join to the pipe in the manner specified in Paragraph 3.01. Provide

valves with adequate support, such as crushed stone and concrete pads, so that the pipe will not be required to support the weight of the valve. Set truly vertical. If polyethylene is applied to the pipe, the entire valve shall be encased in polyethylene encasement prior to backfill. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed up to the operating nut leaving the operating nut, exposed and free to be operated.

C. Provide a valve box for each valve. Set the top of the valve box neatly to existing

grade, unless directed otherwise by CONTRACTING OFFICER. Do not install in a way that allows the transfer of shock or stress to the valve. Center and plumb the box over the wrench nut of the valve. Do not use valves to bring misaligned pipe into alignment during installation. Support pipe in such manner as to prevent stress on the valve.

D. Provide extension stem for each valve, topped with a standard 2-inch AWWA

nut. Pin the extension stem to the operating nut on the valves. Extension stem shall extend to with 12-inches of finished grade.

E. Provide valve marking posts, when authorized by CONTRACTING OFFICER, at

locations designated by CONTRACTING OFFICER and in accordance with detail drawings.

3.04 THRUST RESTRAINT

A. Provide all plugs, caps, tees, and bends (both horizontal and vertical) with concrete thrust blocking and/or restrained joint pipe as represented on the Drawings, or specified in the Specification Special Conditions.

B. Place concrete thrust blocking between undisturbed solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Install the concrete thrust blocking in accordance with Section Cast-In-Place Concrete and Standard Details provided. Locate the thrust blocking to contain the resultant thrust force while keeping the pipe and fitting joints accessible for repair, unless otherwise shown or directed.

C. Use restrained joints for all fittings and for a distance on either side of the fitting or valve. Determine minimum length of restrained joints using DIPRA- “Thrust Restrained Design for Ductile Iron Pipe”.




D. Provide temporary thrust restraint at temporary caps and plugs. Submit details of

temporary restraint to CONTRACTING OFFICER for approval. E. At connections with existing water mains where there is a limit on the time the

water main may be removed from service, use metal harnesses of anchor clamps, tie rods and straps; mechanical joints utilizing set-screw retainer glands; or restrained push-on joints as permitted by CONTRACTING OFFICER. No restraining system can be installed without the approval of CONTRACTING OFFICER. Submit details of the proposed installation to CONTRACTING OFFICER for approval. For pipe up to 12-inches in size, use a minimum of two 3/4-inch tie rods. If approved for use, install retainer glands in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Material for metal harnessing and tie-rods shall be ASTM A36 or A307, as a minimum requirement.

F. Protection of Metal Harnessing: Protect ties rods, clamps and other metal

components against corrosion and by encasement of the entire assembly with 8-mil thick (12 mil thick in corrosive soils) loose polyethylene film in accordance with AWWA C105. Apply tape on all exposed tie rods prior to installing polyethylene.



Section 33 11 11 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 33 11 11 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

PVC pressure pipe and fabricated fittings in nominal sizes 4-inches through 12-inches with cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions and certification for all materials to be furnished in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals. Submit classification and gradation test results for embedment and pipe backfill material.

PART 2: PRODUCTS Research has documented that certain pipe materials (such as polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, and polybutylene) and certain elastomers (such as those used in gasket material) may be subject to permeation by lower-molecular weight organic solvents or petroleum products. Products supplied under this Section assume that petroleum products or organic solvents will not be encountered. If during the course of pipeline installation the Contractor identifies, or suspects the presence of petroleum products or any unknown chemical substance, notify CONTRACTING OFFICER immediately. Stop installing piping in the area of suspected contamination until direction is provided by CONTRACTING OFFICER. PVC Schedule 40 or 80 is not permitted for conveying wastewater or potable water within distribution or collection systems. However, it may be used in other applications, such as conveying chemicals or for drainage. 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS – WATER DISTRIBUTION

All PVC pipe shall be PVC 1120 pressure pipe made from class 12454 material as defined by ASTM D1784 with outside diameter dimensions of steel or cast iron pipe. The PVC compounds shall be treated or certified suitable for potable water products by the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratory (NSF Standard No. 61). PVC pipe to be used for potable water shall be blue in color. PVC Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: The pipe shall be as specified by Ductile Iron Pipe Size (DIPS) and shall be inside diameter. Water main shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) SDR-11. Water services shall be Type K Copper or HDPE SDR-11.

2.02 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE




A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be green in color and in accordance with provisions in following table except where specified differently on the Drawings:

B.

Type of service Acceptable Materials

Gravity Mains with depth of cover < 10 feet

PVC SDR 35

Gravity Mains with depth of cover 10-15 feet

PVC SDR 35

Gravity Mains with depth of cover > 15 feet

Ductile Iron Pipe

C. When solid wall PVC pipe 18-inches to 27-inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679, except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi.

D. For sewers up to 12-inch diameter crossing over water lines, or crossing under water lines with less than 2-feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure rated pipe conforming to ASTM D2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings.

E. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastomeric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D3212 and ASTM F477, or ASTM D3139 and ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be factory-assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. Manufacturer shall test sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D2444

F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable.

G. Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests is subject to approval by CONTRACTING OFFICER. When referee tests are required, condition specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D618 at 73.4° F +/- 3.6° F and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified.

H. Pipe Stiffness. Determine pipe stiffness at 5 percent deflection in accordance with Test Method D 2412. Minimum pipe stiffness shall be 46 psi. For diameters 4-inches through 18-inches, test three specimens, each a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) in length. For diameters 21-inch through 36-inch, test three specimens, each a minimum of 12-inch (300 mm) in length.




I. Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.04F, in suitable press until internal diameter has been reduced to 60 percent of original inside diameter of pipe. Rate of loading shall be uniform. Test specimens, when examined under normal light and with unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of pipe walls or bracing profiles. Perform the flattening test in conjunction with pipe stiffness test.

J. Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D3212, except that joint shall remain watertight at minimum deflection of 5 percent. Manufacturer will be required to provide independent third party certification for joint testing each diameter of storm sewer pipe.

K. Purpose of Tests. Flattening and pipe stiffness tests are intended to be routine quality control tests. Joint tightness test is intended to qualify pipe to specified level of performance.

2.03 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE

A. PVC sanitary sewer force main pipe shall be green in color. Provide approved PVC pressure pipe conforming to requirements for water service pipe, and conforming to minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 33 34 00 - Sanitary Sewer Force Mains.

B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot, containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting requirements of ASTM F477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use approved joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13, for PVC pipe 12-inch diameter and less.

C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per Section - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, except furnish fittings with one of following approved internal linings:

1. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248, heat fused to interior surface of fitting

2. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) polyurethane

3. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) ceramic epoxy

4. Nominal 40 Mils (35 Mils minimum) fusion bonded epoxy

D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile-iron fittings as required by Section 33 11 00.17 - Polyethylene Wrap.

E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with Specifications.

2.04 RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE




A. Inspect pipe and appurtenances for defects prior to installation in the trench. Set aside and clearly mark defective, damaged or unsound material and hold material for inspection by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

B. Load and unload all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and in such a manner as to prevent damage. Do not drop pipe and accessories or handle them in a rough manner.

C. Provide safe storage for all materials. Cover stored pipe that will be exposed

to sunlight for periods longer than 6 months. Cover with canvas or other opaque material with provision for adequate air circulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources, such as heaters, boilers, steam lines, or engine exhaust.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

Follow the provisions of Section 33 11 00 - Piping - General Provisions, and Sanitary Sewer Force Mains in addition to the following requirements:

A. Remove all dirt and foreign matter from pipe before lowering it into the trench. Do

not place debris, hand tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe. Keep pipe clean during and after laying.

B. Lay pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of work progress. Do not roll,

drop or dump pipe or appurtenances into the trench. C. Assemble push-on joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s

recommendations. Assemble mechanical joints in accordance with the fitting manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Cut pipe with pipe saws, circular saws, handsaws, or similar equipment. Provide

a smooth end at a right angle to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Deburr, bevel, and re-mark insertion line on spigot ends. Match factory bevel length and angle for field bevels. When connecting to certain shallow depth bells, such as those on some cast iron fittings and valves, cut off the factory bevel and prepare a deburred, square cut end with a slight outer bevel.

E. Clean the sealing surface of the spigot end, the pipe bell, the coupler or fitting,

and the elastomeric gaskets immediately before assembly. Do not remove factory installed gaskets for cleaning. Keep the joint free of dirt, sand, grit, grease or any foreign material. Apply approved lubricant when assembling gasketed joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s requirements. The use of improper lubricants can damage gaskets. Excessive lubricant use can make disinfection more difficult and cause taste and odor problems when the line is placed in service.




F. Good pipe alignment is essential for proper joint assembly. Align the spigot to the bell and insert the spigot into the bell until it contacts the gasket uniformly. Do not swing or “stab” the joint; that is, do not suspend the pipe and swing it into the bell. The spigot end of the pipe is marked by the manufacturer to indicate the proper depth of insertion. Avoid metal to plastic contact with the pushing the pipe home (use wood or other material to cushion moving the pipe.

G. Assemble pipe using the following types of joints:

1. Gasketed bell joint – Integral with the pipe or fitting

2. Gasketed coupling – A double gasketed coupling

3. Mechanical joint – Any of the several joint designs that have gaskets and bolts manufactured in accordance with AWWA standards.

H. Tracer Wire

1. Place tracer wire in accordance with Section 33 05 27 - Tracer Wire. 2. The wire shall be contiguous except at test stations, valve boxes, and

where splicing is required. All splices shall be encased with a 3M-Gel Pack Model No. 054007-09053, or approved equal.

I. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in accordance with Specification


J. PVC pipe fittings shall employ ductile iron pipe fittings per Specifications 15105. See detail drawings for transitions between different pipe materials.

K. Gaskets - Gaskets shall be as provided or recommended by the manufacturer

and satisfy AWWA standard C111 in all respects. Where ductile iron pipe and PVC pipe are directly connected, the appropriate gasket material for this purpose shall be employed. As noted in the products section of this specification, some gasket materials are prone to permeation of certain hydrocarbons which may exist in the soil (see Part 2). Under these conditions and at the discretion of CONTRACTING OFFICER, Contractor shall require contractor to provide FKM (Viton, Flourel) gasket material in areas of concern.

3.02 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Install service connections in accordance with AWWA Standard C605 and the

manufacturer’s recommendations using the following methods:

1. Tapping is only permitted through the use of service clamps or saddles.

2. Using injection molded couplings with threaded outlets.

3. Tapping with large service connections through appropriately sized tapping sleeves and valves.




4. Direct tapping of 1-inch and smaller service connections is not permitted. Use service saddles only for AWWA Standard C900 pipe, for nominal pipe sizes 6-inch through 12-inch. Corporation stops shall be threaded and conform to AWWA Standard C800.

5. The distance between the PVC pipe joint and a service tap (2-inchs and smaller) shall be a minimum of 3 feet. The distance between the PVC pipe joint and a service tap (4-inchs and larger) shall be a minimum of 4 feet. Where necessary, excavate along the pipe to confirm the acceptable distance before starting the tap.



Section 33 11 17 – Polyethlene Wrap

Polyethylene Wrap 33 11 17 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL


A. The minimum requirements for polyethylene wrap to be used for external corrosion protection of buried ductile iron pipe, fittings, and appurtenances and for cast iron and ductile iron fittings on PVC pipe, and for barrier valves.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data for proposed film and tape for approval.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Film: Tubular or sheet form without tears, breaks, holidays, or defects; conforming with requirements of AWWA C105, 2.5 to 3 percent carbon black content, either low or high density:

1. Low-density polyethylene film shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D4976.

a. Raw material.

1) Group: 2 (linear)

2) Class: C (black).

3) Density: 0.910 to 0.935 g/cm3

4) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum

b. Physical properties.

1) Tensile strength: 3600 psi, minimum.

2) Elongation: 800 percent, minimum.

3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum.

c. Thickness: Low-density polyethylene film shall have normal thickness of 0.008 inch. Minus tolerance on thickness is 10 percent of nominal thickness.

2. High-density, cross laminated polyethylene film shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene material conforming to the following requirements of ASTM D4976.

a. Raw material.

1) Group: 2 (linear)

2) Density: 0.940 to 0.960 g/cm3

3) Class: C (black)




4) Dielectric strength: Volume resistivity, 1015 ohm-cm, minimum.

b. Physical properties.

1) Tensile strength: 6300 psi, minimum.

2) Elongation: 100 percent, minimum.

3) Dielectric strength: 800 V/mil thickness, minimum.

c. Thickness: Film shall have nominal thickness of 0.004 inch. Minus tolerance of thickness is 10 percent of nominal thickness.

B. Polyethylene Tape: Provide minimum 2-inch-wide (3-inch typical), plastic-backed, adhesive tape.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove lumps of clay, mud, and cinders from pipe surface prior to installation of polyethylene encasement. Prevent soil or embedment material from becoming trapped between pipe and polyethylene.

B. Fit polyethylene film to contour of pipe to affect snug, but not tight fit; encase with minimum space between polyethylene and pipe. Allow sufficient slack in contouring to prevent stretching polyethylene where it bridges irregular surfaces, such as bell-spigot interfaces, bolted joints, or fittings, and to prevent damage to polyethylene due to backfilling operations. Secure overlaps and ends with adhesive tape to hold polyethylene encasement in place until backfilling operations are complete.

C. For installations below water table or in areas subject to tidal actions, seal both ends of polyethylene tube with adhesive tape at joint overlap.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Tubular Type (Method A):

1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering tube to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, and bunching it accordion-fashion lengthwise until it clears pipe ends.

2. Lower pipe into trench and make up pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene tube.

3. After assembling pipe joint, make overlap of polyethylene tube. Pull bunched polyethylene from preceding length of pipe, slip it over end of adjoining length of pipe, and secure in place. Then slip end of polyethylene from adjoining pipe section over end of first wrap until it overlaps joint at end of preceding length of pipe. Secure overlap in place. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points.




4. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene. Proceed with installation of next section of pipe in same manner.

B. Tubular Type (Method B):

1. Cut polyethylene tube to length approximately 1 foot shorter than pipe section. Slip tube around pipe, centering it to provide 6 inches of bare pipe at each end. Take up slack width at top of pipe to make snug, but not tight, fit along barrel of pipe, securing fold at quarter points; secure ends.

2. Before making up joint, slip 3 foot length of polyethylene tube over end of preceding pipe section, bunching in accordion-fashion lengthwise. After completing joint, pull 3 foot length of polyethylene over joint, overlapping polyethylene previously placed on each adjacent section of pipe by at least I foot; make each end snug and secure.


C. Sheet Type:

1. Cut polyethylene sheet to length approximately 2 feet longer than pipe section. Center length to provide 1-foot overlap on each adjacent pipe section, bunching sheet until it clears pipe ends. Wrap polyethylene around pipe so that sheet circumferentially overlaps top quadrant of pipe. Secure cut edge of polyethylene sheet at intervals of approximately 3 feet.

2. Lower wrapped pipe into trench and makeup pipe joint with preceding section of pipe. Make shallow bell hole at joints to facilitate installation of polyethylene. After completing joint, make overlap and secure ends.


D. Pipe-shaped Appurtenances: Cover bends, reducers, offsets, and other pipe-shaped appurtenances with polyethylene in same manner as pipe.

E. Odd-shaped Appurtenances: When it is not practical to wrap valves, tees, crosses, and other odd-shaped pieces in tube, wrap with flat sheet or split length of polyethylene tube by passing sheet around appurtenance and encasing it. Make seams by bringing edges together, folding over twice, and taping down. Tape polyethylene securely in place at valve stem and other penetrations.

F. Openings in Encasement: Create openings for branches, service taps, blow-offs, air valves, and similar appurtenances by making X-shaped cut in polyethylene and temporarily folding back film. After appurtenance is installed, tape slack securely to appurtenance and repair cut, as well as other damaged area in polyethylene, with tape. Service taps may also be made directly through polyethylene, with resulting damaged areas being repaired as specified.

G. Junctions between Wrapped and Unwrapped Pipe: Where polyethylene-wrapped pipe joins adjacent pipe that is not wrapped, extend polyethylene wrap to cover adjacent pipe for distance of at least 3 feet. Secure end with circumferential turns




of tape. Wrap service lines of dissimilar metals with polyethylene or suitable dielectric tape for minimum clear distance of 3 feet away from cast or ductile iron pipe.

3.03 REPAIRS

A. Repair cuts, tears, punctures, or damage to polyethylene with adhesive tape or with short length of polyethylene sheet or cut open tube, wrapped around pipe to cover damaged area, and secured in place.



SECTION 33 12 16 – GATE VALVES

Gate Valves 33 12 16 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

Furnish, install, and test all gate valves shown on the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's literature for approval in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

1.03 APPLICATION

All valves 3 inches through 16 inches shall be resilient-seated type gate valves. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SMALL GATE VALVES

A. All gate valves, 3 inches through 16 inches NPS, shall be iron body, resilient-seated, nut-operated, non-rising stem gate valves suitable for buried service. The valve interior and exterior shall be epoxy coated at the factory by the valve manufacturer in accordance with AWWA Standard C550 (6-8 mil average, 4 mil minimum). The valves shall be designed for a minimum differential pressure of 250 psi and a minimum internal test pressure of 500 psi unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Valves shall be designed to operate in the vertical position. All valves shall open left (CCW).

B. Valves shall comply fully with AWWA Standard C509. Valve ends shall be

restrained mechanical joint or as shown on the plans or approved in writing in accordance with AWWA Standard C111. Stems shall be made of a low zinc alloy in accordance with AWWA C509. Stem seals shall be double O-ring stem seals. Square operating nuts conforming to AWWA Standard C509 shall be used. Valves shall open left in accordance with AW standard. All valve materials shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

C. For exposed piping, valves shall be flanged joint.

D. Test valves (Operation Test and Hydrostatic Tests) at the manufacturer’s plant in

accordance with AWWA Standard C509. Provide CONTRACTING OFFICER with certified copies of all tests prior to shipment. CONTRACTING OFFICER reserves the right to observe all tests.


SECTION 33 12 16 – GATE VALVES

Gate Valves 33 12 16 - 2

2.02 LARGE GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves larger than 16-inches NPS shall be iron body, double disc (metal to metal seat), parallel seats, bronze mounted, rubber O-ring packing seals, epoxy coated interior and exterior meeting the requirements of AWWA Standard C550, and conforming to AWWA Standard C500. Stems shall be made of a low zinc alloy in accordance with AWWA C500. All valves shall have openings through the body of the same circular area as that of the pipe to which they are attached. All valves furnished shall open left (CCW) in accordance with the base standard. All valve materials shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

B. Test valves (Operation Test and Hydrostatic Tests) at the manufacturer’s plant in

accordance with AWWA Standard C500. Provide CONTRACTING OFFICER with certified copies of all tests prior to shipment. CONTRACTING OFFICER reserves the right to observe all tests.

C. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise designated on the

Drawings or approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER.

D. The valves shall be designed for a minimum differential pressure of 150 psi and a minimum internal test pressure of 300 psi, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Make all valves tight under their working pressures after they have been placed and before the main is placed in operation. Any defective parts shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

2.03 VALVE EXTENSIONS

A. Valve extensions will be required on any gate valve where the distance from the

finished grade to the top of the operating nut exceeds 4 foot. Extension shall be of a locking type to prevent it from coming off the valve. Top of extension will be no deeper than 1 foot from finished grade.

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the valves in strict accordance with the requirements contained in Section 33 11 00 and detail Drawings. All valves shall be restrained.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. After field installation of the valve all external bolts except the operating nut shall receive a layer of tape coating or approved rubberized-bitumen based spray-on undercoating applied before backfill. All buried valves shall be encased in polyethylene encasement prior to backfill. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed up to the operating nut leaving the operating nut exposed and free to be operated. Valve box shall be installed per Specification Section 33 11 00.



SECTION 33 12 19– FIRE HYDRANTS

Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Fire hydrants.

B. Adjustment of fire hydrants and gate valves.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit name of hydrant manufacturer, type of bonnet paint, and engineering control drawing number for hydrant proposed for use.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDRANTS

A. Provide hydrants in conformance with AWWA Standard C502, Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants (Latest Edition). Hydrants are approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER by issuance of a Certificate of Responsibility. Hydrants shall open left (counterclockwise). Hydrants shall be Mueller Model Super Centurion 250 or equal.

B. The CONTRACTING OFFICER may, at any time prior to or during installation of hydrants, randomly select furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at CONTRACTING OFFICER’s expense, to verify compliance with Specifications. When hydrant is found to be non-compliant, replace, at Contractor's expense, hydrants, with hydrants that comply with Specifications.

C. Provide lower hydrant barrel fabricated from Ductile Iron Pipe as single piece, connected to upper hydrant barrel by means of joint coupling that will provide three hundred sixty (360) degree rotation of upper barrel.

D. Hydrants shall have a Storz type fire hose connection consisting of one single 5-inch connection directed towards the road.

2.02 HYDRANT TEE

A. Fire hydrant installations shall require the use of a hydrant tee on the main line. Hydrant valves shall be bolted to the hydrant tee for all installations. Mechanical joint hydrant tee shall be ductile iron class 350 and shall be produced in accordance with ANSI/AWWA A21.53/C153 and ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C111 for joints and ANSI/AWWA A21.4/C-104 for cement lining in sizes 3” through 24”. Hydrant tee mechanical joint nuts and bolts shall be ductile iron, high strength, low alloy steel per ANSI/AWWA A21.11/C-111.

2.03 LEADS

A. Branches (Leads): Conform to requirements of Section 33 11 11 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. Leads shall be 8-inch laterals with gate valves.

2.04 HYDRANT PAINTING

A. New hydrants and refurbished hydrants shall be shop primed and painted per the base color scheme.

PART 3: EXECUTION


SECTION 33 12 19– FIRE HYDRANTS

Fire Hydrants 33 12 19 - 2

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Drawings. When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place 1-inch-thick piece of standard sidewalk expansion joint material around section of barrel passing through concrete.

B. Place 12-inch by 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other material approved by CONTRACTING OFFICER ) on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire hydrants installed on new water lines not in service. Remove indicators after new water line is tested and approved by Project Manager.

C. Thrust blocks are required on all hydrant tees. If hydrant lateral is not restrained, contractor shall provide a thrust block behind hydrant shoe. Do not cover drain ports, bolts, or fittings when placing concrete thrust block.

D. Obtain CONTRACTING OFFICER 's approval in writing prior to installation of hydrants which require changes in bury depth due to obstructions not shown on Drawings. Unit price adjustments will not be allowed for changes in water line flow line or fire hydrant barrel length caused by obstructions.

E. Plug branch lines to valves and fire hydrants shown on Drawings to be removed. Deliver fire hydrants designated for salvage to CONTRACTING OFFICER at their base depot location.

F. Coating Requirements:

1. Apply coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of applied system.

G. Furnish affidavit of compliance that coatings furnished complies with requirements of this Specification and referenced standards, as applicable. Per NFPA standards, provide a color code for the hydrant bonnet to indicate the hydrant’s available flow at 20 psi.

H. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials and debris in accordance with local or State requirements.



SECTION 33 31 11 – GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS

Gravity Sanitary Sewers 33 31 11 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property.

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for each test on each segment of sanitary sewer. Prior to commissioning the sewer line, all test reports shall be submitted to Fort Drum, Master Planning and Environmental Division with a cover letter from the designer of record stating “In accordance with Environmental Conservation Law, ECL 17-0819, I hereby affirm under penalty of perjury that the information provide is true to the best of my knowledge and belief. False statements made herein are punishable as a Class A misdemeanor pursuant to Section 210.45 of the Penal Law.” Designer of Record’s Certified Test Reports to the Project Manager shall be submitted to DPW O&M Division (John Parobeck) and DPW Environmental Division (Diane Covell) for review and approval. Testing and connections for all utilities must be scheduled with the DPW O&M Division.

D. Video television records shall be provided on DVD medium.

E. As-built information. Location and top feature elevation whether below grade or above grade shall be reported, along with actual materials used, shall be referenced to the New York State Plane Central grid based on the NAD 83 datum in US survey feet. One digital copy of the as-built mark-ups shall be provided to the Fort Drum DPW.


A. Qualifications. Install sanitary sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

B. Regulatory Requirements.

1. Install sewer lines to meet minimum State mandated separation distance from potable water lines. Separation distance is defined as distance between outside of water pipe and outside of sewer pipe. Install new sanitary sewers no closer to water lines than 10 feet in all horizontal directions. Where water and sanitary sewer lines cross, a minimum vertical separation in accordance with State and/or local standards is required when the water line passes above the sanitary sewer main. Where separation distance cannot be achieved, sanitary sewers shall be constructed of ductile iron sanitary sewer piping or encased in reinforced concrete (as detailed on the Drawings) for a minimum distance of 10 feet either side of the crossing.




2. Notify Contracting Officer immediately when water lines are uncovered during sanitary sewer installation where minimum separation distance cannot be maintained.

3. Lay gravity sewer lines in straight alignment and grade.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at job site.

B. Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to impact, shock, shear or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along ground. Do not roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks.

C. Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or slings around outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks, bars, or other devices in contact with interior surface of pipe to lift or move lined pipe.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. Provide piping materials for gravity sanitary sewers of sizes and types indicated on Drawings or as specified.

B. Unlined reinforced concrete pipe is not acceptable.

2.02 PIPE MATERIAL SCHEDULE

A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, use pipe materials that conform to requirements specified in one or more of following Sections:

1. Section 33 11 11 - Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe.

B. Where shown on Drawings, provide pipe meeting minimum class, dimension ratio, or other criteria indicated.

C. Pipe materials other than those listed above shall not be used for gravity sanitary sewers.

2.03 APPURTENANCES

A. Laterals. Conform to requirements of Section 33 31 15 - Sanitary Sewer Service Laterals.

B. Service Connections. Conform to requirements of Section 33 31 15 - Sanitary Sewer Service Laterals.

C. Roof, street or other type of surface water drains shall not be connected or reconnected into sanitary sewer lines.

2.04 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Bedding and Backfill: Conform to requirements of Section 31 20 00 Earth Moving and Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

PART 3: EXECUTION




3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prepare traffic control plans and set up street detours and barricades in preparation for excavation when construction will affect traffic. Conform to requirements of MUTCD, and/or local standards where applicable.

B. Provide barricades, flashing warning lights, and warning signs for excavations. Conform to requirements MUTCD and/or local standards where applicable. Maintain barricades and warning lights where work is in progress or where traffic is affected.

C. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards. Employ trench safety system for excavations over 5 feet deep.

D. Immediately notify agency or company owning utility line which is damaged, broken or disturbed. Obtain approval from Contracting Officer and agency or utility company for repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent.

E. Remove old pavements and structures including sidewalks and driveways in accordance with installation and DPW requirements.

F. Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with Contract Document requirements.

G. Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system.

3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING

A. All diversion and bypass pumping shall be performed in accordance with local and state standardsg.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Earthwork. Conform to requirements of Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use bedding as indicated on Drawings.

B. Line and Grade. Establish required uniform line and grade in trench from benchmarks identified by Contracting Officer. Maintain this control for minimum of 100 feet behind and ahead of pipe-laying operation. Use laser beam equipment to establish and maintain proper line and grade of work. Use of appropriately sized grade boards which are substantially supported is also acceptable. Protect boards and location stakes from damage or dislocation.

C. Trench Excavation. Excavate pipe trenches to depths shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

3.04 PIPE INSTALLATION BY OPEN CUT

A. Install pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in following paragraphs.

B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, bottom of trench fine graded, bedding material is installed, and trench has been approved by Contracting Officer.




C. Install pipe to line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in trench so interior surfaces of pipe follow grades and alignment indicated. Provide bell holes where necessary.

D. Install pipe with spigot ends toward downstream end of flow such that water flows into bell and out the spigot.

E. Form concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets.

F. Keep interior of pipe clean as installation progresses. Remove foreign material and debris from pipe

G. Provide lubricant, place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Install pipe to "home" mark where provided. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by Project Manager.

H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection.

I. When work is not in progress, cover exposed ends of pipes with approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering pipe.

J. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line with separation distance of less than 2 feet, construct new sewer pipe so that 20 feet of ductile iron pipe is centered on water line crossing or encase the sewer line with reinforced concrete encasement as detailed on the plans. If gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed above existing water line, construct new sewer pipe so that 20 feet of ductile iron pipe is centered on water line crossing or encase the sewer line with reinforced concrete encasement. .

K. Where gravity sanitary sewer is to be installed under existing water line, install new sewer using ductile iron or encased in reinforced concrete encasement as shown on Drawings. Maintain minimum 2-feet separation distance.

L. Where the length of the stub is not indicated, install the stub to the right-of-way line and seal the free end with an approved plug.

3.05 PIPE INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT

A. For installation of pipe by directional drilling, conform to requirements of specification sections on directional drilling as appropriate.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF APPURTENANCES

A. Construct manholes to conform to requirements of Section 33 31 12 - Precast Concrete Manholes.

3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Visual Inspection: Check pipe alignment in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

B. Mandrel Testing. Use Mandrel Test to test flexible pipe for deflection. Refer to Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

C. Pipe Leakage Test. After backfilling line segment and prior to tie-in of service connections, visually inspect gravity sanitary sewers where feasible, and test for




leakage in accordance with Section 33 01 30 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

3.08 BACKFILL AND SITE CLEANUP

A. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Backfill trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by Contracting Officer.

C. Repair and replace removed or damaged pavement, curbs, gutters, and sidewalks as specified by local base regulations.



SECTION 33 31 12 – PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES

Precast Concrete Manholes 33 31 12 - 1

1. GENERAL


A. Precast concrete manholes for sanitary sewers and water lines or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Precast concrete sanitary sewer manholes with fiberglass liner or sewer gas resistance epoxy coating where corrosion resistant manholes are specifically required to prevent early deterioration of the manhole.

C. Pile-supported concrete foundation used for unstable subgrade treatment for manhole base.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval:

1. Shop drawings of manhole sections, base units and construction details, including reinforcement, jointing methods, materials and dimensions.

2. Summary of criteria used in manhole design including, as minimum, material properties, loadings, load combinations, and dimensions assumed. Include certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in Paragraph 2.01E of this Specification.

3. Frames, grates, rings, and covers

4. Materials to be used in fabricating drop connections

5. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls

6. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs, if required.

7. Materials and procedures for corrosion-resistant liner and coatings, if required.

8. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing

9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix (bag) concrete, if used for channel inverts and benches.

2. PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES

A. Provide manhole sections, base sections, and related components conforming to ASTM C 478. Provide base riser section with integral floors, unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of manufacturer of manhole sections. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel.

B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from standard reinforced concrete manhole sections of diameter indicated on Drawings. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide correct height with fewest joints.

C. Provide tops to support AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading, and receive cast iron frame covers, as indicated on Drawings.




D. For manholes larger than 48-inch diameter, provide precast base sections with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric unless otherwise requested by Contracting Officer. Locate transition to provide minimum of 7-foot head clearance from base to underside of transition unless otherwise approved by Contracting Officer.

E. Design Loading Criteria: Manhole walls, transition slabs, cone tops, and manhole base slab shall be designed by manufacturer, to requirements of ASTM C 478 for depth as shown on Drawings and to resist the following loads.

1. AASHTO HS-20 vehicle loading applied to manhole cover and transmitted down to transition and base slabs

2. Unit soil weight of 120 lbs/ft3 located above portions of manhole, including base slab projections

3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 lbs/ft3

4. Internal liquid pressure based on unit weight of 63 lbs/ft3

5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by transition and base slabs

F. Provide joints between sections with o-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C443.

G. When base is cast monolithic with portion of vertical section, extend reinforcing in vertical section into base.

H. Precast Concrete Base: Suitable cutouts or holes to receive pipe and connections. Lowest edge of holes or cutouts: For water line manhole, no less than 6-inches above inside surface of floor of base.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Conform to requirements of Section – 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Channel Inverts: Use concrete for inverts not integrally formed with manhole base, with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi.

C. Concrete Foundation: Provide concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi for concrete foundation slab under manhole base section as indicated on Drawings.

2.03 REINFORCING BARS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section – 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2.04 FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Use castings for frames, grates, rings and covers conforming to ASTM A48, Class 35B.

B. Use clean castings capable of withstanding application of AASHTO M306- 40,000 pound proof loading without detrimental permanent deformation.

C. Fabricate castings to conform to shapes and dimensions as shown on Drawings, and cast with the wording or logo “SEWER”for sanitary sewer and “WATER” for water system frames and covers. Standard dimensions for manhole frames and covers shall be either 24 or 30-inches in diameter.




D. Castings shall be smoooth and clean, and free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Use clean and symmetrical cast holes in covers, free of plugs.

E. Provide watertight manhole frames and covers when the top of the frame and cover is below the 100-year flood elevation or when subjected to ponding. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall be provided with minimum of four bolts and gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply approved watertight manhole covers and frames.

2.05 DROP CONNECTIONS AND STUBS

A. All manhole drop connections shall be outside drop. Outside drops shall be provided when the invert elevation into the manhole is 24-inches higher than the manhole invert.

1. Pipe material used for outside drops shall be same pipe material as sewer main, or;

2. Ductile iron pipe as indicated on Drawings.

2.06 PIPE CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLE

A. Sanitary Sewers.

1. Provide resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C923. Use the following materials for metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C923:

a. External clamps: Type 304 stainless steel

1) Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum.

2) Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes:

b. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum

c. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gauge minimum, coated with minimum 16 mil fusion bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C213

2. Where rigid joints between pipe and cast-in-place manhole base are

specified, provide polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting physical property requirements of ASTM C923.

B. Water Lines

1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e., steel, ductile iron, or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, seal space between pipe and manhole wall with assembly consisting of rubber gasket or links mechanically compressed to form a watertight barrier.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of a stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and a rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16-inch wide.

2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS




A. Provide sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame in accordance with ASTM C443.

2.08 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS

A. Where corrosion-resistant manholes are required, such as a manhole receiving a force main or manholes located within a 1,000 feet down-stream of a force discharge, provide a fiberglass liner or sewer gas resistant epoxy coating for precast cylindrical manhole section, base sections, and cone sections. Liners relying on mechanically fastened batten strips as primary means of anchorage are unacceptable. All manholes with a corrosion resistant interior coating shall be provided with an exterior bituminous coating in locations where ground water table can reach above the base of the manhole.

2.09 BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Conform to requirements of Section -31 23 33 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

2.10 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. Provide prepackaged, inorganic, flowable, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only addition of water.

B. Meet requirements of ASTM C1107 and have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi.

2.11 VENT PIPES

A. Provide an external vent pipe for manholes for every third manhole when three or more consecutive water tight frame and covers are installed.

B. Vent opening to be located a minimum of 1 foot above 100 year flood plain.

C. Buried Vent Pipes: Provide appropriate size PVC or DIP as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Vent Outlet Assembly: Provide vent outlet assembly as shown on Drawings.

2.12 PROHIBITED MATERIALS

A. Do not use brick masonry for construction of sanitary sewer manholes, including adjustment of manholes to grade. Use only specified materials listed herein.

2.13 MANHOLE LADDER FOR WATERLINE MANHOLES

A. Manhole Ladder: Fiberglass with 300-lb rating at appropriate length; conform to requirements of OSHA.

1. Use components, including rungs, made of fiberglass, fabricated with nylon or aluminum rivets and/or epoxy. Apply non-skid coating to ladder rungs. Mount ladder using manufacturer's recommended hardware.

2. Fiberglass: Premium type polyester resin, reinforced with fiberglass; constructed to provide complete wetting of glass by resin; resistant to rot, fungi, bacterial growth and adverse effects of acids, alkalis and residential and industrial waste; yellow in color.

B. Provide approved petroleum-based tape encapsulating bolts in access manhole.

3. EXECUTION




3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that lines and grades are correct.

B. Obtain an adequate foundation for all manhole structures by removing and replacing unsuitable material with well-graded granular material, by tightening with coarse rock, or by such other means as provided for foundation preparation of the connected sewers, or as directed by the Contracting Officer.

C. Dewater sufficiently to maintain the ground water level at or below the bottom of the manhole foundation prior to an during the placement of the foundation.

D. Do not build manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by Contracting Officer.

3.02 PLACEMENT

A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions as shown on Drawings.

B. Place sanitary manholes at points of change in alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections, and end of sewer unless otherwise directed by Contracting Officer.

3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS

A. Place precast base on 6-inch thick (minimum) foundation of crushed stone, or concrete foundation slab.

B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: Notify Contracting Officer immediately when unsatisfactory material is encountered in the manhole subgrade. With AW approval, up to 12-inches of additional undercut may be permitted to achieve suitable foundation. If the additional undercut does not result in a satisfactory foundation, the Contractor shall obtain a bedding design prepared by a Geotechnical Engineer licensed in the State in which the project is being constructed.

3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS

A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations.

B. Install precast adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust finished elevation and to support manhole frame.

C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout.

D. Where fiberglass liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Precast concrete grade rings shall be permitted to achieve the required grade. Grade rings shall not be permitted to more than 12-inches.

F. External joint wrap all riser joints to ensure seal. No grout is permitted on the interior of manhole riser joints prior to testing.

G. Concrete base must be dry prior to setting any sections above it.

3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLES

A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




1. Where smooth exterior pipes, i.e. steel, ductile iron or PVC pipes are connected to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall shall be sealed with an assembly consisting of rubber gaskets or links mechanically compressed to form watertight barrier.

2. When connecting concrete or cement mortar coated steel pipes, or as an option for connecting smooth exterior pipes to manhole base or barrel, space between pipe and manhole wall may be sealed with an assembly consisting of stainless steel power sleeve, stainless steel take-up clamp and rubber gasket. Take-up clamp: Minimum of 9/16-inch wide.

B. Ensure no concrete, fill, or other rigid material is allowed to enter space between pipe and edge of wall opening at and around resilient connector on either interior or exterior of manhole. If necessary, fill space with compressible material to ensure full flexibility provided by resilient connector.

C. Where new manhole is constructed on existing sewer, rigid joint pipe may be used. Install waterstop gasket around existing pipe at center of cast-in-place wall. Join ends of split waterstop material at pipe springline using an adhesive recommended and supplied by waterstop manufacturer.

D. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling, or at direction of AW.

3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS

A. Construct invert channels to provide smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria:

1. Slope of invert bench: 1-inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2-inches per foot maximum

2. Depth of bench to invert:

a. Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half of largest pipe diameter

b. Pipes 15 to 24-inches: three-fourths of largest pipe diameter

c. Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to largest pipe diameter

3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.17 foot (2-inches) drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Drawing.

Form invert channels with concrete if not integral with manhole base section. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts.

3.07 DROP CONNECTIONS FOR SANITARY SEWERS

A. Install drop connection when sewer line enters manhole higher than 24-inches above invert of manhole

B. Backfill drop assembly shall be 3000 psi concrete to form solid encasement for all drop connections. Extend concrete encasement minimum of 4-inches outside bells, all per AW Standard Detail.

3.08 STUBS FOR FUTURE CONNECTIONS

A. In manholes, where future connections are indicated on Drawings, install resilient connectors and pipe stubs with approved watertight plugs.




3.09 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS

A. Combine precast concrete or HDPE adjustment rings so elevation of installed casting cover matches pavement surface. Seal between concrete adjustment ring and precast top section with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply latex-based bonding agent to precast concrete surfaces joined with non-shrink grout. Set cast iron frame on adjustment ring in bed of approved sealant material. Install sealant bed consisting of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 1/2-inch wide.

B. Wrap manhole frame and adjustment rings with external sealing material, minimum 3-inches beyond joint between ring and frame and adjustment rings and precast section.

C. For manholes in unpaved areas, set top of frame flush with existing grade upto a maximum of 12-inches above existing grade, unless otherwise noted. In unpaved areas, encase manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with face of manhole ring and top edge of frame. Provide rounded corner around perimeter.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill materials in area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to manhole, backfill existing sewer up to springline of pipe with flowable fill.

C. In unpaved areas, provide positive drainage away from all manhole frames to natural grade. Provide restoration of disturbed areas.

3.11 DOGHOUSE MANHOLE

A. Existing sewer pipe to remain until satisfactory completion of manhole testing.

B. Crown of existing pipe shall be flush with concrete shelf that is formed within the manhole.

C. Doghouse manholes shall be constructed as per AW Standard Details.


A. Conduct testing of manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 33 01 30- Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect manholes from damage until Work has been accepted. Repair damage to manholes at no additional cost.



SECTION 33 31 15 – SANITARY SEWER LATERALS

Sanitary Sewer Laterals 33 31 15 - 1

PART 1: GENERAL


A. Installation of service laterals in sanitary sewers serving areas where sanitary sewer service did not previously exist.

B. Reconnection of existing service connections along parallel, replacement, or rehabilitated sanitary sewers.


A. Accurately locate in field all proposed service laterals along new sanitary sewer main.

B. Accurately locate in field existing service connections and proposed service laterals along alignment of new parallel or replacement sewer main.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting, coupling and adapter.

C. Show reconnected services on record drawings. Give exact distance from each service connection to nearest downstream manhole.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC SERVICE CONNECTION

A. Use SDR 35 PVC sewer pipe conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D3034. For depths greater than 10’, use SDR 26.

B. PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D3212.

C. Provide service connection pipe in sizes shown on Drawings. For reconnection of existing services, select service connection pipe diameter to match existing service diameter. Reconnections to rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains shall be limited to following maximum service connection diameter:

Sewer Diameter Maximum Service Connection Diameter

8” or less 4”

10” or less 6”

D. Subject to above limits, provide 6-inch service connection when more than one service discharges into single pipe.

E. Connect service laterals to new, parallel, or replacement sewer mains with prefabricated, full-bodied tee or wye fittings conforming to specifications for sewer main pipe material as specified in other Sections for sewers less than 10 inches in diameter.

F. Where sewers are installed using pipe augering or tunneling, or where sewer is 10 inches or greater in diameter, use an inserta tee to connect service to sewer main.




2.02 PIPE SADDLES

A. Use pipe saddles only on existing sanitary sewer mains. Comply with Paragraph 2.01E for new, parallel, and replacement sanitary sewer mains.

B. Supply one-piece prefabricated saddle, either polyethylene or PVC, with neoprene gasket to accomplish complete seal. Use saddle fabricated to fit outside diameter of connecting pipe. Protruding lip of saddle must be at least 5/8-inch long with grooves or ridges to retain stainless steel band clamps.

C. Use 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps for securing saddles to liner pipe.

2.03 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS

A. For connections between new PVC pipe stubouts and existing service, 4-, 6-, or 8-inch diameter, use flexible adapter coupling consisting of neoprene gasket and stainless steel shear rings with 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps:

B. For connections between new PVC pipe stubout and new service, use rubber-gasket adapter coupling:

2.04 PLUGS AND CAPS

C. Seal upstream end of unconnected sewer service stubs with rubber gasket plugs or caps of same pipe type and size.

2.05 CLEANOUTS

A. Use SDR 35 PVC sewer pipe conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D3034.

B. PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D3212.

C. Cleanouts to be provided every 100 LF, and at all changes of direction along the sanitary sewer lateral.

D. Concrete collars to be provided on all new cleanout installations.

E. Install double cleanout on all new individual service connections in accordance with AW standard details.

PART 3: EXECUTION


A. Provide minimum of 72 hours notice to customers whose sanitary sewer service will potentially be interrupted.

B. Accurately field locate service connections, whether in service or not, along rehabilitated sanitary sewer main. For parallel and replacement sewers, service connections may be located as pipe laying progresses from downstream to upstream.

C. Properly disconnect existing connections from sewer and reconnect to rehabilitated liner, as described in this Section.

D. Reconnect service connections, including those that go to unoccupied or abandoned buildings or to vacant lots, unless directed otherwise by Contracting Officer.




E. Complete reconnection of service lines within 24 hours after cured-in-place liner installation and within 72 hours after disconnection for sliplining, parallel, or replacement sanitary sewer mains.

F. Reconnect services on cured-in-place liner at 12 feet depth or less by excavation method. Contracting Officer reserves right to require service connections by excavation when remote cut service connection damages lines.

G. Reconnection by excavation method shall include fittings and required pipe length to reconnect service line.

H. Connect services 8 inches in diameter and larger to sewer by construction of manhole. Refer to appropriate Specification on manholes for construction.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Provide barricades, warning lights, and signs for excavations created for service connections.

B. Do not allow sand, debris, or runoff to enter sewer system.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Determine existing sewer locations and number of existing service connections from closed circuit television (CCTV) inspection DVDs or from field survey. Accurately field locate existing service connections, whether in service or not. Use existing service locations to connect or reconnect service lines or liner.

B. For rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains, allow liner to normalize to ambient temperature and recover from imposed stretch. For cured-in-place liners, verify that liner is completely cured.

C. For new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains, complete testing and acceptance of downstream sewers as applicable.

3.04 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Perform work in accordance with OSHA standards.

C. Install and operate necessary ground water and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. Determine locations where limited access, buildings or structure preclude use of mechanical excavation equipment. Obtain approval from Contracting Officer for hand excavation.

3.05 RECONNECTION BY EXCAVATION METHOD

A. Remove portion of existing sanitary sewer main or carrier pipe to expose liner pipe. Provide sufficient working space for installing prefabricated pipe saddle.

B. Carefully cut liner pipe making hole to accept stubout protruding from underside of saddle.




C. Strap on saddle using stainless steel band on each side of saddle. Tighten bands to produce watertight seal of saddle gasket to liner pipe.

D. Remove and replace cracked, offset, or leaking service line for up to 5 feet, measured horizontally, from center of new liner.

E. Make up connection between liner and service line using PVC sewer pipe and approved fittings and couplings.

F. Encase entire service connection in cement stabilized sand as shown on Drawings.

G. Test service connections before backfilling.

3.06 RECONNECTION BY REMOTE METHOD

A. Make service reconnections using remote-operated cutting tools on cured-in-place liners at depth greater than 12 feet.

B. Employ method and equipment that restore service connection capacity to not less than 90 percent of original capacity.

C. Immediately open missed connections and repair holes drilled in error using method approved by Contracting Officer.

3.07 RECONNECTION ON PARALLEL OR REPLACEMENT SEGMENTS

A. Install service connections on sewer main.

B. Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line for up to 5 feet, measured horizontally, from centerline of sanitary sewer main.

C. Make up connection between main and existing service line using PVC sewer pipe and approved couplings, as shown on Drawings.

D. Test service connections before backfilling.

E. Embed service connection and service line as specified for sanitary sewer main as shown on Drawings. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF NEW SERVICE LATERALS

A. Install service connections on sanitary sewer main for each service connection. Provide length of lateral indicated on Drawings. Install plug or cap on upstream end of service lateral as needed.

B. Test service connections before backfilling.

C. Embed service connection and service line as specified for sanitary sewer main, and as shown on Drawings. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Install minimum 2-foot length of magnetic locating tape along axis of service stub and 9 inches to 12 inches above crown of pipe, at end of stub.

D. Install dual direction cleanouts at the point of demarcation or as otherwise shown on Drawings.

3.09 TESTING




A. Test service reconnections and service laterals. Follow applicable procedures given in Section 33 01 30.13 - Acceptance Testing for Sanitary Sewers to perform smoke testing to confirm reconnection.

B. Perform post installation CCTV inspection as specified in the Contract Documents. Cleaning and television inspection to show locations of service connection.

3.10 CLEANUP

A. Backfill excavation as specified in Section 31 23 33 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities.

B. Replace pavement or sidewalks removed or damaged by excavation. In unpaved areas, bring surface to grade and slope surrounding excavation. Restore all disturbed paved and lawn areas in accordance with local base and DPW regulations.



SECTION 33 41 00 – STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEM

Storm Sewage System 33 41 00 - 1

1. GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and accessories, and bedding. 2. Connection of drainage system to existing system. 3. Catch basins, paved area drainage, and site surface drainage.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of Fort Drum 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving 4. Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials 5. Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities 6. Section 33 11 00 – Piping-General Provisions 7. Section 33 31 11 – Gravity Sanitary Sewers

1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)

1. AASHTO M198 - (1990;R 1993) Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets.

B. American Concrete Pipe Association

1. ACPA 01-102 - (1988) Concrete Pipe Handbook 2. ACPA 01-103 - (1990) Concrete Pipe Installation Manual

C. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 497 - (1990; Rev B) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement

2. ASTM A 615/A 615/M - (1993) Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

3. ASTM C 76 - (1990) Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 4. ASTM C 139 - (1973; Rev. 1989) Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of

Catch Basins and Manholes 5. ASTM C 270 - (1994) Mortar for Unit Masonry 6. ASTM C 443 - (1985; Rev. A, R 1990) joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and

Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets 7. ASTM C 476 - (1991) Grout for Masonry 8. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D 3139 - Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric

Seals. 10. ASTM D 3212 - (1992) Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible




Elastomeric Seals. 11. ASTM D 4101 - (1992; Rev. B) Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials 12. ASTM F 477 - (1993) Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 13. ASTM F 794 - (1993; Rev. A) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe

with a Smooth Interior and Fittings

D. Federal Specification

E. FS RR-F-621 - (Rev. E) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole

F. State of New York, Department of Transportation (NY DOT).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Shop Drawings, Product Data & Submittals.

B. Test Reports: Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to the applicable pipe specifications shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review before the pipe is installed.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

D. Manufacture's product data on all pipe.

E. As-Built Survey indicating Catch Basin and Pipe locations and Inverts.

F. Certification: Certify that materials comply with specification requirements.

G. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, curb inlets, cleanouts, and invert elevations.

H. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.


A. Deliver material with manufacture's tags and labels intact.

B. Handle and store so as to avoid damage.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building, trenching, and connection to building drainage piping.

B. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, curb inlets,




cleanouts, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS

A. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Storm drainage pipe 12" and larger shall be reinforced concrete pipe conforming to ASTM C 76, Class III or ASTM C507 for elliptical concrete pipe.

1. Concrete Pipe Joints shall conform to ASTM C443, and gaskets shall be suitable for use with sewage.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings: Storm drainage pipe 6" to 12" shall be ASTM D3034, SDR 35.

1. Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212, and gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477.

C. Corrugated Plastic Pipe (Smooth Interior) and Fittings: Use for pipes 4 inches in diameter or smaller. Corrugated Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe shall conform to ASTM F 794. PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D 1784.

1. Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212, and gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477.

D. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M.

E. Water: Water for masonry mortar shall be fresh, clean and potable.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

C. For requirements refer to specification Section 01 00 00 Requirements of F.H.

D. Grout: as required in specification Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. Materials: ASTM D 3212 for PVC pipe joints with ASTM F 477

2.3 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

A. Precast Concrete Structures: ASTM C 478, except as specified herein. Provide an air content of 6 percent, plus or minus 3 percent and a minimal wall thickness of 5 inches.




ASTM A 615/A 615M reinforcing bars. ASTM A 497 welded wire fabric. ASTM C 443 or AASHTO M 198, Type B gaskets for joint connections. Provide a 4-inch layer of clean gravel bedding with a maximum size of 2 inches.

B. Concrete Headwalls: Provide cast in place concrete and steal reinforcement in accordance with specification Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

C. Masonry Materials: Shall conform to the following specifications and other requirements specified hereunder.

2.4 METAL ITEMS

A. Frames, Covers and Gratings: Traffic rated.

1. Curb Inlet, East Jordan Ironworks V-1432 or equivalent. 2. Surface Inlet, Neenah Foundry R-2558 or equivalent. 3. Biofilter Outlet, Neenah Foundry R-4859-C or equivalent. 4. Storm Manhole, Neenah Foundry R-1557 or equivalent. 5. All drainage castings shall be marked “DUMP NO WASTE. DRAINS TO

WATERWAYS”.

B. Drainage Structure Steps: Zinc-coated steel conforming to ANSI A14.3. Plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C 443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70, plus or minus 5. Steps are not required in manholes, curb inlets or catch basins less than 4 feet in depth.

2.5 MANHOLES

A. Provide as specified in 03 31 12 Precast Concrete Manholes.

3. EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with coarse aggregate.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

C. Prior to the construction of any storm sewer, the Contractor's surveyor shall place adequate line and grade stakes and shall also set stakes and furnish grades so that all




structure tops can be set to finish grade, in accordance with the approved plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION

A. Location: The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the building.

B. Earthwork: Perform earthwork operations in accordance with specification Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving, Section 31 23 23 – Utility Backfill Materials, and Section 31 23 33 – Excavation Backfill and Compaction for Utilities

C. Pipe Laying and Jointing: Replace, by one of the proper dimensions, any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper caulking or installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads.

D. Connections to Existing Lines: Notify the Installation Contracting Officer in writing at least 10 days prior to the date that connections are to be made. Obtain approval of the Contracting Officer before interrupting service. Conduct work so that there is a minimal interruption of service on existing lines.

E. Special Requirements of Installation of Concrete Piping: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with the general requirements and procedures for the installation of piping and with the provisions for rubber gasket jointing and jointing procedures of ACPA 01-103 or of ACPA 01-102, Chapter 9. Make joints with the gaskets previously specified for joints with this piping. Clean and dry surfaces receiving lubricants, cements or adhesives. Affix gaskets to pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe. Protect gaskets from the sun, blowing dust and other deleterious agents at all times. Before installation of the pipe, inspect gaskets and remove and replace loose or improperly affixed gaskets. Align each pipe section with the previously installed pipe section, and pull the joint together. If while pulling the joint, the gasket becomes loose and can be seen through the exterior joint recess when the pipe is pulled up to within one inch of closure, remove the pipe and remake the joint.

F. Special Requirements of Installation of Corrugated Plastic Piping: Install pipe and fittings in accordance with the general requirements and procedures for the installation of piping and with the recommendations of the PVC pipe manufacturer. Utility Line Marking: For requirements see specification Section 01 00 00 – Requirements of F.H.

3.4 PIPELINE TESTING

A. Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line.

B. PVC Pipe Deflection Test:

1. General:




a. Test installed pipeline for deflection by pulling a mandrel through sewer without aid of mechanical pulling device.

b. Perform test at least 30 days after trench backfill and compaction have been completed.

c. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5 percent. 2. Mandrel:

a. Full circle, solid or rigid odd number of legs (minimum 9 legs) steel cylinder with pulling rings at each end.

b. Diameter: Sized to allow only as much initial deflection for ultimate deflection of 5 percent.

c. Obtain Contracting Officer approval for use of mandrel smaller than 96-2/3 percent of inside diameter of pipe.

3. Correcting Deficiencies or Obstructions: a. Excavate to spring line of pipeline and replace and re-compact pipe zone

material. b. Internal pipe re-rounding or vibration will not be allowed. c. If pipe does not pass mandrel test after replacement of pipe zone material and

trench backfill, re-excavate and replace pipeline.


CANOPY 33 52 08 - 1

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES SECTION 33 52 08 - CANOPY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. All labor, equipment and material and incidentals to design, furnish and install a prefabricated/Pre-engineered metal canopy to include footings and lighting where shown on the drawings and described herein:


A. Division 3: Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Division 5: Metal Fabrications D. Division 16: Electrical

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structures shall be the product of a manufacturer with a minimum of 20 years documented

experience in the design and fabrication of steel canopies.

B. Electrical devices factory installed within the prefabricated canopy shall be UL listed. Factory installed wiring system shall bear UL Classification label certifying compliance with the National Electric Code.

C. A professional engineer licensed in the State the project is occurring in shall accomplish

structural design. Design shall be accomplished in accordance with State and local building codes.

D. Verify all dimensions shown on drawings by taking field measurements to insure proper fit

and attachment of all component parts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish complete literature and installation and assembly drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to fabrication and installation to include:

1. Manufacturer's data 2. Drawings shall indicate materials, finish size and methods of fabrication, assembly,

and installation. 3. Calculations for design of the canopy structure and footings shall be submitted for

approval prior to fabrication. A professional engineer in the State the project is occurring in for entire canopy structures and footings shall seal design calculations. A subsurface investigation, if available, will be presented in Section 02010. If a subsurface investigation is not presented, all investigations required for the design of the canopy and footings shall be acquired by and at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Submit color charts illustrating all finish colors and patterns.


13048-2

A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original protective packaging. B. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surface. C. Maintain protective covers on all items until installation is complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: Use steel and aluminum with recycled content, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings,

or not approved by Contracting Officer 2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Columns shall be fabricated from hollow structural sections conforming to ASTM A500 Grade B, with minimum yield strength of 46 ksi. ASTM A36 structural steel plate with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi with pre-punched or pre-drilled boltholes shall be used for column top and base plates. Columns shall be provided with electrical access openings, cover plates, conduits and drains per owner requirements.

B. Wide flange beams conforming to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 50 ksi shall be

used as the primary roof-framing members. Other roof-framing members (channel, angle, or tees), if used, shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi. Bracing shall be designed as required by design.

C. Structural steel plate shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi.

D. Structural bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 Specification for High Strength Bolts for

Structural Steel Joints. All structural steel framing members shall be shop fabricated for field bolted assembly, unless otherwise specified on drawing.

E. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A36 with minimum yield strength of 36 ksi. Double nuts

and washers shall be provided with each anchor bolt, with one set to be used for leveling column.

F. All structural steel framing members shall be cleaned to remove loose mill scale and other

foreign matter.

G. After cleaning, all members shall be given one shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer. The primer coat thickness shall be a minimum of 1 mil.

2.3 DECK PANEL

A. Roof deck panels shall conform to ASTM A653 Grade 40 steel with minimum yield strength

of 40 ksi, with a G60 galvanized surface per ASTM A924.

B. Panel profile shall have a minimum thickness of 24 gauge.

C. Panels shall have a finish side coated with a full coat of white polyester paint baked on over an epoxy primer. A white wash coat baked on over an epoxy primer shall protect the interior side of the panel.

D. Panels shall be fastened to the bottom flange of the wide flange purlin beams with a system,

which requires no "through the panel" fasteners.

E. Deck panels shall not be spliced.

13048-3

2.4 FASCIA SYSTEM A. Kynar Aluminum Composite Material Panels shall be provided with a 4 mm thick pre-finished

aluminum composite material substrate. Finish color shall be factory applied. color per EXCHANGE requirements.

B. Fascia outriggers shall be cold formed 2” x 2” x 20 gauge steel angles conforming to ASTM

A653 Grade CS with a minimum yield strength of 25 ksi, with a G90 galvanized surface per ASTM A924. 2” x 2” x 18 gauge or 2” x 2” x 1/8 inch structural angle shall be used as required by design. Outrigger spacing per design requirements.

C. There shall be no exposed fasteners on exterior or bottom face of fascia panels.

D. Vertical seams shall be sealed from backside. E. 24 gage flashing shall be used as required by design.

2.5 GUTTER

A. Gutter shall conform to ASTM A653 Grade 40 steel with minimum yield strength of 40 ksi, with a G60 galvanized surface per ASTM A924.

B. Profile shall be at a minimum be 12-inch wide x 4-inch deep, 24 gauge thick.

C. Gutters shall have a finish side coated with a full coat of polyester paint baked on over an

epoxy primer. A white wash coat baked on over an epoxy primer shall protect the interior side of the gutter.

D. Gutter leaders to column drain shall be one of the following options: 3 inch diameter PVC

pipe with a 24 gauge leader cover (dry leader) or an 8 inch wide tapered (4 inch to 6 inch deep) 24 gauge steel leader (wet leader). Larger gutters shall be used where required for proper drainage.

2.6 DOWNSPOUTS

A. External downspouts shall be 3” x 4” roll formed aluminum with watertight locked seams. Exterior side coated with a full coat of polyester paint baked on over an epoxy primer color per EXCHANGE requirements. Eternal downspouts shall be mounted to the face of the column and be of one continuous length. Larger drains shall be used where required for proper drainage.

B. Internal downspouts shall be 3 inch diameter PVC with couplings provided at gutter leader

attachment location and at base of column where attachment to site drainage system is required. Larger drains shall be used where required for proper drainage.

2.7 LIGHTS

A. Lighting layout and fixtures shall be per requirements shown in the plans.

2.8 SIGNS A. Signs and logos shown in the drawings will be furnished and installed by EXCHANGE. Signs

and logos are shown in drawings for information only.

2.9 FOOTINGS

13048-4

A. Footings shall be designed and installed by the fabricator. Designs shall conform to State and local building codes. A professional engineer in the State the project is occurring in shall seal design calculations. Calculations shall be submitted for approval prior to placing the footings. Footings shall be reinforced concrete. Subsurface investigations shall be the responsibility of the fabricator.

B. Concrete shall conform to ACI 301.

C. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615.


A. Footings shall be placed in conformance with CRSI 63 and 67. Anchor bolts and templates shall be shipped to owner prior to pouring canopy footings.

B. Structural steel shall be set plumb, square and level in accordance with Erection drawings

provided by the fabricator. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the latest AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice. All structural bolts shall be tightened by the turn-of-the-nut method as specified in the latest RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

C. Deck, fascia, and gutter systems, as well as other accessories shall be assembled in

accordance with by the fabricator.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. After installation, make final adjustments to ensure all members fit and are aligned properly. B. After final adjustment, all metal surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Leave work area clean and free of debris. END 33 52 08

FUEL DISPENSING AND ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS 33 52 10 - 1

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES SECTION 33 52 10 - FUEL DISPENSING AND ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK SYSTEMS

(AMERON PIPING OPTION)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A . Provide a complete fueling system, including but not limited to two aboveground storage tanks, submersible pumps, electrical wiring, electronic control/monitoring/leak detection system, Stage I vapor recovery system, below ground product piping, fittings, valves, caps, unions and necessary appurtenances, as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required for a complete and operating system. The complete fueling system shall include EXCHANGE-furnished, Contractor-installed fuel dispensers and electrical controls for the Point Of Sale system as shown on drawings

B . The complete operational fuel dispensing system must be successfully tested, certified, and registered, and shall have all necessary permits to conduct sales of gasoline. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required testing, permits, certifications and registrations.

C . Provide complete secondary containment of product piping including transition piping sump, double-walled product piping, dispenser sumps, and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and as required to prevent the possibility of contamination of air, soil, water, or groundwater.

D . Install fully functional electronic fuel dispensing system. The system shall include EXCHANGE furnished dispensers, data control consoles, interconnecting devices as well as Contractor-furnished dispenser accessories and hanging hardware; all as specified, shown on the drawings and as required for a complete and operating system.

E . Provide submersible turbine fuel pumps as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating installation.

F . Provide double walled, insulated aboveground fuel storage tanks meeting the requirements of UL 2085 including covered steel dike areas complying the New York State regulations and tank openings as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system.

G . Provide above and below-ground piping, fittings, valves, instruments, controls and supports as shown on the drawings.

H . Provide tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system including console with alarm capability, automatic tank gauging equipment, electronic line leak detectors for primary piping of double-walled product piping, sensors for all secondary containment (including tanks, piping, transition and dispenser sumps), an overfill alarm with acknowledgement switch, and accessories as specified, shown on the drawings, and required for a complete and operating system. Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system shall be the latest model with the most current software and all new components. Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system shall be ordered all new from the equipment supplier after award of contract by the EXCHANGE. Use of surplus Tank monitoring/inventory control/release detection system equipment is not allowed.


I . Contractor shall prepare and pay for all required State, County, and Local permits, applications and registrations or other documents required for the installation and operation of fuel storage and dispensing facilities. This includes preparation of documentation to satisfy the initial notification, notification of any required State or Local inspection authorities, copies of licenses, fuel system experience credentials, manufacturer’s certifications and notification of compliance status requirements under 40 CFR 63.11124. Coordinate the preparation and submission of documents with the Fort Drum Environmental Office.

J . Provide all excavation, trenching, and backfilling required for installation of fuel dispensing and aboveground storage tank system.

K . Furnish and install chain link screen fence and pipe bollards as shown on the drawings.

L . Coordinate installation and construction with applicable sections within Division 26 and 27.

M . Coordinate tank installation activities with Tony Rambone of Ft. Drum – 315.772.4154.


A. Comply with the following codes and standards (use the most recent version):

1. Most recent State AST Technical and Installation standards. 2. NFPA No. 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 3. NFPA No. 30A, Automotive and Marine Service Station Code. 4. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA No. 329, Handling Underground Release of Flammable and Combustible

Liquids. 6. Applicable portions of EPA 40 CFR Part 280, Technical Standards and

Corrective Action Requirements for Contracting Officers and Operators of Underground Storage Tanks.

7. 40 CFR Part 112 8. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910.106, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 9. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated Welded and Seamless. 10. ASTM A234, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel

and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 11. ASTM D2310-80, Standard Classification for Machine-Made Reinforced

Thermosetting-Resin Pipe. 12. ASTM D2517-81, Standard Specification for Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas

Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 13. ASTM D2996-88, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound "Fiberglass" (Glass

Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe. 14. ASME B16.11, Steel Threaded Fittings. 15. ASME B16.5, Steel Flanges and Flange Fittings. 16. UL 142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 17. UL 79, Power-Operated Pumps for Petroleum Product Dispensing Systems. 18. UL 87, Power-Operated Dispensing Devices for Petroleum Products. 19. UL 567, Pipe Connections for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP-Gas. 20. UL 842, Valves for Flammable Fluids. 21. UL 860, Pipe Unions for Flammable and Combustible Fluids and Fire Protection

Service. 22. UL 1238, Control Equipment for Use with Flammable Liquid Dispensing Devices. 23. California Air Resources Board (CARB) Executive Orders applicable to system. 24. California Air Resources Board (CARB) Test Procedures applicable to system.


25. PEI RP 200-13 Recommended Practices for Installation of Aboveground Storage Systems for Motor Vehicle Fueling.

26. PEI RP 300-09 Recommended Practices for Installation and Testing of Vapor Recovery Systems at Vehicle Fueling Sites.

27. All other applicable ASTM and UL standards. 28. All applicable EPA requirements relating to release detection, spill and overfill

prevention, and corrosion protection. 29. All other applicable local, state, and federal codes, standards, licensing and

registration requirements. 30. UL 2085, Fire Resistant Aboveground Storage Tanks. 31. New York State EPA Regulations.

B. Contractor Experience and Licensing:

1. Contractor shall certify that he (or his installation sub-contractor) has at least four years experience installing aboveground fuel storage tanks and dispensing equipment and is certified by the State of New York. He shall also assure that the designed fuel system shall be installed by skilled workmen, licensed by the State of New York and certified by the various equipment manufacturers. Contractor’s fuel system installer and electrician shall have four years prior experience with fuel systems and related equipment. Welding shall be performed by State- certified welders. As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent three fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. Although the tanks are above ground steel tanks, the contractor (or his installation sub-contractor) shall be certified for UST installations and underground product and vent piping.

2. Contractor Certification of Licensing and Experience. Contractor shall certify that

he (or his installation subcontractor) is a certified installer and/or Authorized Service Contractor for the following equipment manufacturers, as applicable to the system being installed:

a. Dresser-Wayne b. Veeder-Root c. Red Jacket d. OPW / PISCES/Ameron e. Modern Welding ASTs

3. Contractor shall also certify that he (or his installation subcontractor) holds all necessary licenses and manufacturer certifications for construction and installation required under this contract at the project location. These current certifications shall be submitted in writing to the Contracting Officer before construction award of the contract. Changing of subcontractors after this certification will require re-certification of the new subcontractor, showing requisite experience and resubmittal to the Contracting Officer prior to the new subcontractor performing any work on the jobsite.

4. Contractor shall certify that the installation of the petroleum-system-related electrical components will be done by an experienced contractor or subcontractor. This petroleum electrical contractor shall have fuel electrical system experience with systems similar to those installed under this contract. (Petroleum-system-related components are those essential to the legal operation of the petroleum storage, dispensing, leak detection, and emergency equipment. They include, but are not limited to: dispensers, submersible pumps, pump controllers, leak detection equipment, vapor recovery systems, emergency shut-


off switches, control and all conduit related to these systems.) As evidence of this experience, a list of the most recent five fuel system installations performed by this contractor with complete descriptions of the location, the project name, and the equipment installed and date of project shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer before construction begins. NOTE: It is preferred but not mandatory that the petroleum electrical subcontractor be a subcontractor to the petroleum system installer. If the petroleum electrical installer is a subcontractor of the petroleum systems installer described in 1, above, and worked on the projects submitted under that paragraph, contractor shall so certify and no additional projects need be reported.

CERTIFICATION OF FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICIAN EXPERIENCE

I certify that the fuel system electrical system installation, testing and completion will be

performed by (the installer’s) (my) subcontractor who has experience in the installation of multiple

dispenser retail fuel systems similar to the one required by this contract, including but not limited

to : Multi-Product Dispensers (MPDs), submersible pumps, pump controllers, leak detection

equipment, vapor recovery systems, emergency shut-off switches, modular switchgears and

conduit and wiring related to these systems.

The fuel system electrical contractor for this project holds the following licenses and certifications:

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

This contractor has completed the following five projects that included retail fuel-related electrical

systems:

1. _____________________________

2. _____________________________

3. _____________________________

4. _____________________________

5. _____________________________

(Include project name, completion date, location, equipment installed, connected and tested.)

I certify that this information is true and correct,

__________________________________________________________________

Contractor_____________________________________Date________________


5. The licensed, experienced and manufacturer-certified fuel system installers described in B. 1-4 above shall remain on-site during all active phases of the fuel system installation. Unlicensed, un-experienced and non-manufacturer-certified laborers may not perform substantial work without a licensed, experienced and manufacturer-certified fuel system installer present.

C. Detailed drawings of proposed departures due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for coordination of approval. The contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of materials and equipment without substantial alteration. Materials and equipment installed in the system shall be suitable for the pressures and temperatures expected to be encountered and suitable to the climate and environmental conditions of the location of the project.

D. Contractor’s responsibilities under this quality assurance section include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Receipt and storage of all items of equipment in a location protected from theft, vandalism, inclement weather, or other damage.

2. Providing required interconnections to controls, equipment, lighting, transfer pumps, motor starters, monitoring devices, product pumps and emergency disconnect systems.

3. Construction of openings, depressions, and sleeves for mechanical and electrical piping and conduit as required.

4. Providing hardware and related items as required to assure that equipment components are properly mounted, securely anchored, adequately ventilated, or where required, are adequately sealed from vapors.

5. Verifying size of components to assure space required for dispensers, consoles and interconnecting devices does not exceed designated space available as indicated on drawings.

6. Determining if unusual conditions or circumstances exist at the site (or in the vicinity of the installation) which could damage the electronic components or circuitry, or otherwise impair the proper function of the system, and incorporating, in such event, the necessary protective devices into the installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit shop drawings for the following in accordance with Section 01300 requirements:

1. Product piping and fittings 2. Dispenser Sumps 3. Submersible fuel pumps 4. Aboveground fuel storage tank, fittings, tank manufacturer fabricated tank access

ladders 5. Tank monitoring / inventory control / release detection system

B . No work shall be performed without the shop drawings having been approved by Contracting Officer or his designated agent.

C . Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer a proposed schedule of the phases of the work for the installation of the fuel storage tanks, piping and dispensing systems.

D . Other aboveground fuel storage tank submittals shall include:

1. Contractor shall submit six copies of shop drawings for each tank of same size. Drawings shall include all critical dimensions and show locations of all fittings and


accessories, i.e., manways, saddles, etc. All shop drawings shall be submitted at the same time.

2. Contractor shall submit six copies of equipment information from manufacturer’s catalog data, installation instructions and calibration charts.

3. Two tank conversion charts shall be left with the Facilities Manager upon the completion of construction.

4. Contractor shall reference 3.17 for testing requirements.

E . Fuel System Environmental Compliance Documentation and Records- The following documents or the state or location’s equivalent of these records will be furnished in two copies, one left at the EXCHANGE facility manager’s office and one furnished to the contracting officer for delivery to the installation environmental office:

1. AST registration (if required) for each tank including any changes to registration (“owner” is the Installation).

2. Other permits (such as Air Operation Permit). 3. Installer Certification of the AST system. 4. As-built plans with layout of tanks and piping, photos. 5. Third Party Certifications of leak detection systems (equipment or methods). 6. Documentation of grounding and corrosion protection, if part of the system. 7. Manufacturer’s manuals (owner’s operator’s and maintenance manuals) for all

system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.). CARB Executive Order for Stage II Vapor Recovery System, if installed.

8. Manufacturer’s warranty documentation for all system components and equipment (including tanks, lines, leak detection components, dispensers, nozzles, etc.)

9. Initial Compliance Test Records (if not included with Installer Certification above). a. Tanks b. Lines c. Stage I (CARB TP 201.1E and TP 201.3) d. Stage II Vapor Recover System (if required in the area) e. Dispenser Calibration

10. Training Roster for O & M Training given to EXCHANGE associates. 11. Fuel System Final Inspection Report. 12. Digital photographs of main stages of tank installation and other construction

activities, as shown below. Sufficient photographs to adequately document and represent the activity will be taken. Any problems encountered or authorized deviations from the drawings or specifications shall be documented with appropriate photographs. The contractor with submit the photographs via the internet to the EXCHANGE Constructware website as soon as possible but not later than 5 business days prior to any scheduled EXCHANGE technical inspection (or 5 business days prior to the final inspection, if documenting work done between the last EXCHANGE technical inspection by the EXCHANGE A-E and the final inspection).

13. Four copies of a chronological Installation Report of the complete tank system installation construction documenting all major activities related to the installation of the underground storage tanks, piping, dispensing and release detection equipment , Stage II Vapor recovery system (if required), and Stage I system shall be provided to EXCHANGE Contracting Officer. Contractor’s Installation Report shall include documentation of construction activities and photographs of the construction work in progress. Documentation of specific construction activities shall include, at a minimum the following:


’ CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

DOCUMENTED BY REMARKS

1

Delivery of the Aboveground Storage Tank Shipping manifest Report shall note delivery condition of tanks

2

Air Test of Tank upon delivery

Statement of testing protocol with results of air testing (signed by tank contractor)

Air test must be conducted at 3-5 PSI (air gauge must be equipped with a pressure relief valve set at 5 PSI), and must follow manufacturer’s procedures

3 Placement of Tank Photograph.,Field notes in Installation Report

4

Installing the Product lines Photographs Follow piping manufacturer’s procedures

5

Installing the Vapor Recovery lines Not Applicable Not Applicable

6 Installing the Stage II Vapor Recovery System Not Applicable Not Applicable 7 Installing the Tank Vent lines Photographs Ensure proper slope of vent lines 8

Air / Soap testing of all piping Photographs Field notes (signed)

9

Placement of Containment sumps Photographs Follow sump manufacturer’s procedures

10 Installing the above ground piping Photographs 11 Placement of Electrical Conduit Photographs 12 Forming / Pouring concrete for canopy footings Photographs 13 Backfilling the Pipe chase Photographs Document proper installation of piping

14 Installation of Dispensers Photographs 15 Purging of Product Piping of Air Field notes (signed) 16 Notification of System Testing to Regulators Copy of Notification

17 Calibration of Dispensers Field Notes (signed) Verify proper calibration tolerances 18 Flow rate Determination Field Notes (signed) Verify flow rate not to exceed 10 GPM 19 Certification of Fueling System:

Tank & line tightness tests Test Reports, copy of the Performance Criteria for the Test

Using an EPA third-party certified method

20 Certification of Vapor Recovery System: Stage I and Stage II

Test Reports Following CARB Test Procedures

21 Certification of the Fueling Facility Operators (Training Documentation)

Outline of Course Content & Rosters

22 Installer Certification of AST Installation Affidavit/Oath 23 Registration of Tank System Copy of Registration State AST registration form, if applicable 24 Registration of Vapor Recovery System Not Applicable Not Applicable 25 Warranty/Registration Paperwork for

Equipment Copy of Warranty and Registration

F . Contractor shall submit six copies of catalog data of submersible pumps along with proper pump selection, performance chart, and installation, operation and service manuals.

G . Contractor shall submit Documentation of contractor or installer sub-contractor and of petroleum systems electrician’s experience as required in Section 1.02 B above.


H . Contractor shall provide for approval the name of the testing company he will use to perform pressure testing of the tanks and piping system per manufacturers’ instruction and as it is specified in this specification. Contractor-retained testing company shall have a minimum of three years of experience in performing such tests for retail fuel stations and shall be responsible for notifying EXCHANGE of the schedule for testing, following proper testing protocol, and prompt notification of test results.

Note: EXCHANGE may retain another independent testing agency to inspect and monitor the tanks and piping installation and testing performed by the contractor and his testing agency. EXCHANGE-retained testing agency shall have access to the site, work area, shop drawings and results of testing during the construction period. The Contracting Officer prior to implementation by the contractor must approve any changes or comments recommended by EXCHANGE-retained agency. Any testing conducted by EXCHANGE-retained testing agency is separate and independent of the contractor’s requirements and SHALL NOT be considered a substitute for any tests required to be performed by contractor. The General Contractor’s site superintendent must be notified of any independent testing schedule so that the General Contractor may ensure his representative’s presence during any such test procedure.

I . Contractor shall provide six copies of an Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. This manual will describe all systems and equipment installed by the contractor, including but not limited to: aboveground storage tank, piping and distribution lines, tank monitoring and release detection system, vapor recovery system, dispensers, air and water stations, and alarms. O&M Manual will list the manufacturers (including addresses and telephone numbers), make, model and serial numbers of all equipment and systems. Photocopies of equipment warranty registrations shall be included in the O&M Manual. The O&M Manual will be written in simple language and will give the operator information necessary to operate and maintain the system. Maintenance that is required but not normally performed by the operator will be so noted. The requirement for an O&M Manual may be met by compiling copies of materials provided by the manufacturers of the systems or equipment. However, if the manufacturer’s materials do not explain how the system or equipment works as installed, Contractor will provide necessary supplemental information.

J . Six copies of the release detection system operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided as follows:

1. The EXCHANGE Service Station Manager. 2. The Local General Manager. 3. The Installation Environmental Office. 4. Three copies to the Contracting Officer for internal distribution.

K . Contractor shall prepare and pay for all required State, County, and Local permits, applications and registrations or other documents required for the installation and operation of fuel storage and dispensing facilities. Co-ordinate the preparation and submission of documents with the Post or Base Environmental Office.

L . GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS OF COMPLETE FUELING SYSTEM TO EXCHANGE ENGINEER AND CONTRACTING OFFICER PRIOR TO TURNING OVER OF PROJECT

1.04 DRAWINGS

A . Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the site and job conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange his work accordingly, furnishing


such fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.

1.05 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A . Open pipe ends and equipment openings shall be closed and protected with caps or plugs (not tape) during installation. Equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. Backfill material shall be kept clear of all trash and debris. Dispenser and tank sumps shall be closed or covered to prevent water and construction debris from accumulating within. Barricades and construction fencing shall protect storage tanks and piping system. Upon completion of all work, the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, adjusted and operated. Belts, pulleys, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A . Contractor shall warrant the work specified according to the terms of the General Provisions. In addition, upon acceptance of the fuel dispensing system for beneficial use by EXCHANGE, he shall provide to the Contracting Officer the manufacturer's standard equipment warranty or warranties covering both parts and labor for a minimum period of one year. Warranty service shall be provided promptly upon request within 12 hours on weekdays and 24 hours on weekends. Contractor shall be responsible for the warranty of the equipment he furnished. Contractor is responsible for defects in installation of EXCHANGE-furnished equipment.

B . Fuel storage tanks shall carry a minimum thirty-year warranty against failure from internal or external corrosion and from structural failure. Manufacturer’s installation checklist must be completed and submitted to the manufacturer by the Contractor in order to provide a valid warranty. A photocopy of this document shall be included in the O&M manual and also be provided to the Contracting Officer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A . Contractor-furnished materials and equipment shall be as specified and/or as shown on the drawings. Equipment shall be the product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial number and catalog number on a durable plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent only will not be acceptable. Substitution of the specified equipment is only acceptable upon review and approval by the Contracting Officer or his authorized agent. To obtain approval, Contractor shall make a written request to the Contracting Officer. Contractor’s request will include or attach all data and information available on the equipment including UL certifications if applicable.

2.02 PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES

A . All pipes, fittings, appurtenances, manways, accessories, and valves shall be provided by the contractor after submittal to the Contracting Officer of shop drawings showing manufacturer and model number of each. A partial list of approved pipes, fittings, appurtenances, manholes, accessories, and valves is provided on the drawings.


B . All-metal flex connectors shall be used in all dispenser containment sumps, and be as shown in the drawings with all-metal tubes (no teflon), hose ends, galvanized malleable iron nipples at both ends affixed with crimped fittings.

C . Aboveground product, vapor recovery and vent piping shall be schedule 40 steel pipe with 150 lb. flanges or malleable iron screw fittings and couplings as shown on the drawings. Joints shall be connected using appropriate adhesive/sealant/gaskets compatible with gasoline, additives, alcohol-gasoline blended, and reformulated fuels.

D . Underground vent and vapor recovery piping shall be Underwriters Laboratory, Incorporated approved Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Line Pipe (RTRP) with molded fittings and adapters.

E . Contractor shall provide spill containers as shown on drawings. Each spill container shall have API color coded product identification stickers and tags. The ID tags will specify the tank number, tank capacity, and product type.

2.03 DOUBLE-WALL PRODUCT PIPING AND SECONDARY CONTAINMENT SYSTEM

A . All underground product piping (as shown on the drawings) shall be 2 inch double wall rigid FRP Ameron Dualoy 3000/LCX with bonded clamshell fittings as manufactured by NOV Ameron International.

1. Piping shall conform to UL-971 requirements.

B . The piping installation shall strictly follow the recommended installation practices described by the manufacturer. The secondary containment pipe shall contain product leaked from the primary product pipe and drain to the sealed pump man-way enclosure for leak detection and recovery of the released product.

1. The primary piping shall be capable of successfully passing an air pressure test at sixty pounds per square inch after bleed back pressure stabilization, which shall be established by bringing the line pressure to sixty pounds per square inch for a minimum of three hours. During the pressurizing period all fittings shall be observed for leaks by applying a soapy water solution. The secondary piping shall be capable of maintaining ten pounds per square inch for a one hour period during integrity testing.

2. The contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation that after the primary piping has passed a 60 psig pressure test, the product line pressure should be reduced and maintained at a pressure of 25 psig until all paving has been completed, with OPW pressure gauge assemblies in place on each line for daily observation and verification that the pipe is holding pressure.

3. Pressure gauge assemblies for testing shall be calibrated prior to use and be equipped with the proper pressure safety valve as recommended by piping manufacturer’s testing procedures.

C . Termination of product lines shall be within containment sumps with proper sealing of the ends to prevent water, liquid and debris from entering the sumps.

D . All containment sumps shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic water test to ensure that the sumps are product and vapor tight.

2.04 ELECTRONIC FUEL DISPENSING SYSTEM: EXCHANGE - FURNISHED/ CONTRACTOR - INSTALLED


A . EXCHANGE shall furnish multi-product, dual-hose type, blending dispensers to the contractor for installation. A Gilbarco control data distribution box as well as an Allied NexGen Equipment isolation board shall be furnished by EXCHANGE and installed by contractor to connect the dispensers as indicated on the drawings. The dispensers shall be delivered directly to the contractor on site. The contractor is responsible for receiving, verifying, storing, uncrating and protecting the equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the delivery and installation dates with contracting officer in advance to meet the construction schedule.

B . EXCHANGE-furnished dispensers will be Dresser Wayne “Ovation” as shown on the drawings. All hoses, nozzles, swivels, safety breakaways and any other hanging hardware shall be provided by the Contractor.

C . A Dresser Wayne service representative under EXCHANGE equipment contract will review and assist the contractor during installation and will perform initial start-up of each dispenser. Actual installation of the dispenser is not the responsibility of this service representative. The general contractor is responsible for providing knowledgeable, certified Wayne equipment installers as well as coordinating the assistance of the Dresser Wayne service representative.

2.05 ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANKS

A . Tanks shall meet the requirements of Military Handbook 1022A (1 Nov. 1999).

B . Requirements

1. UL 2085 Listed as both a “Protected” and a “Fire Resistant” AST 2. Both the Inner and Outer steel tanks are built to UL standards. 3. Uniform Fire Code UFC – Article 79 as a “Protected Tank” 4. UL 2244 Aboveground Flammable Liquid Tank System 5. Ballistics protection per UFC Article 79, and per UL2085 6. Impact protection per UFC Article 79, and per UL 2085 7. California Air Resources Board (CARB) testing requirements for air emissions 8. Steel Tank Institute (STI) Standard F941 for Thermally Insulated Aboveground

Storage Tanks.

C . Materials: Only new material shall be used in the manufacturing process, and the manufacturer shall ensure that the material used meets all appropriate specifications and quality assurance requirements.

D . Loading Conditions: Tanks shall meet the following design criteria.

1. Internal Load: Tank shall withstand an air pressure test of 3-5 phi. 2. Tank shall be designed to support accessory equipment such as ladders, pumps,

floating suction, etc. when installed according to manufacturer’s instructions and limitations.

3. Tank shall be provided with suitably designed and located lifting lugs which have a 2:1 safety factor.

E . Product Storage Requirements

1. Tank shall be capable of storing liquids with a specific gravity up to 1.0. 2. Tank is designed for operation at atmospheric pressure only. Both inner and

outer tanks shall have openings of sufficient size to meet normal and emergency venting requirements stated in U.L. 2085, 142, UFC and NFPA.

3. Tank shall be capable of storing gasoline, additives, gasohol, ethanol, jet fuel, avgas, ultra-low sulfur diesel fuel, methanol or fuel oil at ambient temperatures.


F . Spill Containment

1. Tank shall have covered steel spill containment dike area complying with New York EPA regulations.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A . Certification Plate: Underwriters Laboratories label “Insulated Secondary Containment Aboveground Tank for Flammable Liquids,” shall be affixed to each tank.

B . Threaded Fittings: All threaded fittings shall be a material of construction consistent with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories. All fittings shall be protected using threaded plugs or suitable closure caps.

C . Flange Fittings: All flanged nozzles shall be of a material construction consistent with the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories. All nozzles shall be protected using suitable closure caps.

D . Manways

1. Manways shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories 142 standard with regard to construction, bolting and gaskets.

2. Location: Refer to drawings.

E . Steel Tank Supports

1. Design of the steel supports shall be per approval UL listing and be able to support the weight of the tank filled to capacity.

2. Location: Refer to drawings.

F . Manufacturer of Tank:

1. Modern Welding

2.07 TANK INVENTORY CONTROL AND RELEASE DETECTION SYSTEM A . Provide Veeder-Root TLS-450PLUS (860091-301) with integral printer and full 8-inch

WVGA LCD color touch screen display as required. The Veeder-Root TLS-450PLUS and all related components shall be purchased new, no less than 3 months since receipt from Gilbarco Veeder-Root. Use of manufacturer's latest model and latest software update is required. The Veeder-Root system consists of tank inventory control, release detection system (for tank, piping, and all sumps), control console, integral printer, tank probes, hydrostatic interstitial tank monitoring probes, sump sensors, fittings, etc., for a complete and operating system. Items below, generally describes minimum requirements for a working system. Part numbers may change or the system configuration may require additional items. Contractor must insure that modules, switches, sensors, etc, are adequate for a complete and working system that will meet installation and compliance requirements for the facility as constructed(see below, Section 13051, paragraph 3.18 INSTALLATION OF INVENTORY/LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM).

1. Console — Microprocessor-based standard model console provided with Dual RS-232 Module (Comm Slot 1), 3-Port Ethernet Module (Comm Slot 4) and 2-Port USB Module (Comm Slot 5) communication interface ports with external communication capability for automatic inventory control. Approximate console size 18.4” x 11.5” x 8.5”. The console


shall be wall mounted using external mounting tabs, at a height of not more than 5 feet from the floor.

2. Veeder-Root Series 846396-109- HGP MAG Plus magnetostrictive probe, a. 4” Gasoline Float Installation Kit with Phase-Two™ Water Detection 886100-000 b. 4” Diesel Float Installation Kit 846400-001

3. Mag Sump Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-112, with Mounting Brackets 330020-

012 4. Digital Pressure Line Leak Detector: Complete assemblies for detecting leaks in product

piping. Veeder-Root Series DPLLD 859080-001 for TRJ Red Jacket Pumps connected to controller in the building.

5. Dry Interstitial Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 794390-460 to be incorporated into the integral tank reservoir.

6. Dispenser Mag Sump/Pan Sensor: Veeder-Root Series 857080-111, with Mounting Bracket 330020-012

7. Overfill Alarm and Acknowledgement Switch: Veeder-Root Series 790091-001 for the alarm and Series 790095-001 for the acknowledgement switch.

8. Modules ordered separately: a. One Sixteen-Input Universal Probe/Sensor Interface Module 332812-001 b. One Universal Input/Output Interface Module 332813-001. c. One Risk Management Software Enhancement for DPLLD 332972-008 d. One BIR/ Accuchart with EDIM Software Enhancement 333149-001:

9. Console Features: a. Software: The console shall be equipped with TLS-450PLUS Application Software

333545-001 b. Printer: The console shall be equipped with an integral, thermal printer for hard-copy

documentation of reports. Reports shall be printed in rows/columns format. c. Display: The console shall be equipped with 8-inch full WVGA LCD color touch

screen display for on-site viewing of information, programming, operating and reporting functions.

d. Web-Enabled Remote Access e. Context Sensitive Help f. Workflow wizard for streamlined setup g. Customizable user logins with role-based access h. Customizable automatic events for email print reports, relay and pump control i. Remote software download capability when registered with Veeder-Root Services

2.08 DISPENSER AND PIPING SUMPS

A . The contractor shall furnish and install liquid-tight dispenser containment sumps under the product dispensers, to prevent any leaks or spills from escaping into the environment. The dispenser sumps shall be made of non-corrosive material and shall be compatible with the product being dispensed and with the chemicals and conditions found naturally in the underground environment.

B . Dispenser sumps shall be specifically designed for installation with Dresser Wayne Ovation 2 dispensers. All required stabilizers for shear valves and pipe entry conduits shall be factory-furnished. All sumps shall be product and vapor tight to ground and surface water.

C . The sumps and accessories shall be chemically comparable with products to be stored (gasoline, gasoline with 9.5% oxinol, gasoline with 5% methanol and cosolvent, gasoline with 15% ethanol, and gasoline with 20% MTBE).


D . All joints, connections, covers, pipe and conduit entries (including angular entries) shall be product and vapor tight.

E . Dispenser containment sumps shall be as compatible with the piping system selected.

F . Contractor shall clean and all sumps and equipment and piping in sumps with a mild soapy water solution after final testing of system. Contractor shall air out and dry inside of sumps, equipment and piping after cleaning.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL PIPING SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY CONTAINMENT

A . The Contractor shall install the double-wall piping system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation practices and instructions. Particular attention will be paid to connection of fittings according to manufacturer’s specifications. If the piping manufacturer specifies the use of particular tools to avoid over-tightening of fittings and damage to O-rings, contractor shall obtain and use recommended tools.

B . The interstitial space of the double-wall product line shall be air tested at the pressure recommended by the tank manufacturer and not to exceed 5 psig and the primary product line shall be tested at 1-1/2 times the operating pressure. The test pressure shall be held for one hour. The contractor shall conduct at least two tests, one at the time of installation, and the other during system startup. The Contractor shall furnish written reports of the test results to the Contracting Officer.

C . Contractor shall test all secondary containment and demonstrate that it meets Virginia requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF TANK FITTINGS, MANWAYS AND APPURTENANCES

A . Requirements for Tank Fittings, Manways, and Appurtenances:

1. Contractor shall be responsible to provide proper clearance between tank shell and submerged pumps or fill tubes. Contractor shall check the installed tank diameter at the opening into which the pump or tube installed and make necessary adjustments to maintain the specified minimum clearance of six inches from the bottom of the tank.

2. All manway covers and lids will be API color-coded according to the following: Regular unleaded covers will be white with a black cross, mid-grade unleaded covers will be blue with a white cross, and high-grade (premium) will be red with a white cross, low sulfur diesel will be yellow with a black”U”. . Vapor Recovery covers will be orange.

3. ASTS will be labeled according to API standard color coding applicable to the product contained in the tank or compartment.

3.03 TRENCHING AND PIPE CHASES

A . Pipe trenches must be large enough to accommodate the piping, together with sufficient spacing and backfill material to provide protection from damage that might be caused by settlement, abrasion, vibration, expansion, contraction, or foreign materials. Vapor-return piping will be separated from product piping by at least twice the largest nominal pipe diameter, with at least six inches of distance between the piping and the trench excavation walls. Trenching width shall be sufficient to maintain the clearance between the pipes and side walls as shown on the drawings and of a depth sufficient to provide


the proper bed and cover, and pitch of the lines. Note that the minimum cover to finish grade over product lines in paved area is 12 inches and 18 inches in nonpaved areas. Pipe chase in the concrete or asphalt paving shall be constructed as detailed on the drawings and as located on the plot plan. The minimum spacing between adjacent pipes is twice the pipe diameter between pipes; however, piping runs shall not be layered. Piping crossover must be minimized, but where piping runs must cross, the manufacturer's crossover fittings shall be used. Piping will be installed in a manner that will facilitate testing, resist corrosion, and prevent damage and movement of system components.

3.04 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL

A . Pea Gravel: Standard bedding and backfill material shall be a naturally-rounded aggregate, clean and free flowing, with particle size not less than 1/8" or more than 1/2" in diameter. The contractor shall furnish a pea gravel sieve analysis to the Contracting Officer prior to use.

B . Storage and Handling of Bed/Backfill Material on Site:

1. Contractor shall store these materials so as not to allow bed/backfill material to intermix with any excavated soil or other material on site. Contamination of self-compacting gravel could result in need for mechanical compaction, as the minimum/maximum particle sizes specified are critical for self-compaction.

2. In freezing condition, material must be kept dry and free of ice. 3. Do not intermix gravel, stone or gravel crushing, or sand in the same excavation

or connected excavations.

C . Poor Soil Conditions/Soils Stabilization and Filter Fabric (Pipe trenches and sumps):

1. Where soils of low bearing capacity are found such as plastic clays or where sand/sand-gravel may be of a free-flowing nature, a separation is necessary between the pea gravel backfill and the soil to prevent penetration or migration.

2. Contractor shall line the excavation completely with an inert filter fabric, as per manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Approved manufacturers are:

a. DuPont "Typar" Style 3401 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. b. Monsanto "Bidim" C-22 - 4 oz./Sq. Yd. c. Phillips "Supac" Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd. d. Celanese "Mirafi" 140 Fabric - 4.1 oz./Sq. Yd.

4. Material shall be cut to an appropriate width for the depth and width of the excavation so that there is sufficient material to overlay the top edges of the excavation during installation. Laps of material along the excavation should be a minimum of 2 feet.

D . Bedding of Product Lines: A minimum of six inches deep compacted bed, graded to give the proper slope of depth of pipe runs, shall be laid in the trench before pipe runs are installed. Pipe runs shall be fabricated at grade and installed and properly spaced on the completed bed. After making necessary connections of runs, branches or fittings, which shall be made up in the trench, bed material should be placed back under the piping and properly compacted.

3.05 BACKFILLING OF PIPING


A . After satisfactory completion of required testing and inspection of piping, backfilling of trenches to subgrade elevation shall be completed. A minimum of six inches of backfill shall be bedded under the piping and minimum of 18 inches of combined cover (including surface paving and backfill material) over the piping is required. Ensure that marking tape or wire (for future location of piping) has been placed in the backfill at this time.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS

A . Pumps shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Installer shall be familiar with such practices and procedures and shall strictly follow the same during installation.

B . Contractor shall measure the diameter of each tank at 4" NPT tank fitting.

C . Contractor shall verify length of submersible pump. In any case, there shall be minimum 6" clearance between the tank and the bottom of the pump.

D . Pump shall be installed in 4" tank opening with approved non-setting thread sealant. Sealant shall be compatible/suitable for use with product being stored in the tank.

E . 4" riser pipe shall be tightened and pump shall be lined up with discharge outlet and fuel lines.

F . Electrical connections shall be made with approved fittings to junction box. Install ground wire using standard color codes.

G . Submersible pumps shall not be wired to run continuously.

H . Submersible pumps shall never be used to pump water from the tank.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF ABOVEGROUND TANKS

A . Tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. EXCHANGE assumes no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.

B . Install aboveground tank in accordance PEI RP-200, UL Standards, NFPA 30, NFPA 30A and any applicable Federal, State, County or City requirements.

C . Welding shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.” Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification test for welding processes.

D . All above ground tanks and piping shall be cleaned, primed and painted with acrylic paint, color white.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF FUEL DISPENSING EQUIPMENT

A . Dispensers will be mounted on islands that are protected from damage from vehicle collisions by posts, bollards or concrete bumpers as denoted on the plans. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. If unusual conditions or circumstances exist which could damage or impair the system and the special protective measures required are not covered in these instructions, their installation shall be coordinated directly with the manufacturer. Actual installation of equipment and related components shall be under direct supervision at all times to assure compliance with specified requirements. Shear valves or breakaway devices will be installed on each


product line and on each vapor return line and carefully tested for functioning. Actuation must be free and unobstructed. Shear valves for the product line must be double-poppetted. Dispenser sumps shall be placed such that the sump edge sets ½ inch above the finished surface of the dispenser island. Dispensers will be securely bolted to their mounting surface according to the manufacturer’s instructions to ensure proper functioning of the shear valves

B . Hanging hardware for dispensers shall be tested for continuity by experienced and knowledgeable personnel, in accordance with PEI/RP 400-12.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF INVENTORY / LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

A . Installation of Veeder-Root tank inventory control and release detection system shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall retain the services of the nearest authorized Veeder-Root distributor/installer. The name of the nearest distributor can be obtained by contacting Veeder-Root. This distributor shall be responsible for receiving and storing equipment, helping contractor to locate the conduits as shown on the drawings and installing the entire system excluding conduits and power wiring. At the completion of the installation, the contractor and installer shall test and shall certify the entire system. This distributor shall provide warranty for his work excluding hardware failure.

B . Programming shall be in accordance with local operational conditions and applicable regulations. The program shall include, but not limited to, tank and line tightness monitoring, tank level monitoring, interstitial monitoring, tank overfill alarms, tank low level alarms, and tank/dispenser sump monitoring. The contractor shall print a complete Veeder-Root program report and leave with the manager. Programming and operations of the Veeder-Root system shall be documented by a certified Veeder-Root technical.

C . All circuits shall be run in rigid conduit. Conduit shall be sealed off and jointed in explosion proof boxes. Conductor runs between all inventory and leak detection equipment, and the Veeder-Root system shall be made with continuous conductors (no splices). Inventory and leak detection circuits shall be in separate conduits for dispenser and pump power runs.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF OVERFILL ALARM AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT SWITCH

A . The mounting location for the overfill alarm and acknowledgment switch shall be in the immediate vicinity of the storage tank delivery points and shall be clearly visible to and easily accessible to the fuel delivery driver. Alarm shall activate at 90% of the tank’s actual storage capacity.

3.11 EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SWITCH

A . Install the master emergency shut-off switch inside the building at the register areas. Add additional emergency shut-off switches outside at a well-lighted locations in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 30A, Section 6.7. Each switch will be identified by an all- weather sign with letters at least 1 inch high with text as shown in the drawings. Letters will be in contrasting color to sign background, and the sign will be mounted at least 5 feet above ground level. The switch shall be installed in such a manner this it is clearly visible from the dispensers and meets ADA requirements.

B . The emergency shut-off switch shall terminate electric power to all dispensers, pumps, and dispenser control devices. Power for the illumination of all dispensing areas will not be affected by the activation of the switch. The switch shall be of such a design or installed in such a way that customers cannot reset it. Unless a fire alarm box or


automatically self-dialing telephone is located adjacent to the emergency shut-off, activation of the emergency shut-off switch shall transmit an alarm to the fire station or 24 hour security desk or other emergency agency. Contractor shall coordinate with facility officials regarding the final location of the alarm transmittal.

3.12 SYSTEM CHECKING

A . In addition to normal construction observation, three formal system checks shall be conducted. The Contractor shall inform the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer one week in advance of the day and time of each test. Each test shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor is cautioned that all components of the system being tested shall be, installed, ready, prepared for testing, exposed and in proper operating condition for each testing upon the arrival of the Contracting Officer and Architect/Engineer. All costs associated with retesting or additional visits by the Contracting Officer, Architect/Engineer or other third-party technicians shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

B . The manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, in addition to the codes and standards listed in paragraph 1.02, A of this specification shall be referenced to determine proper installation and procedures for each system check. Documentation of each test (including copies of field notes) shall be provided to Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer. EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no responsibility or liability for the consequences of any testing practice.

C . The Contractor shall provide labors and technicians to assist the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer in the system operation and testing. The Contactor for observation by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer shall conduct all testing procedures. At the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor will be provided a copy of the checklist used by the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer for each test. The following system checks shall be conducted:

1. Tank Installation. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Pressure and soap testing of each tank. Tank placement shall be observed.

2. Product/Vent Lines And Sumps. Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of proper line placement, bedding and slope. Pressure test of the complete piping system prior to backfilling of piping. Soap test all pipe runs including fittings and joints. Water test all dispenser and transition sumps.

3. Final System Check: Observed for proper installation and use of materials in conformance with plans and specifications. Observation of dispenser sumps and sensors. Observation of tank pump, fill, vent and interstitial systems, sumps and sensors. Observation of Veeder-Root system programming and detection of sensors flats.

D . At the end of each system check, all results shall be noted. The Contractor shall provide copies of the manufactures certifications indicating designation as a certified installer, authorized service contractor and technician shall be provided during final system check. Copies of the technician’s certifications (i.e. Veeder-Root) provided shall be from the individuals responsible for installation of the appropriate system component. Full documentation of test results, including the test procedure used (and a copy of the test procedure’s third-party certification) shall be provided to the Contracting Officer and the Architect/Engineer.

E . System checks listed above are not intended to be exhaustive checks or detailed inspections of the work. Therefore, EXCHANGE and the Architect/Engineer assume no


responsibility or liability for the completeness or proper installation of the work. The system checks listed above do not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities under this Contract or relieve him of any portion of the system warranty.

3.13 FINAL ITEMS

A . All product piping (including dispensers) shall be bled completely of all trapped air as submerged pumps are tested. System shall be tested for tightness and proper operation of leak detectors and impact valves. At least 300 gallons (100 gallons of each product) of fuel shall be pumped through each nozzle of each dispenser to insure that all trapped air is purged from the product lines.

B . After meter calibration of each dispenser, filters shall be removed and replaced.

C . Flow restriction devices must be installed if the system is determined to dispense fuel at more than 10 gallons per minute (GPM).

D . Projects constructed where rules require Stage I Vapor Recovery Systems to meet efficiency standards, shall be successfully tested by the contractor according to CARB Test Procedures.

3.14 TESTING:

A . During installation and upon completion of installation, the AST system shall be tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer or his representative. This testing shall be conducted using EPA third-party and CARB certified methods as applicable.

B . Testing shall comply with all applicable sections of 40 CFR, Part 63.

C . Stage I testing is required, since this location may have a gasoline throughput in excess of 100,000 gallons per month. Stage I tests will include CARB TP 201.1E, and TP 201.3 in addition to any other appropriate tests for the system. Certification of successful testing will be provided by Contractor and attached to the Notification of Compliance Status referred to in paragraph 1.01I of this section. Contractor is responsible for providing USEPA and applicable State offices notice of this CARB testing at least 60 days prior to conducting this test. Notification will be in writing or in written electronic format (telephone voice notification is not sufficient).

D . Contractor shall perform and report the results of a full compliance test of the Stage I vapor recovery system as noted below. At a minimum, tank and line tightness tests, and pressure decay tests of the Stage I vapor recovery system shall be performed by the contractor’s tester and a written report documenting all the results shall be provided to the Contracting Officer Following testing and certification, the system shall be shown to function under simulated actual use conditions, demonstrating the function and operation of the equipment. As a condition of acceptance, written certification shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer in evidence of full compliance with the requirements specified herein.

E . Contractor will direct or conduct tank and line tightness tests by an EPA Third-Party-Certified test method, and documentation of passing these tests will be provided prior to project close-out

F . Contractor will test and document passing tests for all secondary containment systems, as recommended by the equipment manufacturers or required by applicable regulations. This testing will include secondary containment for lines, submersible turbine pump (STP) containment, piping sumps, under-dispenser containment (UDC), and spill containment at fill points, as follows.


1. If no state or federal requirements specify tightness tests for STP containment sumps, piping sumps, UDC, or spill containment, contractor will perform hydrostatic tests.

2. Hydrostatic tests will be performed as follows. a. UDC, STP and piping sumps must be filled with water to a level above all

containment wall or bulkhead perforations or penetrations. Spill buckets must be filled with water to a level 2” below the drop tube or fill connection opening.

b. Mark the liquid line with paint or other indelible marking device. c. Let stand for one hour, minimum. d. Observe liquid level and record results. e. If an observable drop in liquid level is identified, the containment has

failed this test. Conduct any necessary repairs or replacement and repeat test until successful.

f. Submit a report documenting successful testing to the contracting officer.

3.15 TRAINING OF EXCHANGE PERSONNEL

A . During installation and upon completion of installation, the AST system shall be tested in the presence of the Contracting Officer or his representative. This testing shall be conducted using EPA third-party and CARB certified methods as applicable. (Where applicable, contractor shall perform and report the results of a full start-up compliance test of the Stage I and Stage II vapor recovery systems as noted below.) At a minimum, tank and line tightness tests, pressure decay and dynamic backpressure (liquid blockage) tests of the vapor recovery system shall be performed by the contractor’s tester and a written report documenting all the results shall be provided to the Contracting Officer Following testing and certification, the system shall be shown to function under simulated actual use conditions, demonstrating the function and operation of the equipment. As a condition of acceptance, written certification shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer in evidence of full compliance with the requirements specified herein.

B . Contractor shall provide total 8 hours of training of EXCHANGE employees on the operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. Training shall not be conducted during final testing and testing of the tank system, so that the quality of instruction is not compromised. A training attendance roster shall be completed for each training session held. The roster shall indicate the training subject, training date, length of the training class, the name, phone number and signature of the instructor, the name of the company he represents, as well as the full name, office symbol and complete telephone number of each attendee. A copy of class rosters and accompanying photograph of the class attending each session and instructor will be placed in each copy of the O&M manual.

END 33 52 10